diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/67479-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67479-0.txt | 12319 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 12319 deletions
diff --git a/old/67479-0.txt b/old/67479-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 4193e26..0000000 --- a/old/67479-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12319 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Day of Resis, by Lillian Frances -Mentor - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: The Day of Resis - -Author: Lillian Frances Mentor - -Illustrator: Harry L. V. Parkhurst - -Release Date: February 23, 2022 [eBook #67479] - -Language: English - -Produced by: Richard Tonsing and the Online Distributed Proofreading - Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This book was produced from - images made available by the HathiTrust Digital Library.) - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE DAY OF RESIS *** - - -[Illustration] - - - - - THE DAY OF RESIS. - - - BY - LILLIAN FRANCES MENTOR. - - - ILLUSTRATED BY - HARRY L. V. PARKHURST. - -[Illustration] - - NEW YORK: - COPYRIGHT, 1897, BY - _G. W. Dillingham Co., Publishers_. - - MDCCCXCVII. - - [_All rights reserved._] - - - - - CONTENTS. - - - Chapter Page - I. The Strange Document 7 - II. Into the Heart of Africa 17 - III. In the Cavern 27 - IV. Death Faces Them 35 - V. The City of “On” 43 - VI. The Banquet 50 - VII. The Law of the Land of On 59 - VIII. The Royal Hunt 73 - IX. The Gold Mine and Cave of Ice 81 - X. The Journey to the Lake 89 - XI. The Fight of the Sea Monsters 94 - XII. The Night of Prayer 101 - XIII. The Accusation 107 - XIV. The Storm 114 - XV. In the Track of the Storm 121 - XVI. Enola Found 129 - XVII. “She is Mad.” 134 - XVIII. Onrai Visits the Priest 139 - XIX. Onrai Confesses his Love 148 - XX. The Agony of Onrai 156 - XXI. In Peril 162 - XXII. “They must Die” 168 - XXIII. A Message from the Priest 179 - XXIV. The Crisis Past 185 - XXV. “He will Marry You” 189 - XXVI. A Strange Discovery 195 - XXVII. In the Hole 201 - XXVIII. Prisoners in the Cavern of the Dead 209 - XXIX. The Death-Trap 219 - XXX. The Cave Dweller’s Funeral 225 - XXXI. Lost in the Cavern 235 - XXXII. The Tortuous Tramp 248 - XXXIII. Again in the World of Light 256 - XXXIV. Again with Friends 261 - XXXV. A Black Surprise 265 - XXXVI. Cleft by the Earthquake 273 - XXXVII. In the Crater 280 - XXXVIII. Killed in the Crevice 290 - XXXIX. The Field of Diamonds 298 - XL. The Camp of the Onians 303 - XLI. The Slaughter 312 - XLII. Buried Alive 323 - XLIII. Lost 331 - XLIV. Out of the Ashes 339 - XLV. Searching for Bodies 347 - XLVI. We Die Together 358 - XLVII. In the City Again 366 - XLVIII. No Hope of Escape 376 - XLIX. The Day of Resis 385 - - - - - THE DAY OF RESIS. - - - - - CHAPTER I. - THE STRANGE DOCUMENT. - - -The following letter and document were the first causes of the long -journey, and strange adventure. - - -“DEAR MISS CAMERON:—You will probably be much surprised to hear from me -in this out-of-the-way place, but knowing the pleasure you take in -everything pertaining to Africa, I thought you might be interested in a -matter which came before my notice recently. - -Some months ago I joined a hunting party bound for the interior of -Africa, and on our return march at Rehenoko we fell in with another -caravan bound for the coast. Having a common destination, Zanzibar, we -travelled together. An Abyssinian, Sedai by name, was in charge of this -caravan. He is a large, powerful man, and very intelligent. I often -talked with him during the long marches, and one day he told me that he -had on this trip, come across a strange manuscript, a part of which he -had been able to decipher, but some words of which he could not make -out. He asked me to help him decipher the difficult phrases; so that -evening, after everything had been made snug for the night, Sedai -produced a piece of goat-skin, on which was inscribed the following -strange tale. - - -‘Name Philip Harding—English—left England July 6, 1801—Zanzibar, -February 16, 1802—expedition just left Bagamayo—myself and nine other -sailors started to overtake it—on 26th, lost our way—wandered long and -far—hostile tribes—fight—four men killed—others escaped—three die with -fever, reach mountains—one man killed by lion—discover opening into -mountain—make torches and enter—companion starved—discovered line of -broken stones—followed these—found bridge—crossed this—followed stones -again—found secret door—Land of On—people thought me from another -planet—lived in temple—strange people—no knowledge or connection with -outside world—highly civilized in their way—have strange Day of -Resis—mysterious ceremonies on this day—people never mention it—day -sacred—here nineteen years one month and sixteen days—made escape—looked -five days for opening key—removed stone set in cliff behind palm tree -under eagle’s rock mountain—lifted lever seen in spring—rock door turned -giving time to pass through—passed into cave—crossed bridge—dropped -torches in lake, am lost—exhausted—starving—if document ever found write -friends—growing weaker—can write no mo——’ - - -Here the writing ended. The first part, or that part which had been -written before entering the cave was in regular lines, but the last was -evidently written after entering the dark cave, or passage, as the -characters were scattered and very irregular. Sedai intends placing the -matter before the next party who are about to enter the interior, and -have them look up the mysterious cave and land. He says that the old -man, of whom he got the manuscript, is still living, and knows the -entrance to the cave, in which he found the body of Harding still warm, -and on it this strange document. - -Sedai is a trustworthy fellow, or otherwise I would take no stock in his -story, or manuscript. - -Hoping you may find some interest in this strange tale, I am, - - Very Sincerely Yours, - FRANK BOYD.” - - -Such was the letter and weird tale which came in Enola Cameron’s mail -one morning in the early nineties. Only the fact of hearing from Frank -Boyd in Zanzibar surprised her. The story in itself did not surprise -her, for she had so long made a study of Africa and its dark secrets, -that nothing pertaining to it seemed strange to her. She was as -enthusiastic in this research as most women were in studying the art of -dress and beauty. She had met the great explorer Stanley during his late -visit to New York, and had read the story of his travels again and -again. She had met Herbert Warde socially, had overhauled his trophies -to her heart’s content, and his books had also been added to the long -shelf of African works in her library. Here poor Jameson’s story had -filled her eyes with tears, and here, too, she had escorted Glave that -she might, in confidence, reveal to him the one great desire of her -heart, and to learn from him the possibility of its fulfillment. She had -studied the history of the dark continent from every obtainable source. - -Works, which for the average woman held no attraction, aroused in her -the liveliest interest. Her enthusiasm had reached such a pitch that but -one course seemed open to her, namely, to experience the adventures -which had made the names of Baker, Grant, Speke, Livingstone and Stanley -famous. She had passed her twentieth birthday; she was of medium height -and well-rounded figure, brimming over with health and strength, as was -shown by her clear, rosy complexion and bright eyes, which lighted up -with enthusiasm as new thoughts opened to life in her active brain. - -There was nothing of the so-called New Woman about her; far from it; she -was a womanly woman with a great sympathetic heart and kindly nature. -She was an orphan, her parents having died when she was yet a child, -leaving her with a life-long friend of the mother. This was Mrs. Graham, -a most estimable woman, wealthy and moving in the best circle in the -city in which they lived. Enola had long since learned to look upon Mrs. -Graham and her kind husband as her second parents, and she was as dearly -loved by them as were their own children. She had a snug fortune of her -own and was thoroughly independent. - -But now that she had made up her mind to go to Africa and ascertain the -truth, or fallacy, of the tale which had just reached her, she felt a -little hesitancy in broaching the subject to her friends. But she was -not the one to be intimidated so easily, so went direct to the library, -where she knew that Mr. Graham and Harry, the son, would be, and opened -the subject at once. - -“Uncle,” she said (she always called her second parents uncle and aunt), -“I am going to Africa, and will want your help.” - -Mr. Graham’s glasses fell from his nose, so suddenly did he look up. - -“To Africa,” said he; “Well, has it come to this.” - -“Exactly,” said Enola. “Now don’t look as if I had declared my intention -of committing suicide, although in your eyes I suppose the two are -synonymous.” - -“When do you start?” asked Mr. Graham. Having long since learned that to -cross Enola was to make her the more determined to carry out her own -plans. - -“To-day or to-morrow, or as soon as you can make preparations. Now -remember, I am only suggesting this adventure; you are the real -instigator of the project, and have asked me to accompany you, you -know.” - -“Well, if that isn’t a woman for you,” said Mr. Graham, laughing in -spite of himself. “You come here declaring your intention of going to -Africa, asking my help and then tell me that it is I who must assume all -responsibility. Well, I will do it for your sake, but I hope it is not -to be out of the regular beaten paths of travel in Africa, for it might -not be pleasant, you know, fighting hostile natives with a woman about.” -And Mr. Graham again laughed. - -“The woman will take care of herself, never fear,” said Enola. “But -seriously, uncle, I never would have asked you to accompany me on this -journey, but for your having spoken some time ago of your intention of -going to France to spend your vacation, and the thought occurred to me -that you might care to go with me for two reasons. First, of course, to -be my escort, and secondly, because the adventure would please you. And -as for the danger, from what I can glean from Mr. Boyd’s letter, I -should say that we will not meet with any great amount of this, for, -from the coast to the mountains, the road leads through a comparatively -open country, and if we start now we will get to Zanzibar about the -right time to enter the interior. I anticipate but very little trouble -in reaching the mountains. What will happen after that I cannot say.” - -“The adventure will just suit my ideas of such things,” said Mr. Graham, -“and I will go with you gladly. And you want to start immediately?” - -“Why, yes,” said Enola. “This man Sedai was to present the matter before -the first party entering the interior, and if we should wish to be the -ones to discover this strange land, we must lose no time in getting to -Zanzibar. It will not take long to make preparations, will it?” - -“Well, no,” said Mr. Graham. “We will take but very little with us from -this country, for everything can be obtained in Zanzibar. Let us see,” -and he consults a New York paper. “To-day is Friday and the Paris sails -from New York next Wednesday. We can leave here on Sunday evening if you -wish to, and mother and Nellie can get packed in that time, and arrive -in New York Tuesday morning. We can make what few purchases we need, and -go on the steamer that same night. Now what do you think of that for -quick work?” - -“I see you are quite as enthusiastic as myself in this matter,” said -Enola. “But where will we leave Auntie and Nellie while we are making -our longer journey?” - -“Oh, they can stop somewhere in Europe,” said Mr. Graham, “or go on to -Zanzibar if they wish, and wait there for our return. I am afraid, -Enola, that you will have harder work to convince them of the -advisability of this trip, than you have had with me.” - -“I am afraid so,” said Enola, “but you must help me.” - -“I will do the best I can,” said Mr. Graham. - -“But look here,” said Harry, who had kept perfectly quiet up to this -time. “Where do I come in?” - -“Why, Harry, I supposed you understood that you were to accompany us,” -said Enola. “Your father is perfectly willing, I know, and your mother -will not object when she learns that I am determined on going. It will -be pleasanter to have you with us, for there will be so few of us at the -most, and among strangers home faces will be very comforting.” - -“It will have to be pleasant or otherwise,” said Harry, “for I intend -accompanying you, most certainly. I wouldn’t see you take such a journey -without me. There ought to be two of us with you anyway Enola, so that -in case anything should happen one of us, you would still have another -to protect you. It is a serious thing I should judge, to have to trust -wholly to the half savage negroes who will make up your escort. So we -must guard against any contingency.” - -“Very well,” said Enola, “then it is settled that we start on Sunday -night.” - -“Sunday night if you can get ready and I can get accommodations on the -steamer,” said Mr. Graham. - -“Don’t worry about me, uncle,” said Enola. “Look out for yourself and -Auntie. I will be ready,” and saying this Enola turned and left the -room. - -Harry had long since learned to love Enola, but she had told him -positively when he approached her on the subject of marriage, that she -only thought of him as a brother, but that sometime she might learn to -think of him in a different way; until that time, however, he must not -mention the subject again. Harry had promised, and so the matter had -rested; but he had not forgotten her words, and he now saw a chance, -while on this long journey, to win the love he craved. - -He was twenty-eight, and by hard work, and strict attention to his -duties, had been promoted to the position of cashier in the bank of -which his father was president. He and his father had both left the bank -for an indefinite period just a few days before our story opens, fully -decided on taking a long vacation, spending the time in Europe. So -Enola’s plans had not upset theirs to any great extent; they would now -take a trip into Africa, instead of through Europe. - -When they had thought the matter over for some time, they came to the -conclusion that the African trip would be more to their liking, for they -were both good hunters and lovers of adventure. So Harry and his father -lost no time but went out that same afternoon and made purchases of -shotguns, rifles and pistols, fishing tackle, and some of the more -necessary medicines. They trusted to getting everything else which they -might need in New York and in Zanzibar. - -That evening at the dinner table, the subject was brought up before Mrs. -Graham and Nellie. Both objected, but when Mr. Graham and Harry both -avowed their intention of accompanying Enola, then the ladies gave their -consent. - -Sunday came around and the party had gotten all ready and started for -New York. Arriving there some few purchases were made, and then in the -evening the party boarded the great steamer which was to carry them to -Southampton. The following day opened up bright and beautiful, Enola -remarking that this foretold success. The steamer left the dock early -and moved slowly down the bay, past Governor’s Island, Bedloe’s Island, -the Statue of Liberty, and then along the Staten Island shore, past -Quarantine, the forts, Fire Island, Sandy Hook, and then, after a -glimpse of Coney Island, Brighton, Manhattan Beach and Far Rockaway, the -steamer turned her nose toward the Old World, and land was soon out of -sight. The trip was an enjoyable one, the steamer not breaking her -record, but still reaching Southampton in less than seven days. They did -not tarry in England, but took one of the Channel steamers for Boulogne -Sur Mer, and arriving here boarded a train for Paris, which city was -reached the same night. The following day Mr. Graham looked up a steamer -for Alexandria, and learned that one sailed for that port on Saturday -from Marseilles. This was Thursday, so no time must be lost in reaching -Marseilles. Sleeping accommodations were secured on the night train, and -the following morning found them in the quaint old city. The day was -spent in taking a drive along the Mediterranean. It was at a time when -the Reviera is generally crowded, and the beautiful driveway was filled -with elegant equipages. - -The following morning they took the steamer for Alexandria. - -This was the most delightful part of the trip. The sky never looked so -blue, the water never so calm, the sun never so bright, and the air -never seemed so pure as on this two weeks’ trip, from Marseilles to -Alexandria. Stops were made at Algiers, Tunis and at several other -points before reaching Alexandria, and at these different places, the -boat stopping for a few hours, our friends disembarked, and made short -excursions over the towns. - -At Alexandria a freight steamer was found bound for Madagascar, and -arrangements were made with the Captain to give the ladies his cabin, -Mr. Graham and Harry being satisfied with humbler quarters. Down through -the Suez Canal, into the Red Sea, out through the Gulf of Aden and then -into the Indian Ocean, and the little steamer headed due south. This -trip was rather slow but without much hardship, the Island of Zanzibar -was at last sighted, and, later in the day, they were taken off in -lighters. - -“The civilized part,” as Enola called it, of the journey was finished, -and it remained now to make preparations for that other journey, which -might prove less agreeable and a great deal more dangerous. - - - - - CHAPTER II. - INTO THE HEART OF AFRICA. - - -After landing at Zanzibar, the labor of equipment began. Bales of cloth -and boxes of wire, innumerable colored beads and trinkets were shipped -to Bagamayo in charge of reliable Zanzibari, the most trustworthy of -African carriers. - -Harry first looked up the reputation of Sedai, the Abyssinian, and -finding this to be good, he then went in search of the man himself. He -was found on the quay with a lot of natives, and upon Harry telling him -what he wanted, he followed him to the hotel. Sedai was a monstrous -fellow, standing fully six and a half feet high, and built like a -Hercules. His skin was of a bronze color, smooth and shiny; his eyes -were piercing black, his forehead high, and his face above the average -in intellect for one of his race. - -“You remember Mr. Boyd, do you not?” asked Mr. Graham, when the hotel -had been reached. - -“Perfectly well,” answered the Abyssinian. - -“And you believe that the mysterious Land of On exists?” - -“I do.” - -“I wish to make that belief a certainty. Will you join us and get -together a proper number of carriers and natives to insure comparative -safety in making the journey?” - -“Gladly,” said Sedai. - -“You shall have something more than the usual amount paid for such -services, for the journey may entail more than the usual amount of work -and danger.” - -“I shall expect nothing more than I have been accustomed to getting,” -answered the Abyssinian. - -“We will decide on that later,” said Mr. Graham, “but tell us now of the -finding of the goat-skin.” - -“I will do so,” said Sedai. “When on my last expedition, far up in the -country, I heard this story from the mouth of an old man. It may be -false, but I believe it to be true. Umsaga, that is the name of the old -man, said: “One day when I was quite a boy I was out hunting on the -mountain side, and among the undergrowth disclosed a flat stone, which -had at some remote period covered an opening about four feet square, in -the side of the mountain. Being curious to know whither the hole led, I -entered, but had gone only a short distance when I heard a groan. This -scared me but I determined to learn what it was that had made the noise. -I returned to the outside and procuring a torch, again entered the cave, -and followed in the direction from which the sound came, and had not -gone far when I almost stumbled over the prostrate body of a man. I felt -it and found it still warm, but upon close examination found that life -was extinct. He was of the white race, but exposure and starvation had -tanned and drawn the skin tight over the bones. By his side was a knife, -and clutched in his hand was a piece of goat-skin, on which he had cut -strange characters, which I could not decipher. I took the goat-skin and -never again entered the cave.” - -“This was the old man’s story,” continued Sedai, “and offering him a -piece of cloth for the goat-skin, he eagerly accepted it and I left -him.” - -“And you could read it?” asked Mr. Graham. - -“I was for a time in the service of an Englishman in my own country and -knew some English. I have learned more since, but I could not make out -all of the letters. With Mr. Boyd’s help, however, all was made plain. -It is here,” and Sedai saying this, handed the parchment to Mr. Graham. - -The party gathered around Mr. Graham and examined the goat-skin closely. - -“And the old man never sought to solve the mystery?” said Harry. - -“So he said,” answered Sedai. - -“This parchment tells us how to leave this strange country, when once it -is entered,” said Mr. Graham, “but it does not tell how to find the -secret door which is to admit us.” - -“The sailor found it,” said Enola, “and it seems to me that we ought -to.” - -“Well, we will never know until we get to the point where we may expect -to find it,” said Mr. Graham. “How far is it, Sedai, to this mountain, -through which we will have to go to find the strange country?” - -“About three hundred miles,” said Sedai, “through a country not -difficult to travel, and among natives not usually hostile.” - -“Can you be ready to start to-morrow?” asked Mr. Graham of Sedai. - -“I can,” said Sedai. - -“Then be at Bagamayo to-morrow at daybreak, ready to start.” - -“I will be there,” answered Sedai, and with this he left. - -That day a Mr. Bruce called on Mr. Graham, making a request to accompany -the expedition, and Mr. Graham, having looked up his reference and found -that he was a Scotchman of first-class standing both socially and -financially, he consented to his accompanying them. Later in the day the -party crossed over to Bagamayo, so as to be there for an early start in -the morning. - -Early on the following morning the caravan was drawn up and carefully -inspected by Mr. Bruce, Mr. Graham, Harry and Enola. Twenty donkeys and -one hundred carriers, with one cart, were to transport the goods of -barter. A double relay of six carriers was detailed to carry each of the -sedan chairs of Mrs. Graham and Nellie, after having learned that the -country through which they would pass would be open, and the tribes not -hostile had decided to accompany the caravan. They were desirous of -seeing the strange land and people. Mr. Graham, Mr. Bruce and Harry had -procured horses from an Arab in Bagamayo, and when the caravan was drawn -up it made an imposing sight, and one well calculated to inspire hostile -tribes with a wholesome fear. - -At six o’clock, with the sun shining brightly, and amid the shouts of -many Arabs and natives who had assembled to see them depart, the caravan -moved slowly out of Bagamayo. The American flag was unfurled, and -floated merrily in the breeze at the head of the column. Out through a -narrow lane they passed, the sun speeding to the west, beckoning them -on. Loveliness glowed around them, the fertile fields, rich vegetation, -strange trees bordering their path, the jubilant sounds of many insects, -the cry of cricket and pewit, all seemed to tell them that they had -started. - -The first camp was only five miles distant, and the next few days were -spent in completing the preparations for their long land journey. After -all was in readiness the caravan again started. From here on the roads -were mere footpaths, leading through fields in which naked women were at -work, who looked up and giggled as they passed. Passing on they entered -an open forest. Reaching the Kingimi, they passed over a bridge of -felled trees, made by some previous party. - -Harry came to the side of Enola’s chair and laughingly said: - -“One would think from the half-sad expression in your eyes, that you -were already regretting having taken this trip.” - -“You are mistaken, Harry; I was simply lost in admiration of the -beautiful scene about us.” - -“Yes, it is beautiful,” said Harry, “but it is so different from what I -have been used to, that I often find myself thinking, or wondering if it -is not all a dream, and if I will not wake up some morning in my room at -home, and find that I have only visited these lands in my dreams.” - -“Yes, it is decidedly out of the ordinary,” laughed Enola, as she saw -the serious look in Harry’s face; “but if you were as well read in -African history and lore of the people as I am, you would accept all -this as genuine at once. Listen. For centuries Africa has been known as -the Dark Continent. The edges of this immense tract have been known as -far back as history goes. Egypt, on the North, is the oldest government -on earth; while the nations bordering on the Mediterranean and Red seas, -were actors in the earliest recorded histories. Still, Africa to-day is -an unknown land. That Africa was a rich country, was proven by the -treasures brought from the interior by the rivers Nile, Niger and Congo. -That it was populous, was demonstrated by the millions of slaves -furnished by the native tribes to the outside world. For curiosity -alone, explorations were made in the early part of the century; but it -remained with Livingstone to first open up the Dark Continent, and with -Stanley, to pierce its very heart. Africa is to-day, however, a mystery -which, it seems, will never be penetrated. Strange stories come to us of -people never seen by white men, of customs foreign to all history, of -abandoned cities, of desolated countries. Africa is synonymous with -mystery and darkness, and nothing seems strange to me which is connected -with it.” - -“Such words should be convincing,” said Harry, “but my education in life -has been too practical to realize that there is so much mystery left in -the world in this, the nineteenth century.” - -“It will all be real enough before we get back to civilization, I have -an idea,” said Enola. - -“Well, it looks real enough now,” said Harry. “This moving caravan, -those hippopotami in the river, and the antelope in the forest, all -scout the idea of there being anything uncanny about our present -surroundings.” - -And so days passed, some amid pleasant surroundings, and others in a -part of the country not so agreeable. - -One day they passed through a continuous jungle. The path was only a -foot wide, each side being bordered with thorny plants and creepers, the -spiky twigs of which were as sharp as needles. The entire party was -badly scratched with these irritating twigs, and the caravan was in a -sad plight when it reached Msuwa that night. The chief of this tribe was -very kind to the tired and wounded party, however, and they remained in -this camp two days. After leaving here, the country was open and -beautiful, presenting a natural park, and the roads were good. - -They reached the Ungerangeri River on the evening of the twenty-fourth -day, where they encamped, and on the following morning crossed the river -and entered the Wakami territory. Five days later they reached the -Wassagahha district. Here several of the party were stricken with fever, -and several days were lost, but all getting better at last, the caravan -again moved on. Away off to the North and West, could be seen a long -range of mountains, in which, Sedai informed them, was situated the -hidden country of “On.” - -Shortly after leaving here they entered a very wild tract. Numberless -antelope, spring-bok, zebra and giraffes were seen, but upon their -approach they would scamper away. Here was a hunter’s paradise. What -nobleman’s reserve in civilization could compare with this vast expanse -of field and forest? How small and insignificant would they seem in -comparison! The first herd of elephant was also seen here, but they -passed them by without disturbing them. That evening they entered the -Usugara district, and although the mountains were a considerable number -of miles nearer, they still looked just as far away. The atmosphere in -this country is so clear it makes distances very deceiving. It was a -mountain world which they looked upon, for peak beyond peak, cone beyond -cone, fold above fold, they rolled away like so many waves. - -“We shall soon descend into the valley and across this to those distant -mountains directly west of us, at the base of which we shall find the -village in which lives the old man of whom I obtained the parchment. We -will reach there in four marches,” said Sedai. - -“And you say there are lions and tigers in the valley?” said Mr. Bruce. - -“Yes,” answered Sedai, “and this part of the journey will be very -dangerous.” - -And this proved to be true, for two evenings later, when the supper had -been eaten and all had been made snug for the night, Harry and Enola -came very near falling victims to one of these ferocious beasts. They -had wandered a little distance from the camp, and had sat down on a -mossy bank for a few moments’ talk before going to bed. They had been -here only a short time when they heard a rustle in the bushes, and -turning they saw, standing not ten yards away, with his yellow eyes -glowing through the semi-darkness, and his long tail swaying from side -to side, an immense lion. Harry had not brought his rifle, and they were -at the mercy of the beast. The lion seemed to realize this, for he -quietly settled down on his haunches and watched them intently. - -“Listen,” said Harry, and his lips hardly moved, “he will make a leap -for us, and when he does, stoop low and run toward him. We will try to -pass under him while he is in the air, and before he alights and turns -we may be able to reach camp.” - -“I understand,” said Enola. - -The lion again rose to his feet, and then settling on his haunches -prepared to spring. - -“Be ready,” said Harry. “Now,” and he darted forward, but stopped again -as soon as he could, for Enola’s hand had left his and she had fallen. -There she lay with the lion’s paw resting across her breast. Harry could -see that she had neither lost consciousness nor presence of mind, for -she was gazing steadfastly into the eyes of the huge beast. - -It was a terrible moment. Harry was afraid to move or cry for help, for -fear of the lion seizing Enola and making for the bush. - -All this time the lion was watching Harry intently, seeming to know that -interference would come from that quarter. But he was as powerless to -help Enola as if he had been bound hand and foot. He could see that she -was becoming weak from terror and loss of blood, and that she could -scarcely breathe owing to the weight of that fearful paw on her breast. -Her eyes closed several times, and Harry could see that she would soon -be unconscious. Something must be done. Would the lion, if he made a -rush for him, turn his attention from Enola long enough for her to get -out of reach? It mattered little what became of himself if he could but -save Enola. - -Harry seized a short piece of wood lying near him and made a rush for -the lion. The lion raised on his haunches as Harry struck him a powerful -blow between the eyes. - -“Roll out of the way,” said Harry. - -Enola rolled over once and then staggered to her feet, but sank down -again too weak to move farther. The lion was dazed for an instant by the -blow, but only for an instant, and with a lightning stroke of the paw, -struck Harry on the shoulder, knocking him senseless and bleeding on the -ground. - -“Help,” cried Enola, but the sound was so faint that she despaired of -its reaching the camp. Nevertheless it was heard, and the commotion -caused the lion to turn to see what was happening. That look was his -death warrant, for a bullet struck him squarely in the eye, and he -rolled over with scarcely a groan, dead. One paw was lying across -Harry’s neck, as though defying them even in death to take his prey from -him. - -Mr. Bruce rushed up gun in hand, and with several of the carriers bore -Enola and Harry to the camp. Restoratives were administered and Enola -soon regained consciousness, but Harry lay in a stupor for hours. Both -were badly torn by the claws of the lion, and it was several days before -the caravan could move on. - -The journey from here on, was through an open forest, watered by -numerous streams which sprung from the mountains. Their progress was -somewhat impeded by these streams, but two evenings later they camped -near the village in which dwelt the old man, who was going to show them -the entrance to the cave. Was he still alive and would they find him? - - - - - CHAPTER III. - IN THE CAVERN. - - -Early the following morning, Sedai went into the village to find the old -man Umsaga. After much inquiry he learned that the old man still lived -but was very feeble. He went to his hut and telling him what he wanted, -and that he would be well paid for the information which he would give -to the party, the old man agreed to go. Sedai had to support him, for he -was too feeble to walk alone. They reached the camp and Sedai acting as -interpreter, Mr. Graham asked Umsaga: - -“Do you know where the opening to the cave is?” - -The old man made quite a long speech, which when interpreted ran as -follows: - -“I will show you the opening on condition that you take none of the -carriers or soldiers with you, and for this service I demand one hundred -yards of cloth, and one pack of beads. The opening is about four hours’ -march from here, and one of your men will have to carry me to the place, -as I will not allow either my countrymen, or your carriers to accompany -us. If you will agree to this I will go with you to-day, to-morrow, or -any time that you wish.” - -“We will remain here to-day to settle up with our carriers, and -to-morrow morning we will have him show us the opening.” - -Sedai interpreted this to Umsaga, and then helped him back to the -village. - -The caravan had only been engaged to go this far, but it was decided to -have it wait three months for them. If they had not returned at the end -of that time, the carriers need wait no longer. They had paid the -natives well for their work, and had promised them still more for the -return trip if they would but wait for them. They hoped that these -inducements would hold them until the expiration of the three months. -Arrangements were made with the chief of the village to give sustenance -and shelter to the members of the caravan during this time. - -Late in the afternoon, the goods promised Umsaga, besides a liberal -present to the chief were sent to the village, after which the remaining -bales and boxes were carried up the mountain side to a place designated -by Umsaga. This place was near the opening of the mountain, and here the -party camped for the night. - -Early the following morning, Sedai went into the village and helped the -old man up the mountain. Umsaga directed them in the way to go, and it -was not long before they reached a level spot well up on the mountain. -The trees in this vicinity appeared to have been planted in the far -distant past, with a peculiar regard for regularity. A broad avenue of -stately trees of an unknown species to the travelers, led directly to -the face of the cliff. It suggested that the hand of man had long ago -intended that they should serve as a hint of the possibilities within -the mountain. - -The party moved through the avenue and halted at the extreme end. Here -the high cliff seemed to stop all further progress, but Umsaga hobbled -up to the rock barrier and with the help of Sedai, removed some of the -bushes growing at the base, and disclosed a large flat stone leaning -against it. This, Sedai with difficulty moved aside, opening to view an -entrance about four feet in diameter. All started forward and gazed -intently into the darkness. It required considerable courage to even -think of entering this dark passage which the sunlight penetrated but a -few feet. - -For hours the men labored in transferring the bales and boxes to the -cavern, where they were to remain until their return. Torches had been -procured from the natives, and lighting one of these the party started -on their long underground journey. The passage was very narrow for about -twenty yards, and was very smooth and clear cut, but at the end of this -distance a vaulted cave, lofty and wide, opened before them. The dim -light of the torch lit up this vast subterranean cavern but -indifferently, the roof being so high that it could just be seen in the -darkness. - -The goods were stored safely and the journey commenced in earnest. The -men carried what provisions and torches they thought would be needed in -the march across the cave. They had gone but a short distance when Enola -and Harry, who were a little in advance of the others, stumbled over -something, which the light of the torch revealed as the body of a man. -The skin, dry as parchment was drawn tightly over the bones; the eyes -were sunken; the head was covered with a growth of long hair; the hands, -which with their long finger-nails looked like talons, clutched the -garment at the throat, as if the man, when dying, had tried to tear it -away, in order to gain greater freedom to breathe. This garment was all -that the body was clothed in, but around the neck of the dead was a -chain of gold engraved in a peculiar manner and in which diamonds and -opals were set. The ends of the chain were attached in front to a -strange red stone, that resembled liquid fire. - -Mr. Graham unfastened the garment, and slipped it off. A solid substance -was discovered inserted in the middle of the back, and slitting the -garment with a knife, a piece of thin, highly polished hard wood was -revealed. Tracings were found on it which seemed to be the diagram or -map of a country; but these were so dim it was difficult to discover -what they represented. After studying further, however, a circle was -seen in the corner with the word “ON” written in its centre. This then -told the tale; this was a map showing the location of the mysterious -country. On the other side were more tracings. A straight line was drawn -from one corner to the centre, where a hole about an inch deep was cut. -On the opposite side of this hole the tracing continued in a straight -line, but just before reaching the corner it turned to the left and -ended at the edge of the block. Nothing more could be made out until Mr. -Bruce, who had looked at it more closely, and whose eyes seemed keener -than those of the others, discovered the letter “u” and a little ways -further the letters “g” and “e.” All looked at the tracing intently for -a few moments trying to guess the riddle. It was finally decided that -the “u” was the first letter of underground, and “ge” the last two -letters of passage. This then was the path to be followed through the -cave. Along the edge of the block could be faintly discerned the name -“Philip Harding;” this was the body of the man who long ago had visited -the mysterious land, and had suffered and died in this cave. This was he -who had given them the knowledge of the hidden country, and who, years -after, was staring at them with those sightless eyes that seemed to warn -them back. - -“How terrible,” said Mrs. Graham. - -“Yes,” said Enola, “my heart turns sick at the sight. And to think that -he died so near help and liberty.” - -“And do you still feel like going on?” asked Mr. Graham. - -“Yes,” said Enola, “for now my doubts are at rest; all the fears that I -had of this strange country being a myth are gone. Success seems sure -now and all our long journey has not been in vain. But how strange that -this body should have lain here all these years and not decayed.” - -“There must be some preserving quality in the atmosphere of this cave,” -said Mr. Bruce, “or else the body would have turned to dust long since.” - -“But come,” said Mr. Graham, “we must yet find the line of broken stone -which is mentioned in the document.” - -“Yes,” said Mr. Bruce, “the block would be of little use to us in this -vast cavern without some better guide than its tracings.” - -So the party began looking for the string of broken stone, and found it -but a short distance from the body. From here on the cave widened, and -the roof became too lofty to longer be in the rays of the torch. -Monstrous stalactite formations hung from the ceiling, and tremendous -stalagmite pillars reached from the floor into the darkness far -overhead. These pillars were of fantastic shapes. Some were perfectly -symmetrical, others irregular, but all were of wondrous beauty, their -surfaces being covered with delicate tracery as fine as lace. On every -hand could be heard the dropping of lime-water forming new pillars. Ages -must have passed since this cave was cut out of the solid rock by the -action of some subterranean sea, or by a weakening and wasting away of -the lighter strata, or by some tremendous convulsion of nature, which, -raising but the upper part of the mountain, had left this vast open -space. - -A little further on a halt was made for the midday meal, and after this -had been partaken of, Harry and Enola walked a little apart from the -others, and sat down on some of the broken stone to talk over their -future plans. - -“Harry,” said Enola, “I am a little slow in doing so, but I want to -thank you for having saved me from the jaws of that fearful lion. While -I was lying beneath the paw of that awful beast, I for one short moment -wished that I had not come.” - -“And what did you think I would do?” asked Harry. - -“Just what you did do,” said Enola, “A brave man could not have done -otherwise. But there are few brave men when it comes to a question of -their own lives, or those of others. There must be no selfishness where -bravery is to play a part, and it is this unselfishness that must be -rewarded, and I can only do this by thanking you, and by telling you -that I appreciate the brave act.” - -“Let us forget that fearful moment,” said Harry. “It was little enough -to do for a life-long friend, and I would do the same thing over again a -thousand times if the opportunities should offer.” - -“Let us hope that they will not,” said Enola. - -“It is hard to tell in this strange country,” said Harry. - -At this moment, they heard a loud shout to the right. They could see -their friends rushing in the direction of the sounds, and Enola and -Harry hurried to join them. Nellie was standing wringing her hands and -trying to explain how she and Mr. Bruce were walking along leisurely, -when he suddenly dropped out of sight, the torch being extinguished -leaving her in utter darkness. She had called to him, but receiving no -answer, had shouted for the others, whom she could just see in the -torchlight some distance from her. Taking torches they went to where Mr. -Bruce had so mysteriously disappeared, calling to him constantly. They -proceeded carefully for fear of falling into the same pit; and it was -well that they did so, for before them, gaping as if anxious to swallow -up the whole party, was an abyss opening into the very bowels of the -earth. They leaned far over the edge and peered into the darkness, -calling, but no answer came to them, and they felt assured that Mr. -Bruce was lost. - -Harry brought a coil of fine silk rope, and fastening one end to a -stalagmite, prepared to descend into the darkness. Sedai pushed him -gently aside, however, and taking one of the torches between his teeth, -he let himself down. Down, down he went, until he could see a black -torrent rushing madly through the crevice. He saw a rock near him, and -swung so as to land upon it. He could see but a few feet about him and -Mr. Bruce was nowhere visible. He called again and again, and once he -thought he heard a faint answer. He grasped the rope and jumped into the -stream and let it bear him down until, clinging to a jagged rock he saw -Mr. Bruce. He swung toward him, and catching him under the arms, began -working his way back. This was tedious work, and would have been an -impossibility to a man not endowed with Sedai’s herculean strength, but -happily Sedai was equal to the task and soon had Mr. Bruce on the rock. -He gave the signal to those above, and tying the rope under Mr. Bruce’s -arms, he was pulled to the surface. The rope came falling back, and -Sedai, hand over hand, rejoined his companions. It took some time to -restore Mr. Bruce to consciousness, but he was finally brought around. - -After he became stronger he said that he had fallen head first, but -hearing a rush of waters, he clasped his hands above his head in the -manner of divers, and thus broke the blow which his head otherwise would -have sustained. He had gone down a hundred feet he thought, but had then -began to rise again, and reaching the surface he had grasped the first -object which his hand came in contact with, which proved to be the rock -upon which Sedai had found him. Then he saw Sedai coming and lost -consciousness. The party moved no farther that day but on the following -morning they took up the journey with renewed vigor. - -They had but one fear, and that was as to the possibility of their -finding a door when they had reached the other side of the cavern. This -did not worry them a great deal, for the path laid out for them to -follow both by the broken stones and the tracings on the block of wood, -led to one point and this would undoubtedly be near the stone door, but -the secret of the spring had not been learned, and they might have -trouble in finding it. - - - - - CHAPTER IV. - DEATH FACES THEM. - - -The next morning they had gone but a short distance when they came to a -vast inland lake. The bridge mentioned in the manuscript stood before -them, and mounting this they startled to cross the lake. They had -followed this about four miles when they came to a break in the solid -masonry. The hole was fully eight feet wide, and it was a serious -question as to how they were to get to the opposite side; but Sedai -offered to tie the rope to his arm and leap across. The end of the rope -could be fastened and the ladies and Mr. Graham could cross over, while -Mr. Bruce and Harry could make the leap as did Sedai. - -This Sedai did, and fastening one end of the rope to one of the huge -stones, which had evidently come from the break, Mr. Bruce and Harry -held the other end, and Mrs. Graham and Enola worked their way slowly -across. Nellie then grasped the rope and was half way over, when a -terrible commotion was heard near the bridge, and a spout of water was -sent thirty feet into the air. The whole party was deluged; the torches -were put out, and when their first surprise was over, they saw with -horror that Nellie had loosened her hold on the rope and had dropped -into the water. Hastily relighting the torches, they saw Nellie -disappearing in the swift current. It took but a second for Mr. Bruce to -throw off his jacket and plunge in after her. He hoped by the help the -current and his long easy strokes to overtake her. He could just see her -above the surface of the water about one hundred yards ahead of him, -evidently fast giving out. He strained every nerve, put forth every -effort, resorted to every means to force himself through the water, and -he could see that he was gaining slowly. He called to her to keep her -hands and feet moving and to keep up courage. He could see her beating -the water making frantic efforts to keep afloat, but her struggles were -becoming weaker and weaker, and at last they ceased altogether and she -began to sink when he was only a few feet away. Making one grand final -effort he caught her by the hair just as she was sinking beneath the -surface. - -Grasping her about the waist, and holding her head above the water with -one arm, he tried to swim out of the current. This was a hard task, but -he was an excellent swimmer, and nearly succeeded. But the struggle was -an unequal one and having but one hand to use, he soon found that the -current was getting the better of him. He now threw Nellie over his -shoulder and grasping her dress between his teeth, he in this way gained -the use of both hands, and soon made his way into more quiet water. -Turning he saw the flickering torches far in the distance, but close at -hand were two round balls that shone like fire. The water was terribly -agitated and he soon found himself struggling against waves like those -thrown up by the paddles of a steamboat. - -Nearer and nearer came those fearful eyes, and Mr. Bruce thought all was -lost. Happily for Nellie she had fainted, so she was spared the terror -of this new danger. Mr. Bruce was not one to give up, however, as long -as there was a shadow of a hope, and he was thinking hard to devise a -means to escape this monster. Those eyes were nearing him, and in an -instant he would feel the hot breath in his face. Down he sank holding -Nellie about the waist. Rising to the surface again he started for the -lights. He was afraid to look back for fear of seeing those fearful eyes -following him. Larger and larger grew the lights, nearer and nearer he -came to his friends. His strength was fast failing but he must not give -up when so near to those who could rescue them. A few strokes more and -he was in the radius of the torchlight, and a shout of encouragement -from his friends greeted him. This seemed to rouse Nellie for she gave a -long sigh. - -“Throw your arms about my neck and hold on for your life,” said Mr. -Bruce, and Nellie having done this it left his mouth free, and he -breathed with greater ease. - -“Look behind you,” called Mr. Graham, and looking over his shoulder, he -saw those awful eyes again, with the huge black body, following them. He -turned and faced the monster again, just as it was opening its cavernous -jaws. Once more he sank bidding Nellie to hold her breath. The huge mass -passed over him, and coming to the surface he saw the great black body -going straight ahead at a fearful speed. The serpent made a big circle -and then turned and came toward them again. Mr. Bruce was nearly -exhausted and felt that he could not risk again that terrible plunge -under the passing monster, and still have strength to reach the pier. He -could see Harry and Sedai preparing to swim to them, and knew that -Nellie and he were safe if the terrible serpent did not make another -charge on them. Sedai now came towards them holding a flaming torch. -Back of them but a few yards could be seen the sea monster again making -for them. They were fast nearing the bridge. The rope was thrown to them -and Mr. Bruce fastening this around Nellie’s body, she was pulled out of -the water. It was then thrown to Mr. Bruce and Sedai, just as the -terrible monster opened his jaws. Sedai thrust his blazing torch into -the creature’s mouth, and then with Mr. Bruce, hurried hand over hand up -the rope. - -The water was lashed into foam by the struggles of the serpent, and -bullets from Harry’s revolver seemed to have no effect. They got a good -look now at the monster. The largest part of the body was just back of -the head and tapered from this to the end of the tail. The head was at -least six feet long, and flat, or nearly so. The wide jaws, when open, -showed a double set of irregular teeth. The tongue was forked. A large -horn about three feet long sprang from the head just back of the -nostrils, and from this to the point of the tail was a succession of -smaller horns. Just back of the large horn or tusk, was a hole through -which the monster forced a stream of water high into the air. Three -great fins on either side of the body were tipped with long claws -looking as if they might be used for crawling. Its rage was terrible -when maddened by the flaming torch and by the escaping of its prey. - -The party now hurried on over the bridge after they had transferred the -packs by a succession of leaps across the break. The monster followed -them for awhile but finally turned and swam away. They reached the end -of the bridge about two hours later, and calculated that it must be -about ten miles long. Leaving the shores of the lake they again followed -the line of broken stone, and two days later reached the opposite wall. - -For awhile they sought a possible opening in the wall, but could nowhere -detect any evidence of human handiwork. To and fro they went, pressing -hard upon every piece of rock which projected from the wall. This they -kept up all of the first day, and they laid down to rest that night -pretty well disheartened. Their provisions were getting low for they had -calculated in getting through in much less time. They had been living on -short rations for the past twenty-four hours, but now they had but a few -crackers left. They still had hopes, however, of finding this secret -door on the morrow, when they would find food in plenty on the other -side of the wall. The following morning after a frugal repast of dry -crackers, they again began the search. They first examined the wall -directly in front of them, but could see no crack or crevice which might -indicate the presence of a door. They had carefully followed the line of -broken stone, and they might reasonably expect to find the door at the -end of this. - -Striking on the rock with a hammer at different places, they could not -distinguish any difference in tone, which would indicate a thinner part -of the rock wall. They examined the rock for about four hundred feet, -and all seemed perfectly solid. They discovered in their search many -holes about four feet square, two feet wide, and three feet deep. These -were arranged along the side of the cavern, having been cut in the wall, -and upon close inspection they found them to contain what proved to be -mummies. These were wrapped in heavy sacking, many of the envelopes -being of fantastic colors. Harry took one of these bundles from its -place and cut it open. A number of cloth coverings were found under the -outside wrapping, and then came a covering of large leaves which -crumbled into dust when exposed. Next to the leaves was a wrapping of -fine silk. This having been removed the body was discovered. It was that -of a man who must have been more than six feet in height when alive. The -head was brought forward between the knees, which were drawn up; the -skin was dry and hard and drawn closely over the bones; the hair was -long and still retained a beautiful lustre. The head was small but -beautifully formed; the hands and feet were also small and symmetrical. -Inside the covering were a number of gold balls about one half inch in -diameter; two characters were engraved on one side of each of these -balls. Examining them closely, Mr. Bruce declared that the hieroglyphics -were undoubtedly Egyptian. Around the neck of the mummy was a chain of -gold set with diamonds and opals. This chain was similar to the one -found around Harding’s neck, but the bright red stone was missing. - -Eight o’clock had arrived and they were still searching for the opening. -A supper of crackers had been eaten. They were already suffering from -the pangs of thirst. The water gourds which had been refilled before -leaving the lake were again empty. The food, with the exception of a few -crackers, was gone. - -Mrs. Graham and Nellie laid down to get a few hours’ rest, but Enola, -with the men of the party, kept bravely on in search of the opening. -Midnight came and found them still searching. Hungry and thirsty, they, -too, at last lay down, feeling that they must reserve their strength as -much as possible. Their few hours of sleep, however, did not seem to -refresh them, for the thirst had made them restless. The whole party -arose about the same time and the search was soon taken up again. They -examined the wall more closely, going farther on either side, but with -no success. - -Late in the afternoon Mrs. Graham became so feverish for want of water -that Sedai started with two large gourds for the lake. If they should -find the opening in the meantime, they were to leave directions as to -how to open the rock door, and then pass on. About midnight Mr. Graham -also became delirious, and Mrs. Graham’s and Nellie’s lips were so -swollen that they could scarcely articulate. Mr. Bruce and Harry, -although suffering terribly, still kept up the search. All night they -tramped up and down the cave, trying to find the secret opening. Toward -morning they became so famished and their tongues and lips were so -parched and swollen they could not make each other understand what they -were saying. Enola alone seemed to retain her clear and unfailing -senses. - -Mr. Bruce and Harry had thrown themselves on the ground at last, -thoroughly worn out, their lips and tongues swollen terribly. Mrs. -Graham and Nellie were mumbling something in their delirium which was -unintelligible. This drove Mr. Bruce and Harry nearly frantic, and again -they arose and took up the search. Their breath came hard through their -parched throats, and their eyes were wild and glaring. Mr. Bruce walked -over to where Mrs. Graham and Nellie were lying, and suddenly drawing -his knife, he slit the sleeve of his jacket and shirt, and made a deep -incision in his arm; then carefully raising Nellie’s head with his other -arm he let the warm blood from the wound drop between her half-open -lips; then going to Mrs. Graham he partially alleviated her sufferings -in the same way. Finally overcome with weakness Mr. Bruce fell back, and -Harry, who had stood by looking at the strange sight, but hardly -realizing what Mr. Bruce was doing, now came up, and tearing off the -sleeve of the shirt, bound the arm tightly above the wound. Enola stood -watching this self-sacrificing act on the part of Mr. Bruce, and when -Harry had bandaged his arm, she turned and walked toward the wall, -mumbling something to herself. Harry saw that she, too, was fast -becoming delirious, but he was powerless to help her, he being almost -too weak now to again take up the search. - -He arose to his feet, however, and again joining Enola, they together -staggered from point to point of the wall, feverishly looking for some -indication of a revolving stone. Hours had passed since Sedai had left -them, but they seemed like years to his suffering companions. Praying -for his return, praying for deliverance from this cavern, Enola felt her -senses leaving her. She fought against this but to no purpose. Harry -finally sank to the ground in a delirium. Enola gazed at him for a -moment, and making one final effort, stumbled along leaning against the -wall for support. She had gone but five or six paces when her strength -gave way entirely, and she sank back upon the rock floor. Death seemed -inevitable. - - - - - CHAPTER V. - THE CITY OF ON. - - -But Enola had not lost consciousness entirely when she sank to the -floor. She had rested there only a moment, when she thought she felt -something pushing her. She half rose, and looking over her shoulder -thought she saw a ray of light. Could she be dreaming? Was this some -awful torturing vision come to torment her in her fearful suffering? No. -She could see the sun, the sky, and far away she caught a glimpse of a -beautiful city. She now realized it all; her weight upon this particular -part of the floor had set the door to moving. She must move through the -opening quickly. Her senses were roused to action by this revelation. -She knew the door would revolve and close again perhaps forever. - -She had by some strange fatality accidentally found the means of opening -it, for which they had searched so vainly, but while in such a -semi-conscious state she might not be able to repeat the operation. She -knew where to find the spring on the other side, and as the opening -began to grow smaller, the door slowly swinging into its place again, -she gave one frantic leap and turned to find herself cut off from the -rest by the solid wall of rock. - -From the ground she began to tear bits of grass and succulent weeds, and -partially allaying her thirst with these, she hurried to the point which -might be, she thought, the hiding place of the spring. Almost tearing -the flesh from her hands in pulling the underbrush away, she was -rewarded by seeing a loose piece of rock set into the solid cliff. -Removing this the lever was before her. It took nearly all the strength -she had left to move the lever, but she was rewarded at last by seeing -the door swing on its pivots again. Peering through the opening she saw -the light of a torch moving quickly toward the door, and she knew that -it was Sedai returning. Sedai had caught the glimpse of daylight, and -hastening his steps, he had moistened the lips of the sufferers, and -when the door again swung open he hurried through with Mrs. Graham, and -as often as Enola would lift the heavy lever he would carry out another -of the prostrated companions. - -One by one, all were carried out, and Sedai returned for the arms and -accoutrements. Ladened with these he lacked the rapidity of motion -necessary, and the massive stone as it revolved, caught him squarely -between the shoulders. Slowly the grinding mass pressed closer, while -Enola, petrified with horror for the moment, pressed her hands to her -throbbing temples. Finally, realizing the fearful position that Sedai -was in, she seized one of the rifles, and using it as a lever, placed it -in the crack of the door and threw her whole weight against it. At the -same time Sedai, with a herculean effort of his mighty muscles, strained -every nerve, pushed himself through, and fell on the ground bruised and -bleeding. Enola, taking one of the water gourds which Sedai had tramped -so far to fill, placed it to the lips of the noble fellow, and then gave -the others a very little. Her strength now gave out again and she sank -down thoroughly worn out. - -The few drops of water had partially roused the others, and Mr. Bruce -especially seemed to have regained complete consciousness. He looked -about him, but it had grown dark and he could see nothing; but he could -hear, and the cries of many beasts reached his ears. He tried hard to -remember how he had come here, and wondered where his companions were. -The cries of the wild beasts, however, brought him back to himself, and -he knew that a fire must be built or the beasts would be on him. He rose -and began looking for some dry twigs with which to build the fire; he -stumbled over something, and stooping, he found it to be one of his -companions. He felt about him and found a torch, and lighting this, he -saw the rest of the party lying about him. He started a fire, and not a -moment too soon, for the cries of the animals were growing dangerously -near; and a little while after he saw two bright eyes looking at him -from out the darkness; then all about him he could see those glaring -eyes. The number was growing, and Mr. Bruce becoming thoroughly alarmed, -roused the others, and all gathering near the fire, waited for further -developments. They were jackals, as nearly as the party could make out; -and occasionally one a little bolder than the rest, would come within -the circle of light; but a ball from one of the rifles would stop him, -when his bloodthirsty comrades would jump on the body and devour it in -an instant. They increased in numbers until those in the rear, crowding -forward, pushed the foremost nearer and nearer the fire, it became -necessary to use the rifles as clubs and beat them back. - -The situation had become most alarming when the roar of a lion almost in -their midst struck terror to the hearts of the travelers, and made the -jackals scamper off into the jungle. A crashing of the underbrush was -followed by another mighty roar, and looking, our friends could just -see, in the outer edge of light, two tawny monsters about to engage in a -combat, evidently over the possession of a beautiful lioness which was -moving about urging the lions on. The two lions sprang at each other -simultaneously, and meeting in midair, down to the earth they fell, -fastened together by teeth and claws. Over and over they rolled, biting -and snarling, and striking murderous blows with their powerful paws. It -was a magnificent battle, and in spite of bleeding wounds, raged -furiously for a quarter of an hour, when, through loss of blood, the -blows became weaker, and the biting less fierce. The royal combat was -drawing to a close. Suddenly, as though determined to win or lose all in -one final struggle they separated and once more came together in savage -fury. A terrific blow from the paw of the one laid open the neck of the -other, but not soon enough to check the fearful crunch of the powerful -jaws upon the throat of his opponent, and in a moment the writhing mass -lay quiet on the ground, dead. - -Our friends had stood gazing at the awful fight with a horrible -fascination, and it was some minutes before they could take their eyes -off the fallen foes. When they did, and looked at the east they saw that -dawn was breaking. - -As the shadows faded before the rising sun the sounds from the forest -grew less and less, until nothing was heard but the songs of the -wakening birds. Slowly the dawn crept into the heavens. The gray turned -to pink, the pink to a rich red and then to a yellow, and the sun rose -in all its equatorial splendor. A mist hung over the landscape, but -gradually this was dissipated before the hot rays of the sun, and the -country and city of On lay before them. - -They were standing on a small plateau on the eastern slope, a lofty -range of mountains or cliffs. As far as the eye could reach westward, -these mountains rose in perpendicular cliffs, thousands of feet into the -air. A few miles east of them the range turned in a northerly direction, -and extended on and on until the eye could follow it no farther. The -mountain descended about six hundred feet from where they were standing, -and ended in a beautiful valley. - -In their immediate vicinity was a dense jungle, and to the north of a -magnificent forest. At the base of the mountain was a wide river, and on -the opposite bank of this was a stone wall fifty feet in height. Beyond -this wall stretched a beautiful valley, dotted with numerous groves and -small lakes. To the northwest of them a few miles rose the tall towers -of a vast and beautiful city, all glistening in the sunlight. The city -rose from the valley to the top of a high hill on the summit of which -was a grand structure, probably a temple. - -The scene was ineffably grand, and our friends looked on it in wonder. - -“Are you now convinced, Harry, that there are a few real things in -Africa?” asked Enola. - -“The scene before me would hardly convince me of this,” said Harry, “for -everything seems too beautiful to be real.” - -“Disabuse your mind of its being a dream?” said Enola. “It is a most -sublime reality, and a happy ending to the horrors and sufferings of the -cavern. But look, do you not see a body of horsemen yonder? Probably -they saw our fire last night and are coming to investigate.” - -The horsemen were lost to view for a moment but again appeared to the -party as they came out on a clear stretch of road. In a short while the -men had arrived at the wall, and opening a gate in this which was at the -end of the bridge, they waited for our friends to approach. The -travelers moved slowly toward them, and as they came nearer the men -dismounted and made a respectful obeisance. These men were the -handsomest and most beautifully formed ever looked upon. They were fully -seven feet high, and their figures showed great strength and suppleness; -their heads were rather small but beautifully shaped; the skin was a -light bronze color, soft and healthful-looking; the face was covered -with a short beard of dark brown color; the eyes were large, dark, and -full of expression; the nose straight and well-proportioned. - -Each wore a loose garment with large flowing sleeves; this tunic was -belted in at the waist by a girdle of gold; sandals were fastened to the -feet by golden lacings extending to the knee; a round helmet was worn on -the head, but as our party approached these helmets were removed -disclosing short curly heads of hair. - -Their steeds were of the same species but much larger than the ordinary -zebra, standing at least eighteen hands high; they were beautiful -creatures, with small heads, arched necks and finely shaped bodies and -limbs; stripes encircled them from the tip of the nose to the tail; the -manes and tails nearly touched the ground. - -The trappings of the animals were gorgeous; the bridle was of polished -gold wire with large ostrich plumes reaching up from the head-piece; the -reins and martingales were made of white leather heavily studded with -precious stones which glistened in the sunlight; the saddle was flat, -being nothing more than a pad made of cloth-of-gold and without -stirrups. - -As our friends approached them, the men stood leaning against their -steeds, holding their helmets in their hands. The rest of the party -having halted, Mr. Graham went up quite close to the natives and by -signs made them understand that they were tired, and hungry, and wanted -food and shelter. One of the men showed by signs that he knew that which -Mr. Graham wished to convey, and that they would send to the city and -get other beasts to carry them there. Four men now left the band and -rode off toward the city, and about two hours later the adventurers were -surprised to see approaching them a body of at least one thousand -zebramen and in front six monstrous white elephants. - -With the greatest care all were helped upon the backs of the royal -beasts, but Enola was given the largest, whitest and most richly -caparisoned. These elephants were partially covered with cloth-of-gold, -and on each of their backs was a comfortable howdah shaded by a canopy -of palm branches. - -When all was in readiness they started with Enola’s elephant in the -lead. The cavalcade moved slowly over the beautiful highway on through -green fields, along the shores of miniature lakes, over low eminences, -past well-cultivated farms, under stately palms and eucalyptus trees -until the white city was seen but a short distance away. Here some of -the party left the cavalcade and rode on ahead. - -Shortly after this the road widened into a wide well-paved boulevard, -lined on each side by lofty trees, and bordered by beautiful villas -built of an exquisite pinkish white stone which resembled Mexican onyx. -These villas were broad and deep, and moderately high; a wide flight of -steps led up to each entrance which was easily twenty-five feet high, -and which was sheltered by a portico, with immense pillars supporting -its roof. The surrounding grounds were large, delightfully shaded and -bright with flowers. - -On the cavalcade moved, through the broad avenue, the houses becoming -larger and more magnificent as they approached the centre of the city. - - - - - CHAPTER VI. - THE BANQUET. - - -They came at last to a large opening, at least one thousand feet square -and paved with exquisite onyx. In the centre of this square was a huge -column, surmounted by a statue of magnificent workmanship. Surrounding -this statue were five immense fountains. In each was a heroic statue of -a woman with her head thrown back, from whose mouth spouted a stream of -water high into the air. The arms were outstretched with the palms of -the hands turned upward, and from these also sprang streams of water. -Beyond the fountain, facing the avenue through which they had entered -the square, was a stone sphere ten feet in diameter, on the top of which -was a beautifully carved chair of onyx inlaid with gold. A man was -seated in this chair who was probably thirty-five years old and of -immense build. As the cavalcade approached he arose, showing to the full -his magnificent figure. This personage afterwards proved to be the King. - -The square was thronged with the inhabitants of the city, the porticos -and roofs of the surrounding houses being filled with the populace. - -The men were magnificent specimens of the human race. The women were six -feet six inches in height, of stately figure and dignified bearing; -their heads were small but well-shaped; the hair was of a dark brown -color fastened in a coil at the back of the neck. A band of gold passed -around the forehead just below the hair and was studded with precious -stones. They wore loose, flowing robes of white silken cloth drawn in at -the waist with a girdle of gold; around each neck was a golden chain set -with diamonds and opals; these chains were similar to those worn by the -men but of finer workmanship. - -As the King raised his hand the mighty throng broke forth in beautiful -song, the King moving his hand right and left as if directing. The -voices of the men were deep and melodious, and those of the women soft -and musical. When the song was finished, the King turned his back to our -friends, and facing the magnificent building on the summit of the hill, -made a movement with his right hand. The doors of the temple were thrown -open, and a band of beautiful young girls came forth singing the same -song that the populace had sung. Merrily these maidens came tripping -toward the square, the great throng of people making an opening through -which they could pass. - -Upon reaching the space before the great sphere of stone, they waited -for the occupant of the throne to descend, then fastening gold cords to -the tusks of the elephants they led them toward the temple, the populace -falling in behind. Slowly the maidens led the animals over the beautiful -square, through the mass of eager and interesting people, all of whom -made deep salaams as they passed on through the wide avenue which led to -the temple and past the magnificent buildings to the summit of the hill. -When nearing the temple ten men came forth, each wearing a long robe of -embroidered white silk. - -The elephants were stopped at the main entrance of the temple, and -immediately fell to their knees, when the party dismounted. Carefully -the priests assisted them to the pavement and then walked before them -burning sweet smelling incense from silver vessels, which they swayed to -and fro. Through a wide court with a lofty colonnade on either side, up -a broad staircase with battlemented towers they proceeded, and then -entered a hexagonal hall, one hundred and fifty feet square. From here -they passed into a second court of quadrangular form. All around the -court ran arcades, forming chambers or recesses open in front, with long -silken curtains hanging from the top of the arcade, and caught up at the -sides to be used when needed. The roofs of the chambers were supported -by columns, the beauty of conception, and the exquisite finish of which, -astonished our friends. The decorations were most elaborate. Nobly -sculptured statues occupied spacious niches, and showed that those who -executed them were masters of their art. The quadrangle itself was about -three hundred and fifty feet square. - -Enola was led by a priest to one of the semi-circular chambers and the -curtains were drawn. Each of the others was shown to one of these -recesses. - -Enola, upon entering the chamber, looked about her and was surprised to -see the preparations made for her. In the centre of the chamber was a -beautiful designed square onyx table, supported by four spheres. Upon -this table, in great profusion lay girdles and circles of gold, all -heavily studded with diamonds and opals, similar to those worn by the -native women but of more exquisite design; also gold pins, bottles of -gold, filled with delightful perfumes, golden combs and highly polished -mirrors of silver. Upon a smaller table at the far end of the chamber -was a ewer filled with perfumed water. Near this table, resting on an -onyx sphere, was placed an extinguished lamp of fine workmanship. -Couches were in various places in this luxurious apartment; upon one of -them lay a gown of silk and gold with short flowing sleeves, and near it -another gown of pinkish white silk which was evidently meant to be worn -as an undergarment. - -Across the end of the chamber were hung heavy silk curtains, which, when -parted, disclosed a bath sunken in the floor. About the bath stood six -of the maidens who had conducted the party to the temple. The maidens -stood motionless watching Enola as if waiting for her to come to the -bath. Enola hesitated for a moment, then determined to accept the -situation and walked towards the bath. The maidens disrobed her, and -leading her into the bath, forced her gently backward in a reclining -position with her head resting on an onyx head-piece, and then poured -the perfume from the golden vessels over her body, rubbing her gently -with a silken towel while doing so. - -She being tired and worn out, the luxury of the perfumed bath, with the -pleasing treatment of the maidens, rested and refreshed her. - -After remaining in the bath for some time the maidens raised her in -their arms, and carrying her to a couch laid her down and rubbed the -moist skin until it was perfectly dry. They then sprinkled scented -powder over her body, rubbing it gently; then motioning her to arise, -the undergarment was thrown over her shoulders, after which one of the -maidens dressed her hair in a low knot on the back of her head. A band -of gold was placed over her forehead and then the outer robe was donned. -This was fastened in at the waist by a girdle of gold; the necklace from -Harding’s neck was brought to her, but Enola noticed that none of the -maidens touched it with their naked hands, and she soon divined that in -some way her royal reception was connected with the necklace and its -flame-colored stone. Enola was then led to an alcove before which a -curtain was hung, and then the curtain being drawn aside she found the -alcove faced on either side with polished silver mirrors. She was -surprised at the lovely picture she presented, in rich gown and golden -bands around her head and waist, making her appear like an ancient -Egyptian goddess. - -The long tramp through the cavern with its scarcity of water and clean -garments had left Enola in a pitiable plight, and this sudden change was -most gratifying to the natural pride of the woman. Enola was next -conducted to a couch and a pair of sandals were fitted to her shapely -feet; these were laced as far as the knee with silken cords. One of the -maidens left them for a few moments, and upon her return, motioned to -Enola and the others to follow her. They passed into the quadrangular -court and from here into one of the other semi-circular chambers. Here -on a long onyx table was spread a sumptuous repast. - -Enola was led to a seat or couch at the head of the table, and half -reclining upon the soft cushions, while waiting for her friends, looked -in wonderment at the elaborate prodigality in the equipment of the room. - -The sides of the chamber were hung with heavy silk curtains alternating -white and red, on which scenes of the chase, of banqueting and of -worship were gorgeously embroidered with gold thread. Exquisite -sculptures rested upon spherical pedestals. Lion, tiger and leopard -skins covered the floor, and upon the ceiling, beautifully carved, was -an immense eagle with outstretched wings, the tips reaching almost to -the ends of the chamber. In the talons of the eagle was a scroll upon -which were engraved strange hieroglyphics. At one end of the chamber a -human skeleton was standing, the only discordant object in the entire -furnishings. The table was of semi-circular form, and was covered with -flowers, fruits and chalices of wine. The flowers were held in high, -beautifully carved vases of gold and were profuse and fragrant. In the -center of the table a tiny fountain threw forth a spray of perfumed -water. - -Enola was lost in admiration and did not hear a slight noise behind her, -and was suddenly startled by the immense figure of the King as he -entered and stood before her. She motioned him to the couch and he sank -down beside her. He kept his eyes intently upon her, but noticing his -look of respectful admiration Enola was half amused, and soon began a -conversation by signs all of which were readily understood by the King. -The rest of the party now came in, each of the ladies accompanied by -three maids, and the men by two male servitors each. - -Nellie and Mrs. Graham were attired much the same as Enola; Mr. Graham, -Mr. Bruce and Harry were dressed as the native men, but their garments -were of a finer quality of silk. - -Upon entering the chamber the male servitors retired and six maidens -took their places. Nellie was given a seat next to Enola, and next to -her came Mr. Bruce and then Harry; Mrs. Graham sat next to the King with -her husband at her left. - -When all were seated, a strain of exquisite music from some hidden -orchestra of stringed instruments burst forth. The King gave a command -and fifteen maidens came tripping in singing a pretty song, their -harmonious voices blending deliciously with the music. Seven of the -maidens carried gold dishes containing chipped ice, while the others -carried cups in one hand and a vase of honey in the other. They rested -the cups on the tables and after filling them partly with honey added -wine from the chalices and then dropped into the cups some of the -chipped ice, stirring this gently with small golden ladles. This done -they stepped back and the King raising his cup, waited for the others to -do so; when they had done this the King arose and looking toward the -skeleton at the end of the room, raising his cup and saying a few words, -drank the contents. All had followed the King in his movements, and as -the cool beverage touched their lips it seemed that they had never -tasted anything half so sweet or refreshing. Months had passed since -they had known such luxuries as ice and wine and they emptied their cups -almost greedily, hoping that the etiquette of the feast would allow them -to drink long and unsparingly of the delicious beverage. - -The maidens bore the cups away, and others brought in trays containing -small silken napkins and golden finger bowls filled with perfumed water. -Other maidens brought in trays, covered with figs, fresh herbs, chipped -ice and eggs of a peculiar kind in tiny cups of gold. - -Thus far not a word had been spoken; the King, however, seemed surprised -at the silence, and probably surmising the reason pointed to his lips -and then to the guests, making them understand that he would like to -hear them talk. Enola took upon herself to instruct the King as far as -possible in English, pointing to different articles on the table and -then naming them. Onrai, for this was the King’s name, named the -articles slowly after her and then gave the names in his native tongue. - -Mr. Bruce, who had listened intently to the names given the articles by -the King, and who had carefully studied a piece of papyrus upon which -the King had inscribed some characters when passed to him, declared the -characters to be Egyptian hieroglyphics or closely resembling them. He -had been a close student of the Egyptian hieroglyphics while at college, -and had spent many spare moments in the great British museum going over -the ancient inscriptions in the vast collection of that home of relics. -He had noticed also the inscription upon the pennant held in the eagle’s -talons on the ceiling, and the characters above the skeleton at the end -of the room. All these convinced him that the strange people around him -had originally come from Egypt, but it must have been thousands of years -before, for the language and written characters of the ancient Egyptians -had been obsolete for centuries. The skeleton in the banqueting hall was -an old Egyptian custom, and this but added to the belief that these -people had originally sprung from that race. - -“One would think,” said Harry, “that we had been taken from the world of -hurry and bustle which we so recently knew, and set back two or three -thousand years into this ancient city.” - -“Yes, it all seems very strange,” said Mr. Bruce, “but I must admit -there is novelty in the change at least, and for my part I am enjoying -it immensely.” - -“Well, I never expected to find iced wine in the heart of Africa,” said -Mr. Graham. - -“Nor I,” said Mrs. Graham, “nor cups of gold from which to drink it.” - -“Truly, we must have discovered a city of the gods,” exclaimed Mr. -Graham. - -“Yes,” said Mr. Bruce, “one could easily imagine from the beauty of the -city, the stateliness and courtesy of the people, and the delights of -the feast, that we have dropped into something supernatural.” - -The music changed to a livelier measure, and the maidens tripped more -lightly to and fro as the feast progressed. Roast kid with wine sauce, -composed the third course, and when this was removed, the finger bowls -were again passed among the guests. Then, after more iced wine and -honey, a delicate kind of fish was served, after which came fowl, -followed by sliced fruits covered with shaved ice, and accompanied by a -new and delicious wine. The feast ended, the King arose, and leading the -way with Enola at his side, passed into the large court, where they -witnessed a magnificent entertainment. - - - - - CHAPTER VII. - THE LAW OF THE LAND OF ON. - - -Four weeks of constant enjoyment passed. The greatest kindness had been -shown the explorers by both king and subjects. The most sumptuous -repasts were set before them; the most beautiful robes were presented to -them, and the most glorious entertainments gotten up for their delight. -Their attendants anticipated their least desires and the King himself -personally supervised the festivities. Great hunts had been projected -and carried out; excursions through the beautiful country had been made -on the backs of white elephants; points of interest in the city had been -visited; moonlight rambles through the beautiful groves had been taken, -and there seemed no prospect of diminution of enjoyment. - -They were living under the laws of three thousand years ago. Little had -been learned of their history or religion, for they had not become -sufficiently acquainted with the language to have these things imparted -to them. With Mr. Bruce’s help, however, they had learned that these -people were closely affiliated with the ancient Egyptians. Onrai had -promised to give the party some of the laws that night. - -During the four weeks which had passed so pleasantly, the adventurers -had studied closely the people and their country. The rays of the sun -were intensely hot during the day, but owing to the thickness of the -onyx walls of the temple and the system by which air was forced over -blocks of ice, the apartments were delightfully pleasant and cool. The -streets during the day were deserted, but as evening came on the people -would leave their homes and promenade the principal thoroughfares and -squares, enjoying the cool and refreshing breezes which sprung up from -the south as the day declined. The people themselves were the most -remarkable feature of this strange country. The women stood fully six -feet and six inches high and the men seven feet. - -Another very noticeable thing was the total absence of aged people. In -all their excursions they had not met a man or woman who looked to be -past middle life. Had they discovered a fountain of youth, which, when -bathed in, gave them a long lease on life with health and beauty? No -cripples or infirm people were seen, all being robust and healthy. All -resembled each other. It could be seen that their dispositions varied to -some extent but not radically, since all seemed inspired by the same -motives. They were easy in their movements and very graceful. - -After four weeks of studying these people and their lives, our friends -considered them the happiest mortals they had ever known, for they did -not seem to have a care or trouble in the world. - -That evening Onrai took the evening meal with them as usual and after -this was over, and they had repaired to the large court, Enola said: - -“Onrai, you promised to tell us of your laws to-night and we are waiting -patiently to learn the government of such a happy people.” - -“Our laws are simply nature’s law,” said Onrai. “In the first place, the -laws governing our physical welfare are very strict, for we believe that -happiness springs from a strong constitution and a healthy body. Our -tables are spread with an abundance of viands, but just so much must be -eaten and no more. We have certain hours for work and certain hours for -entertainment and recreation; the hours for work are few, because we -believe that overwork is injurious to the constitution and this we -always try to prevent. Our people are educated in religious laws and -language between the ages of seven and twelve.” - -“Who are the teachers?” asked Enola. - -“We are all teachers,” answered Onrai. “In our temples of learning all -above the age of twenty have their days for teaching. This is considered -one of the lightest duties, and we arrange the days so that they may -come directly after those of the hardest toil.” - -“But is it with all other occupations as it is with teaching?” asked Mr. -Graham. “Do you not assign certain work to those who are most proficient -in that work?” - -“We have none who are more proficient in one thing than another,” -answered Onrai. “Between the ages of twelve and twenty, our young people -devote certain hours each day to the study of trades and professions. -They may work for two weeks on a farm, and for the next two weeks study -architecture, and so on until they arrive at the age of twenty, when -they are as well versed in one thing as in another.” - -“But are there no differences in the intellects of the people?” asked -Mr. Graham. “Are not some brighter and more clever than others?” - -“No,” said Onrai. “Our duties are simple and easily learned, and when we -have once mastered them thoroughly, what difference would it make, if, -as you say, some should be brighter than others.” - -“But,” said Enola, “Do you not have those who go beyond the things -taught them and develop new principles and invent new contrivances, -which might make their duties less irksome, their labors less arduous?” - -“No, we have none such,” said Onrai, “or, if we have, their ideas never -take shape or form, for the one great law is to be content with what is -taught us. Look about you, see this beautiful country, the grand -palaces, the statuary and paintings; could we conceive of more beautiful -architecture, or grander statuary, with which to adorn these beautiful -palaces? No, I think not. We have certain lines to follow in -architecture, certain forms to copy in our statuary, and certain rules -to observe in our painting, and these lead to but the one thing, and -that is, perfection, which, when once reached cannot be surpassed.” - -“Tell us more of the laws,” said Mr. Graham. - -“After the physical welfare of our people is looked after, we make it -imperative that they study, and learn and adhere to the laws governing -the spiritual being. Our religion teaches us that if we abuse the body -and die before our time we shall not enter the great hereafter; we shall -be condemned to everlasting punishment. This religious law, and the dire -future for those who break it, makes all observe it, and consequently -you see no sick or infirm about you. We are taught to believe in one -God, and live so that we may enter a home of everlasting bliss when we -have lived out our lives on this earth.” - -“Tell us how you punish murder and stealing,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“Stealing, murder?” asked Onrai. - -“Yes, taking from another that which belongs to him, either property or -life.” - -“These are unknown to us,” said Onrai. “We are all equal; we have the -same duties to perform, the same garments to wear, the same things to -eat and drink. Why should we take from another that which we have -ourselves?” - -“Is there no buying and selling?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“No,” said Onrai, “We all share alike. When a citizen wants a certain -article he has but to ask for it and it is his. We have an abundance of -all things, at all times and it is as free to one as to another.” - -“What are your laws concerning marriage?” inquired Enola. - -“Our religious laws govern this,” replied Onrai. “At the age of eighteen -the young people are taken before a council of ten and a careful -examination is made of both physical and mental health. These -examinations are reported on tablets and at the age of twenty they are -again summoned and a husband or wife is allotted.” - -“But love,” said Mrs. Graham, “does not love enter into the compact at -all?” - -“No”, said Onrai, “We are taught by our religion, not to allow ourselves -to love until married. Those, who from association learn to seek one -young person more than another, are brought before the council of ten -and steps are taken to prevent a recurrence. It is by this law that we -have attained a point in physical culture which shows a race of healthy, -strong and vigorous beings. In the course of events there are occasional -errors which render it necessary to forbid the further production of -children. When the young people are examined, if any organ seems at all -weak a companion is selected in whom that organ is at its best. If three -decided weaknesses are found, the person is not allowed to marry. -Dispositions and tempers are also considered by the council before -selection is made. We, of course, in our short lives, cannot notice the -great effects such a method brings about, but reason tells us that it -must be a safeguard to the strength of the people.” - -“But what of the history of your people, Onrai?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“Our history is unknown to us,” said Onrai. “The history of the people -is not divulged. They know the events which occur during their own -lives, and that is all. At the expiration of each king’s reign, the -history of his reign in inscribed on a tablet of hard wood, and this is -placed in a secret chamber. Those who are living at the time of his -death are forbidden to ever mention the events of his reign when his -successor has ascended to the throne.” - -“We are greatly disappointed,” said Mr. Bruce. “We have become very much -interested in your country and people, and we had hoped that we might -learn their history.” - -Onrai at this moment called an attendant to him, and speaking a few -words to him the attendant withdrew. Presently the High Priest came -forward, and Onrai held quite a conversation with him, after which he -turned to our friends, and said: - -“The High Priest informs me that he knows of no law which would forbid -your entering this secret chamber, and there read from the tablets the -history of our country and people.” - -Our friends were much surprised at being granted this privilege, and -thanking Onrai, they repaired to the Secret Chamber with the High -Priest. While going to the chamber with the priest, he informed the -party that he was entrusted with certain religious secrets which the -rest of the people were not allowed to know, but as far as the history -of the country was concerned he was forbidden, as were all others, to -consult the tablets. Upon arriving at the Secret Chamber, a secret -spring was touched, and an immense stone door turned on a pivot, much -the same as the door to the cave. After entering the Priest showed them -the location of the secret spring on the inside, and also the location -of the most ancient tablets, and then retired. The great gate swung shut -and they were left alone in the immense chamber which contained the -unknown records of the history of On. They removed a great number of -tablets, until those bearing the earliest dates were uncovered, and -found them in a state of excellent preservation. With Mr. Bruce’s -knowledge of ancient hieroglyphics he was able to decipher most of the -inscriptions; by deciphering certain portions it was not difficult to -fill in between without the labor of actual translation. The research -stretched over several days, but condensed, the account ran as follows: - -“During the reign of Amenophis of Egypt, the country was scourged by -numerous and grievous plagues, and the people were sorely tried. These -plagues were inflicted upon the Egyptians by the God of the Israelites, -as a punishment for the severe treatment of the latter race. One Moyses, -who had been reared in the royal house of the Pharaohs as a son, adopted -the religion of the Israelites and was chosen by them for their leader -to deliver them out of the land of Egypt. But they had no remedy at hand -and still bowed in submission to the fearful task imposed upon them -until Moyses at last saw a favorable opportunity for their deliverance. -Reminding them of their former freedom, and of the God of their fathers, -and that their cause was His, he prevailed upon them to regard their -deliverance as an article of religion, and they again became a united -people in their determination to seek refuge from the oppression of the -Egyptians in the wilderness, which was the dwelling place of their -kindred and the seat of their God. Then the fearful plagues were visited -upon the people of Egypt and they became desperate. - -“Many Egyptians in the vicinity of Goshen, the dwelling place of the -Israelites, had accepted the religion of that people, and seeing no end -to the plagues which were scourging this country, they gathered together -and determined to emigrate to some distant land where they could live in -peace and happiness, and without fear of molestation from their -idolatrous countrymen. At the final meeting of these people, On, of the -city of Goshen, and the land of Egypt, was chosen as their leader, and -it was determined to follow the Nile as far as expedient, until they had -reached such a land as would suit them for a dwelling place. It is I, -On, who am now inscribing this record. There were six thousand and six -hundred of us, men, women and children. To leave Egypt together would -create suspicion, so choosing forty sub-commanders, an equal number of -companies set out at stated intervals and marched until the southern -boundary of the country had been crossed, when all were consolidated and -marched into the vast interior. When all were united, preparations were -made for the great journey. Boats were built, and many provisions were -procured, for we knew not the country into which we were going, or how -long it would take to reach a desirable land in which to take up our -abode. When all was in readiness we embarked in the boats and followed -the Nile until coming to the many streams which comprise its source. -Here we disembarked, leaving the boats in the river. Towards the south -we marched, the journey being very slow, tedious, and fraught with much -sickness and danger. Strange tribes of people we met, much darker in -color than we, and very hostile. We struggled on for many weary leagues, -fighting the strange people and being a prey to fever and wild beasts. -Our band was altogether discouraged; still I pleaded with them, telling -them that we would, sooner or later, come to an uninhabited country with -fertile fields and cooling streams. - -“We came at last to a lofty range of mountains, running north and south, -extending, peak beyond peak, far to the westward. Following the -mountains south, for many leagues farther, the range suddenly turned -west. Still following along their base, we came to a beautiful open -country. Here we decided to take up our dwelling. - -“We had been here but a short time when one of the men discovered a hole -in the side of the mountain. Ten men were sent to explore the vast cave -which this opening led into. At the end of three days they returned and -told us that an immense lake of water had stopped their further -progress, and that they had returned for boats. These were made, and -with them the men again started. Many times did the sun rise and set -before they again returned, but at last they came with a story which -made us all joyful. They had crossed the lake but had been lost on the -opposite shore, and had wandered for many days until they saw a ray of -light and making for it found an opening which led into a beautiful -country, stretching far to the west and north. They explored a part of -the country, finding numerous lakes and rivers, and then returned to -tell of the wonderful hidden land. - -“After a consultation it was determined to pass through the mountains -and take up a permanent abode beyond. Preparations were made and -together we started. The lake was crossed, the opening found and we -reached the country which was to be the scene of our remaining life and -death. Our numbers were taken, and it was found that during the two -years’ march to this land we had lost more than half of our band. But -three thousand and two hundred remained of the six thousand and six -hundred which had started from Egypt. Fifteen hundred of those remaining -were men, the women and children having succumbed more readily to the -hardships of the journey. - -“A site for a city was picked out and a part of the country cultivated. -Our land abounded in wild animals and fruits so we were well-provided -with food. A quarry of beautiful hard stone was found and we determined -to build our city of this. The architects drew up the plans for the city -and work was commenced. The Temple, which when finished will be the -grandest which the world has ever known, will stand in the northern end -of the city on a slight eminence. The streets are to be broad and paved. -At frequent distances will be squares for public amusement, and parks -for recreation will be placed conveniently near the city. We made two -discoveries which have helped us in the manufacture of necessary -implements and added to our comfort. A mine of gold was found, and in a -cavern through which the wind rushes like a blast from a mountain of -snow we found a lake of pure ice. This ice was of great thickness and it -took us a great while to cut through it. We have also a mountain of -iron, a field of diamonds and a forest of wood so hard that we find -great difficulty in cutting it. On blocks of this wood I am now -inscribing the infant history of our country. - -“I am growing very old. My people have increased rapidly and great work -has been done. The City and Temple are fast nearing completion; most of -the streets are paved with hard stone and cultivated fields are about -us; we have measured the length and breadth of our country and find that -it is nearly three hundred miles square. We have driven the wild animals -from our cultivated land into a section near the mountains, and at the -border of this vast land of jungle and forest we are building a wall -fifty feet high to keep the animals within bounds. We also built a stone -viaduct to cross the lake in the cavern and several across the river -which flows at the base of the southern mountains. During the building -of these viaducts hundreds were engaged in keeping the laborers -furnished with meat, the animals being skinned and dressed for food in -the cavern. The inhabitants who died during the first twenty years of -our settlement here were embalmed, and their bodies placed in the niches -of the rock in the cavern. After this date the dead were cremated and -this is now a law. I am now ninety years old and we have been in this -country fifty years. The city and country has been named “ON,” in honor -of me, because I led the people to it, and I have been the people’s -chosen King since we left Egypt. I have laid down the laws which are to -govern the people for all time. These laws I have made simple and just, -guarding against any contingency or cause for dissension, profiting by -the experiences of other countries. I have tried to formulate laws which -will not allow of jealousies or covetousness. - -“Again, the laws are aimed to make a race of people grand in physical -strength and beautiful in moral character. All are equal in the eyes of -the law. All are made to work at the different vocations. All are -furnished with the same provisions and raiment. The best artisans have -laid down rules to be followed by the people in architecture, sculpture, -painting, and in the making of ornaments. The best agriculturists, the -foremost of our quarrymen and miners have made new inventions and laid -down rules which will lighten and facilitate their labors. - -“To the religion taught by the Israelites I have added nothing. From -their teachings I learned that they expected to have the Son of their -God visit them at some future time. They also taught us that there was a -great and eternal hereafter which was to be entered into after death, -and I have made this hereafter so bright and beautiful that my -countrymen will hail with delight their day of death. I have also made -it possible to stop the over-increase of our people by a certain law. To -guard against intemperate habits of any kind, by which so many diseases -and so much unhappiness are brought into the world, I have established a -law that all dying because of intemperance or over-indulgence in any of -the necessary things of life will enter into everlasting punishment. I -have made the delights of our future life so bright that my people will -guard against everything which might bring on disease and premature -death. Already the effects of these laws have been seen, for disease is -passing away and my people are striving in every way to live until their -day of death. - -“I alone of the many Kings who are to follow me am allowed to reign for -so many years. I have given myself the right to reign thus long because -I wish to have my laws well-established before abdicating in favor of -another. I have found that some of the laws first laid down were -defective and by still retaining my sceptre I have been able to correct -them. To the High Priest I have given certain knowledge which is denied -the remainder of the people, and this knowledge is to be guarded by him -as a sacred commandment to be imparted only to his successor. - -“The language of my forefathers I have changed but little. I have added -some few words from the language of the Israelites and a few from the -Syriac. I have made the language as simple as possible as well as the -hieroglyphics. The history of the reign of each King shall be inscribed -on tablets of wood and placed in the secret chamber of the Temple but -the people are to know nothing of their former history. This is done to -keep them from knowing anything of the outside world. I wish them to -believe that the world is bounded by the mountains which enclose their -country; for thus believing they will remain together and will never -undertake needless excursions into other countries, which would result -in war and bloodshed. I wish them to be a peaceable, law-abiding people -believing that they are the people and that theirs is the only country. - -“I have fitted to the opening in the mountain a stone turning on pivots -and opening by a secret spring, of which I alone know the secret. Those -who fitted the stone were forbidden to speak of it and they have long -since died, and the laws forbidding access to the inscribed history have -been so well kept that none of my countrymen to-day are aware of the -existence of an outside world. - -“This is not a history, but a simple outline of the events which led to -our emigration, the long journey, and the discovery of the country and -the laws which I have made. I have inscribed this during my few leisure -hours more for recreation than aught else. The history of our people and -country will be found inscribed on the King’s tablets. - -“I have made the one holiday of the Land of On, ‘The Day of Resis,’ and -this day, if all of my laws are adhered to, will be the happiest day in -the lives of those who participate in its ceremonies.” - - - - - CHAPTER VIII. - THE ROYAL HUNT. - - -Mrs. Graham had, during the past few weeks, given herself up to the -comforts of her delightful boudoir, seldom accompanying her friends on -the many excursions which were projected for their pleasure. The -splendid attendance, the magnificent apartment, the sumptuous table, all -tended to make her new life a happy one. It was just suited to the -fastidious tastes of such a woman as Mrs. Graham, and she had determined -to startle her native city with a reproduction of many of its delightful -features. - -Nellie had enjoyed the new life quite as much as her mother but in a -different way. With Mr. Bruce she had visited every nook and corner of -the Temple, and had taken sketches of the principal courts, colonnades -and terraces, intending to copy them in oil at home. Then they had taken -long walks through the city and visited the schools in which Nellie was -especially interested; had remained one whole day in the provision -market, where the inhabitants went each morning for the day’s supplies, -and another in the mills where the cloth for wearing apparel was woven. -They had spent many happy hours in the fine art studio, where beautiful -statues were being carved out of blocks of onyx, and where pictures were -being painted on flat pieces of hard wood. - -There was also the school of architecture, where students between the -ages of twelve and twenty were busy working out the difficult problems -and drawings. In this building also were made the gold ornaments which -were used in every household in rich profusion, in the shape of girdles -for the waist, bands and ornaments for the hair. It was noticed that -certain models were used for all these different works of fine art, and -that nothing new was ever executed. As Onrai had told them, though, the -models were perfect and nothing more beautiful could be conceived. They -had also visited the parks, squares and principal thoroughfares, and had -taken an interest in studying the architecture and furnishings of the -different residences. All places were open to them and the greatest -attention was paid them wherever they went. - -This constant association and similarity of tastes had brought these two -closer together, and although Mr. Bruce had never yet mentioned his love -to Nellie, still he felt that she reciprocated that love. - -Mr. Graham, sometimes accompanied by Harry, but oftener alone, had gone -everywhere. He was in his element, for, astride of a beautiful zebra, he -would take long rides into the country and spend whole days fishing on -the small lakes, or at other times, would venture a short distance into -the great hunting reserve. In this grand expanse of wild jungle and -forest could be found every known species of African animal, and Mr. -Graham was especially delighted in the hunting of large game. The laws -governing these hunts were rather strange; the smallest of each species -of animal was killed, the largest always being left. The same laws which -governed the inhabitants were applied to the wild animals and also to -those domesticated, allowing the larger to mate and bring forth healthy -offspring. If a colt or baby elephant should be dwarfed at birth, or -show any ailment afterward, it was instantly killed. By observing this -law with the domestic animals, and in killing only the smaller of the -wild animals, the whole race had become large and powerful. - -Harry seemed to be the only unhappy one in the party. This was easily -accounted for. During the long excursions the King would be at Enola’s -side constantly, and Harry had hardly found time to speak with her alone -since they had arrived in this, as he called it, barbarous land. Onrai -always dined with the party and sat at Enola’s right. Harry had been -given a seat the farthest from her; whether this was done intentionally -or not, Harry could not say, but he fumed in silence. After the evening -meal, Enola would invariably accompany Onrai to the terrace where they -would sit until near midnight. Occasionally Harry would have a short -talk with Enola in the morning, but even then their conversation was of -Onrai. - -Sedai had been given a home with one of the inhabitants and was enjoying -the new life greatly. He had been given a zebra and spent most of the -time on its back. Once each day he would go to the Temple to see his -friends, and while there would tell of his exploits among the fair woman -of the city. Because he was one of the party he was looked upon with -great admiration. As he was but little below the height of the native -men and was only a shade darker in color, the inhabitants had been led -to believe that he was one of their own race, but had in some mysterious -way left his own land and visited that planet from which the strangers -were supposed to have come. The women smiled on him, the men treated him -with the greatest respect and he could hardly help liking this new life. -He had come up to the Temple on this morning to join the party in the -royal hunt. - -The rifles which our friends had brought with them they had never used -for fear of the natives coveting them when they learned their value in -the hunt, but now they felt, because of the great respect which had been -shown them, that they and everything pertaining to them was held as -sacred by the natives, and they had decided to use the guns on to-day’s -hunt. - -The morning was bright and the hour early when the party started. Enola -and her friends were seated on huge black elephants with long formidable -tusks and trained to the hunt. Around the neck and also around the body, -just back of the howdah of each elephant was a band of gold, in which -were embedded the handles of large pointed daggers, the blades pointing -outward. These were placed for the protection of the elephants and of -those who rode them. The rest of the party rode zebras which were to-day -only plainly caparisoned. The weapons of the natives consisted of large -cross-bows with quivers of flint-pointed arrows, daggers with long, -narrow blades and axes with short handles. - -About one hundred comprised the party, all well armed and impatient for -the hunt. They traversed the same road over which our friends had been -conducted when they first came to the city, and very soon passed through -a huge gate on the border of the hunting reserve and then across the -long stone bridge. Before going through the gate, the zebramen had all -dismounted, leaving the zebras to graze in a near-by field until they -returned. These men were to beat and cut the bush, to stir up the game -and also to make a pathway for the hunters. The footmen went forward, -and with huge clubs in one hand and axes in the other, opened up a -passage-way. A little while later an open forest was reached and passed; -the trees of this forest were literally alive with monkeys which -chattered and made grimaces as the party passed. Deer were seen -scampering away, and occasionally a huge boa constrictor could be seen -crawling through the high grass or suspended from the limb of a tree -waiting for its prey. On the opposite side of the forest a thick and -almost impenetrable jungle confronted them, but the bush-beaters went to -work again and a way was opened up. - -Suddenly a roar was heard which was almost deafening. The elephants -stopped and began to move their huge ears forward and back and give -short cries similar to those of a baby. The men immediately scattered, -dividing equally and moving to the right and left. Soon they had formed -a circle about two hundred feet in diameter, and then commenced to close -in toward the centre. This was slow work but they knew that it would not -last long, as the lion or lioness would make a dash for liberty or jump -at one of the party. Mr. Graham had directed his elephant near the -circle and from his elevated point of view he could occasionally catch a -glimpse of a tail above the bush. The men were slowly closing in on the -lion and Mr. Graham held his rifle in readiness to get the first shot. -Suddenly the lion raised on his haunches so that his head appeared above -the bush. This was enough for Mr. Graham, and taking a quick aim at the -head, he fired. The lion dropped, and the natives stood aghast at the -sound of the shot and the sudden flash of fire and smoke which followed. -Mr. Graham slipped from the back of the elephant and made for the bush -and, with the help of an axe, which he was wielding, was fast nearing -the lion, when the huge beast leaped into the air and struck him fairly -on the side of the head. Mr. Bruce, who had half-expected something of -the kind, had been waiting for the lion to leap, and as he appeared -above the bushes, had aimed at a point just behind the brute’s shoulder -and fired. Mr. Graham had been stunned by the powerful blow of the lion -and Mrs. Graham screamed and fainted. Leaving the backs of their -elephants, Onrai, Harry and Mr. Bruce hurried to their companion’s -assistance, and soon reached the spot where he and the lion lay -together. He was insensible and bleeding badly from his wound and with -the lion lying dead over his lower limbs. Harry and Mr. Bruce called -some of the natives, and together they moved the body of the lion, after -which they carried Mr. Graham to an open place where his wound was -washed and wine being poured between his lips he was soon restored to -consciousness. Mrs. Graham was revived by Enola and Nellie, and Mr. -Graham refusing to return, he again took his place in the howdah and the -hunting party proceeded after leaving a number of the natives behind to -skin the lion. - -Mr. Bruce’s shot had struck the lion just behind the right shoulder and -the bullet had penetrated the heart. It was lucky for Mr. Graham that it -did so, for the lion, being maddened with pain, would soon have torn him -to pieces. The King and his men looked at the lion carefully, turning it -over and over, trying to find the marks of wounds such as their arrows -would have made. Harry took his rifle, and handing it to the King, -showed him how to hold it properly, and then how to aim it, telling him -to aim at one of the lion’s paws. He did so, and pulled the trigger. The -King dropped the gun as soon as it was discharged, alarmed at the loud -report it had made so near his ears. Harry and the King went up to the -lion and pointing to its huge paw, Harry showed Onrai the hole made by -the bullet. He was greatly surprised, but could not understand it. Harry -then showed him one of the cartridges and explained to him how the -concussion caused the powder to ignite, forcing the bullet from the tube -and through the gun-barrel with such swiftness as to penetrate anything -that it came in contact with. Onrai slowly shook his head as if it were -still a puzzle to him. - -They again took up the march through the jungle, and presently came to a -large stream which must have found its outlet in the river at the base -of the mountains. They followed the bank of the river for some distance, -until they came to a stone bridge over which they passed. Another open -forest was entered, and here was seen the first herd of elephants. Upon -catching sight of the elephants which our friends were riding, the -curiosity of the herd was aroused, and they came crowding about the -hunting party by scores. So quick had been their movements that the men -on foot had time to do nothing but climb trees. These elephants were -huge monsters, but did not seem ill-disposed towards our friends. They -were very curious, and could not understand the queer things on the -necks and backs of the domesticated elephants. They came crowding around -our friends, shoving their trunks up into their faces and under the -saddle-cloths, as if trying to find out all they could about these -strange visitors. Occasionally one would come too close to the elephants -of our party, and would be pricked by the long daggers about their -bodies, when it would give a cry and retreat. The tame elephants paid no -attention to the others, seeming to consider them as beneath their -notice. They probably looked upon these denizens of the forest as our -friends would on a band of savages. Their curiosity satisfied, they -slowly retreated through the forest, throwing their enormous trunks into -the trees and breaking off limbs half the size of a man’s body. The men -came down from the trees and the party again took up the march. - -They had proceeded but a short distance when a shriek of terror from -Mrs. Graham caused all to look in her direction. A huge gorilla had -sprung from a neighboring tree and seized her with his powerful arm, -showing his white teeth and chattering wildly. For an instant all was -confusion. Harry sprang to the rescue and before the animal could drag -Mrs. Graham from the elephant, his rifle was emptied of its deadly load -and the gorilla laid writhing on the ground. - -With two such experiences in such a short time it was deemed expedient -to abandon the hunt for the day, and though Mrs. Graham was sorry to -cause this break in the programme she could not but admit her desire to -leave a place so fraught with danger. So back through the jungle and -forest, over the bridge and through the gate, and along the white road, -the cool evening breeze now refreshing them after the fearful heat of -the day, the party made its way toward the city. - - - - - CHAPTER IX. - THE GOLD MINE AND CAVE OF ICE. - - -The shock of the day before had left Mrs. Graham in a very nervous -condition. Having arrived at the Temple, she was given into the hands of -her attendants, who soon had her in the perfumed bath, and with a -treatment much resembling our massage, she was soon brought out of her -nervousness. Still to-day she was far from feeling like herself, and -when Onrai had proposed a trip to the gold mine and quarries, she -declined to go. - -Mr. Graham, having already visited these places, decided to remain with -his wife. - -Onrai had each day since their arrival, projected some novel excursion -or entertainment for our friends, the preparation for these always being -both elaborate and complete. So much of interest was to be seen in this -strange city and country, our friends never tired of these excursions. -Many things were seen which contrasted favorably with similar -contrivances in their own country. The streets were paved with the -beautiful onyx, and were always scrupulously clean. There were no -sidewalks, the pavements stretching from lawn to lawn. These pavements -were cleaned once a day with a combination of sweeper, watering cart and -dirt gatherer in one, which did its work most effectually. The -contrivance, but for the material used in its construction, the striped -animals pulling it, and the queer costumes of the drivers, would have -caused no comments on the streets of an American city; for it looked -like the invention of some modern genius. - -This had been used, however, as had every other contrivance or machine, -since the foundation of the city. In fact, the city or country must have -been founded by a race who had reached a high point in civilization, for -their architecture, their fine arts, their implements of manufacture and -farming, all showed deep thought, careful study, and great knowledge of -the principles involved. And the laws which were made to govern the -people were perfect, and, being carried out, left perfect results. - -But our friends had not seen all the wonders of this strange country, or -the works of its people; nor had Onrai given to Enola or the rest of the -strangers, any idea of the immense resources of this land. They had many -things to learn still, and one thing in particular, which would startle -and surprise them. Our friends were happy though, and not one of them -had as yet given a thought to the returning to their homes. This life -was so pleasant, every feature of it so enjoyable, they had little time -or desire to think of aught else. The time would come, however, when a -longing to see their friends left behind, to once more taste the -delights and pleasures of modern civilization, to be where people talked -and acted as themselves, would take such hold on them that they would -wonder how they ever could have found any pleasure in this strange city -and among a people which knew nothing, or cared to know nothing, but -what had passed down to them from the founder of this country, who had -lived thousands of years before. - -But as yet this longing had not come to disturb their peaceful thoughts, -and to-day, as they were about to start on another excursion to see more -of the wonders of this strange country, they were never happier. As was -customary on such occasions, our friends were mounted on the white -elephants, accompanied by the king and ten zebramen, who acted as on -escort. - -Their first stop was to be at the onyx quarries, five miles distant. -They started early, so as to reach the farthest point before the middle -of the day, when the heat was so intense, it was hard to withstand it. - -Their way led through a broad avenue lined on either side by tall palms, -back of which were beautiful palaces, the large entrances being open, -showing their dark, cool interiors. Many of the inhabitants were also on -the street, enjoying the fresh morning breeze. Some were lounging about -the broad terraces, while others were seated on onyx chairs, in the -great gardens surrounding each house. - -The sun, just rising above the eastern mountain, the songs of the birds, -the perfume of the flowers wafted to them by the cool morning breeze, -the beautiful palaces with the white-robed inhabitants lounging about -them, the broad, paved avenue with the white elephants and beautiful -zebras, moving stately along it, left but one thought in the minds of -our friends, namely, that they would willingly brave the hardships, -trials and dangers of their past journey, for this one short hour in the -beautiful city of On. The paved avenue reached on as far as the Cave of -Ice, which the party was to visit before their return. - -At last the immense quarry of onyx was reached, and our friends stood in -wonder, gazing at its great extent. At least forty acres of onyx had -already been taken from the quarry, and huge blocks of the beautiful -stone lay finished on the broad pavement, while others were being placed -by means of levers, on rollers in readiness to be moved to the new -building in course of construction in the city. Some of these blocks -measured twenty feet in length, being five feet square. - -These were moved to the city, and placed in position by means of rollers -and derricks, the huge elephants doing most of the work. About the -quarry were a great many beautiful columns, capitols, pedestals, stones -for arches, balustrades, stairs, and roughly hewn statues, ready to be -moved to the school of fine arts. A great many men were at work, all -taking the greatest interest in their labors. The king explained that -these men discontinued work at eleven o’clock, and were through for the -day. At three o’clock another body of men went to work, and continued -until seven in the evening. The following morning another body of men -would take up the work, and so on, until each company of workingmen had -taken their turn at the work in the quarries. From the time one company -of men leave the quarry for any one of the other duties, which had to be -performed, two weeks elapsed before they again returned. Four hours -comprised a day’s work, and each day found the men at different -employment from the one preceding it, until all of the different -vocations had been temporarily filled. - -The party now continued their journey, passing the gold mine on their -way to the cave of winds, or ice. Arriving at the latter place, before -going into the cave they were taken into a small house and given very -warm garments of untanned lion skins, their attendants telling them that -the air was very cold in the cave and the heavy garments would not feel -uncomfortable. The King taking the lead, they were led to a large arched -opening into the side of the mountain. Torches were carried by the -attendants who preceded them. - -A loud rumbling, which resembled the noise made by the great cataract of -Niagara, soon fell on their ears, and this increased in volume as they -penetrated farther into the mountain. The passage for some distance -after entering, was about ten feet wide and that many high and large -cakes of ice were piled up on each side as if waiting transportation. -The passage soon widened until they found themselves in a large cave, -the sides of which could not be seen in the darkness. - -The air was growing colder each moment and the awful rumbling had become -almost deafening. Far on ahead could be seen numerous lights flickering -in the darkness, and upon our friends asking the King what this meant, -he told them they were used to light the lake on which men were cutting -ice. Here the torches were exchanged for a kind of lantern with a globe -of mica, and before our friends had proceeded much further they realized -why this was done, for a howling wind struck them broadside nearly -knocking them from off their feet. The wind and the deafening noise it -made in its wild rush through this subterranean passage was terrible. It -was fearfully cold, too, and the attendants went among the party and -adjusted the warm fur hoods over the heads and faces, leaving space only -for the eyes and nose. Even these precautions did not save our friends -from the piercing cold, for the blood had been accustomed to the -equatorial heat on the outside and this quick change could not but make -them shiver. Mr. Bruce calculated that the extreme cold would lower the -mercury to 40 degrees, Fah., below zero, but he might have been -mistaken, so long had it been since he experienced such freezing -atmosphere. - -On they went, fighting against the wind and cold until they reached the -shore of the lake. Here about one hundred men were at work cutting ice, -using a sort of long saw and an axe with a very large but narrow blade. -The men were bundled up very carefully and worked very fast. The lake -extended as far as could be seen in the darkness and was one solid sheet -of ice with the exception of the place cut by the men, and even a film -was already beginning to form over this. Near where our friends were -standing was a flume or chute declining towards the entrance of the -cave. The blocks of ice were brought to a point directly under this and -being caught in a fork were raised by means of a windlass to the flume, -where they were sent sliding to the entrance. An acre of ice was cut one -day, and the following day another acre was cut, and by the next day, or -at the end of forty-eight hours the ice had gained a thickness of ten -inches over the acre that was cut on the first day. Thus had it gone on -for centuries, each day an acre of ice being cut and supplied to the -inhabitants. Each palace was furnished a quantity of ice sufficient for -its needs. It was used for cooling the atmosphere as well as for drinks -and preserving provisions. - -Our friends now being thoroughly chilled, and having seen all they -wished to, they left the cavern and as soon as the villa was entered, -attendants took charge of them, and disrobing them, plunged them into a -hot bath, after which they were given a good rubbing and dressed in the -clothes which they had worn upon arriving. After this a meal was served -them. - -At three o’clock a start was made for the gold mine, and upon reaching -this they were put into large cages and lowered down, down, down, until -the very bowels of the earth must have been reached. They could see by -the light of the torches, as they were lowered, the abandoned shafts -which centuries before had probably been mined. - -Down they went until the bottom was at last reached and they left the -cage to explore the mines. The air was fearfully hot and would have been -unbearable but for the cool air forced into the mines from above. Miners -were at work, wearing nothing but a breechcloth. The quartz found at -this depth was the richest our friends had ever seen or heard of. Mr. -Graham calculated that it would assay about eighty per cent. pure gold, -and the quartz was easily mined. Not many men were working in this mine, -as the quartz was so heavy with gold, that but very little was needed to -satisfy the demand. - -Our friends wondered no longer at the profusion of gold ornaments and -implements. Here was enough gold apparently to furnish the world for -hundreds of years. The shaft which they were now working was easily one -hundred feet wide and ten feet high. Just think of quartz assaying -sixteen hundred pounds to the ton and thousands of tons in sight! Still -these people did not consider it as valuable as iron, of which latter -they had plenty, but which they found so hard to work. Onrai explained -to our friends that the miners only worked one hour at a time and there -were months at times when the mines were not worked at all, owing to an -over-supply of gold. Truly these people were rich if they only knew it, -but wealth was an unknown word to them. - -The party, after being shown through some of the unused shafts, where -there was also plenty of quartz, but of an inferior quality, was hoisted -to the surface. The mill for crushing the quartz was shown them and the -process proved very interesting. - -They returned to the city in the cool of the evening, well satisfied -with their day’s excursion. The longer our friends remained in this -strange country, and the more they saw of its beauties and wealth, the -more they were astonished at its vast resources. But they had seen only -a small part of its wonders. - - - - - CHAPTER X. - THE JOURNEY TO THE LAKE. - - -In the centre of this vast country was an immense lake, covering at -least fifteen thousand square feet, and this was filled with almost -every conceivable species of fresh-water fish. This lake was undoubtedly -fed by springs, for no inlet had ever been found. The river was its -outlet, and this, as has been said before, emptied its waters into a -large gulf, or hole in the ground which had a subterranean outlet. - -For a long time our friends had wished to visit this inland sea, but -their days had been so taken up with their other pleasures, a visit to -the lake had been quite impossible, heretofore. However, the day was -fixed for the long-looked-for pleasure, and they were about to start. It -was intended that three days should be spent on this journey, one in -going, one in fishing and the next in returning. - -Mr. Graham was here in his element, for he found more real pleasure in -fishing than in any other sport; and then, from what he could learn, -this fishing excursion was liable to have its adventures, for it was -said, that not only were there small fish in this lake, but also marine -monsters too fearful for description and still more fearful to come in -contact with. He would rather that the ladies remain in the city, but -all were determined to go, so he gave his consent. - -The morning, like all others in this fair land, was beautiful, and -early, even before the sun had risen, the party started from the Temple. -The ladies on the backs of the huge elephants, and the men riding ahead -on sleek, well-groomed zebras, made a picture as they rode through the -beautiful streets. - -The populace was already astir, and the royal party was greeted on all -sides with that respectful salute which was so graceful, but which had -so little humility in it. A road new to the visitors was now taken, one -which led in a straight line due northwest, and which was smoothly paved -with onyx. This road, or avenue, was lined with tremendous trees, the -thick foliage of which met and mingled a hundred feet above their heads, -making a vast shady arch through which the sun’s rays could not -penetrate. As far as their eyes could reach this tree-arched avenue -extended. - -“How far is it to the lake?” asked Nellie. - -“Twenty miles, according to your method of measuring distances,” -answered Onrai. - -“And does this magnificent avenue extend so far?” asked Enola. - -“Not only to the lake,” answered Onrai, “but it borders its shores, its -entire circumference.” - -“And is it all paved as it is here?” asked Harry. - -“Yes, throughout its entire length,” added Onrai. - -“And has this been done recently?” asked Enola. - -“Recently,” answered Onrai, “I do not understand you.” - -“Has it been done during your reign or the reign of your predecessor?” -exclaimed Enola. - -“No, it has not been done during my reign or during my life, so I, as a -consequence, know nothing of the time of its laying,” answered Onrai. - -“But it must have been laid but a short time,” said Enola, “for not one -of these beautifully polished stones shows the least defacement.” - -“Oh, that counts for naught,” said Mr. Bruce, “for they are placed -together so carefully, and the onyx itself is so hard, there is no -possibility of its chipping.” - -“This is called the Avenue of On,” said Onrai, “and not only circumvents -the lake, but stretches on from the opposite side to the farthest corner -of On, or to the great field of brilliants.” - -“To the field of brilliants? Tell us of this, Onrai,” said Enola. - -“Far away in the direction in which we are now going is a large field -devoid of all verdure. Rocks from the size of a zebra’s hoof to those -half as large as the Temple cover the ground. The cliffs which surround -our country at this point are seamed and very irregular, which shows -that at some remote age the rocks which now cover the field were torn -from them, and having been ground and crushed in their rush to the level -field, have finally there found a resting place. But these stones and -rocks do not entirely cover the field, for there seems to be an ashy -substance and in places a bluish sandstone, and covering these are -small, white brilliants as pure, white and clear as the water from a -spring. During the day these stones catch the sun’s rays and gleam forth -like polished silver but with a brilliancy much more intense. But at -night when the great white sentinel rises in the heavens and throws its -soft light on these stones, they look like the reflection of stars in -the lake. I have never looked upon this field but once at night and it -impressed me then as being the grandest sight in our whole land.” - -“Diamonds,” said Mr. Graham. - -“May be so, or they may be nothing but brilliants, as he calls them,” -said Mr. Bruce. - -“But do you use these?” asked Harry. - -“Yes, we use them,” said Onrai, “the larger ones in our sling-shots for -killing small game; the smaller ones we polish and use for -ornamentation. They are very hard, harder than onyx, and we find it very -difficult to polish them.” - -“You are undoubtedly right, Mr. Graham,” said Mr. Bruce. “They must be -diamonds.” - -“How strange it is that these people think so little of everything on -which civilization places the greatest value,” said Enola. - -“Yes,” answered Mr. Graham, “but it is because these articles, gold and -diamonds are so plentiful. I doubt not but that if these were as -plentiful in our world we would care but little for them.” - -“May be,” said Mr. Bruce. - -It was now high noon, and although the sun’s rays did not reach them, -still the day was very hot and it was decided best to wait over for -three or four hours in one of the farm villas which they were now -opposite. They accordingly dismounted, and although the house was -unoccupied at the time, still the same comforts and conveniences which -were found in all of these charming villas were also found here. After -partaking of a light lunch of iced wine and honey and cake, the party -retired for a short siesta. - -The sun was well toward the western horizon when they again took up -their journey and now a cool breeze had sprung up which made the ride -along the shady flower-scented avenue, delightful in the extreme. They -now began to meet the fishermen with their day’s catch on their way to -the city. There were a great many of these for the lake furnished most -of the fish for the entire populace. These fish were carried in a sort -of kettle which was partly filled with ice; this kettle was swung -between two zebras, the back saddles of which were connected by the rod -from which the kettle hung. So well-trained were the zebras to this work -that they went along perfectly and one man was able to manage eight or -ten of these teams. - -Now through the trees in the distance could be seen the blue waters of -the beautiful lake. As far as the eye could reach stretched the calm -waters, the surface as smooth as glass. As they drew near the shore -numerous small boats could be seen. - -“These are the boats of the fishermen,” said Onrai, “and that black -speck well down toward the horizon is the island Myrrh, on which is a -villa in which we will spend the night.” - -“But can we reach it before dark?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“We will have to,” said Onrai, “for it is not safe to be on the lake -after nightfall.” - -“And why?” asked Enola. - -“Because of certain sea monsters which inhabit its waters,” said Onrai. - -Mr. Bruce looked at Nellie and the thought occurred to both. - -“Can these fearful monsters be like the one which so nearly proved our -death in the cave?” - -“These marine animals are not seen during the day for they lie at the -bottom of the lake as long as the sun is shining, but when the glorious -orb of day has set and can no longer cast its hot rays on their hideous -bodies, they then come to the surface and very often fearful fights -occur among them. They prey on each other and after one of these nights -of terrible battle I have seen the surface of the water red as far as -the eye could reach, and may be several of their ugly dead bodies would -be floating about the water near the island.” - -“It is fearful,” said Mrs. Graham. - -“Yes, it is the one fearful thing in this fair land of ours,” said -Onrai. - -They now reached the shore and Onrai signaled one of the boats to -approach. These boats, long and narrow, were propelled by six oarsman. -They almost flew through the water and in a very short space of time the -boat which Onrai had signaled drove its bow far up on the shore of the -island. Those who had accompanied the company thus far, were to wait on -shore until the following morning when Onrai and his friends should -return. The boatmen pulled a quick stroke and in a half hour the island -was reached. - -Attendants had anticipated them and had prepared the evening meal and -all were soon enjoying the delights of fair On’s cuisine. - - - - - CHAPTER XI. - THE FIGHT OF THE SEA MONSTERS. - - -The island on which they now were was very small, not being more than -one half mile in circumference. In fact it was a mere dot on the surface -of this vast inland lake, but it was of considerable importance, -nevertheless, for here the King made periodical excursions, and often -took up his residence for weeks at a time in its charming villa. From -the shore on which the party landed, the island rose gently to the -centre, and on this slight eminence stood the villa. On the opposite -side the shores were precipitous, rising in a cliff about fifty feet -high. Bordering this cliff had been built a low, onyx wall and the -intervening space between this and the villa had been laid out in a -magnificent garden, filled with the redolent flowers so numerous in this -country. - -It was this delightful spot, shaded by immense palms and eucalyptus -trees, which so pleased the King and which brought him here so -frequently. From this garden could be seen the cliffs far away to the -south and east and the fertile country lying between, and on the -opposite side of the lake spreading on and on until merged into the blue -horizon. Even from the broad dining hall, in which the party were now -sitting, could be caught glimpses of the city as it lay bathed in the -bright moonlight far away, and occasionally dim lights could be seen -which shone from the open villa of the pink-white city. - -“Look,” said Enola. “Is the scene not grand?” - -“Yes,” said Harry, “the most exquisite picture I ever looked upon.” - -“It is because of this natural picturesqueness that I visit this island -so frequently,” said Onrai. “To me it has no equal, and I can conceive -of nothing more beautiful.” - -“No,” said Enola, “nothing could be more beautiful, for here we have -every element which goes to make up a grand landscape; the distant city -standing on the gentle slope of the foothills, the towering cliffs -beyond, their jagged rocks softened by the moonlight; the broad fields, -the noble forests, and about us the blue waters of the lake.” - -“Truly a good country to live in,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“Yes, a fair country, with which God has dealt most kindly,” said Mr. -Graham. - -The party arose and through the broad halls and lofty entrance they went -into the garden; across this and near to the stone wall reclining seats -had been placed for them. The scene which now met their gaze was -ineffably grand. The lake lay before them like a sea of liquid silver -the surface scarcely ruffled by the soft evening breeze; beyond, the -shore of the mainland with its flickering lights, dimmed by the bright -rays of the moon, and beyond these the magnificent panorama already -described. The party sat for a long time lost in contemplation of the -magnificent scenery. - -“Look,” said Enola, “a boat.” - -“No, Enola, not a boat,” said Onrai, “for it means death to any who may -venture on the lake at night.” - -“It may mean death, Onrai, but nevertheless some one of your countrymen -has undertaken the hazardous journey to-night, for see, the lights in -the bow shine brightly,” replied Enola. - -Onrai had arisen as Enola had spoken, and stepping to the wall looked -long at the black object coming toward them, then resuming his seat, he -said: - -“No, it is one of the monsters; those lights are its fiery eyes.” - -A shudder ran through the frames of all present excepting Onrai, who had -long since become accustomed to look upon these fearful sea serpents. On -the black mass came, growing larger and larger as it neared them. -Remembrances of the fearful race with and escape from the monster in the -cavern came to the minds of those who had participated in this dreadful -scene, and Mrs. Graham arising, said: - -“Onrai, you will pardon, I hope, a woman’s faintheartedness, but I -cannot look upon the scenes which we have been told by you will shortly -take place near us; so with your kind permission I will retire to my -apartment.” - -“You have my permission most assuredly, Mrs. Graham, and it grieves me -to think that I have been the cause of this disturbance of mind. When -these monsters come together the battle will be fearful, and if the -other ladies feel that they cannot witness it, it would be better for -them to retire also, for see! other monsters are now coming, and the -fight will soon commence.” - -At this Nellie arose and together with her mother they entered the -villa. - -As Onrai had said, other black masses were now seen and the glow of red -eyes shone through the semi-darkness from all directions. On came their -bodies growing larger as they came nearer. Now the foremost had reached -the base of the cliff and raising its huge body half out of the water, -threw its ugly head back and fastened its glittering eyes on those who -were watching its movements from above. The moon shone full on its long, -dragon-like body and the party shuddered with horror as they recognized -in it the exact counterpart of the sea-monster of the cave. After gazing -on those above it for a full minute, and then realizing probably that -they were out of its reach, the monster became enraged and, throwing -itself back into the water beat the surface with its wing-like fins and -long tail until almost lost to view in the foam thus created. But others -had now come close to the rock, and as the number increased the water -was blackened by their dark bodies. It was a mass of writhing, -horror-depicting sea reptiles, and as they wound in and out under and -over each other, their eyes glowing the while, it was enough to make the -stoutest heart grow faint. - -Suddenly one of them, which had been crowded close to the rocks by the -great number from behind, and finding it impossible to extricate itself -in any other way, dove, and piercing the body of the one next to it, -held it half out of water, pinioned on its formidable horn. - -“Ah, the battle has commenced,” said Onrai. - -“It is fearful,” again said Enola. - -“Horrible but fascinating,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“This is but the beginning,” said Onrai. “In a few moments the whole -seething mass will be engaged in one grand battle royal. If, Enola, you -think you cannot look on this hideous spectacle, it would be better for -you to retire now.” - -“No,” said Enola, “I wish to see it all.” - -They again turned their attention to the monsters. When the beast had -been pierced by the horn of its companion, it had given out a fearful -groan like that of a dying man. This seemed to be a signal, for -immediately the beast began to beat the water with fins and tail, until -the spray was forced upward almost splashing our friends. In fact the -lake looked as if it had been struck by a hurricane so turbulent had the -waters become. All this commotion was but preliminary, however, for it -soon ceased, and all was perfectly quiet for a moment, when, as if moved -by a common impulse the battle commenced in earnest. - -Each had, seemingly, during the short interval of rest, selected its -prey or opponent, for as far as could be seen the fight was a succession -of duels, not more than two being engaged at once in tearing each other -to pieces. Fastening their fiery eyes on each other they would retreat -for a short distance, and then, with heads thrown back and their -enormous jaws opened, would make a rush for each other, coming together -with sickening force, their huge jaws crunching into each other’s -bodies, or, perhaps fastening jaw into jaw. Then they would writhe and -squirm, beating each other with their fins and tails. Upon becoming -exhausted, if one or the other had not been overcome with the struggle -they would disengage themselves, and retreating, rest for a moment and -then make another rush for each other. Now they would dive, ripping each -other with their murderous tusks, frequently both being beneath the -surface, but the agitation of the water telling that the fearful battle -was being continued far beneath. - -Again they would rise to the surface, their bodies torn and lacerated, -and blood from the gaping wounds dyeing the water a crimson red. One -would finally succumb and the survivors, after giving their fallen -antagonists a parting thrust, would swim away until outside the -seething, battling mass. Here it would nurse its wounds, waiting -seemingly for the horrible struggle to end. Here also it would be joined -by other victors, but these undoubtedly having the proper respect for -the fighting powers of those about them, would not again take the risk -of being annihilated. - -The duelling was becoming less fierce each moment for the weaker were -fast being overcome and the survivors joining their victorious comrades. -All this time the dreadful groans continued. Now the last victor had -vanquished his foe and joined the others. - -“Ah, the battle is finished,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“No, not yet,” said Onrai. “Watch the line of victors.” - -These had formed a straight compact line, and as if by a signal, they -charged on the bodies of the dead and wounded floating on the surface. -Their movements were as swift as lightning, and like a body of -well-drilled cavalrymen they charged, killing the helpless wounded, and -lacerating the bodies of the dead. Then they again retreated and, as the -first faint rays of morn streaked the eastern heavens, they sank beneath -the surface, leaving the bodies of their victims to rot in the heat of -the equatorial sun. - -When the party again reached the mainland, they were taken to the villa -in which they were to spend the night. The men returned to the lake in -the evening and watched the process of cutting up the monsters, and -taking from them the fat which produced the oil. The remains of the -animals were then piled in heaps and burned. One hundred and four had -been killed the night before, but how many still remained to be -slaughtered by their mates? - -As the men stood watching the scene, Onrai said: - -“This sight is even becoming loathsome to me; let us return to the -villa.” - -As they were crossing the broad avenue, a suspicion of music was wafted -from the direction of the city. It was so faint that our friends could -not say whether it was the music of distant harps, or the song of some -night bird, far away. They stopped for a moment and listened, but the -sound not again being heard, they resumed their walk toward the villa. - -Onrai had also stopped and seemed to be listening, but had offered no -explanation until they again started for the villa. Our friends seemed -to think he could explain this distant music if he wished to, and they -looked at him inquiringly. Noticing this look, Onrai said: - -“In two months comes the Day of Resis. It is our custom during the two -months previous to this day to sing songs of praise at this hour each -evening.” - -“Are they songs of joy and happiness?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“They are,” said Onrai. But he would say nothing further on the subject. - - - - - CHAPTER XII. - THE NIGHT OF PRAYER. - - -As the night came on and the glorious moon rose high into the heavens, -bathing all in its silvery rays, the very beauty of the scene made our -friends forget the horrors of the night before. They had assembled in -the garden, and the swinging chairs, as they were moved slowly backward -and forward by the attendants, were conducive to rest and comfort. They -were far enough removed from the lake to be entirely free from any -suggestions which its busy scenes might make. - -Near Enola stood the great white elephant, which she rode on all -journeys, its huge body towering into the air and nearly touching the -lower boughs of the trees. This elephant had become so attached to Enola -that it seemed happy only when with her, and she had requested of Onrai -that he allow “Gip,” as she had named it, to come into the garden while -they were there. He had now taken hold of the rope with his trunk and -was swinging the chair as carefully as could be done by the attendants. -Occasionally he would let out that peculiar cry so much like an -infant’s, when Enola would hand him one of the sweets which she always -had about her when he was near. - -Several of the zebras were also grazing in the garden and the deer, -which were numerous, would come up now and then, and with their great -liquid eyes, gaze into the faces of our friends. There was no timidity -in these animals, for they were all treated so kindly, and had so long -been made pets of, that all fear of the human form had left them. - -The lofty trees, the flower-bedecked garden with the animals wandering -through it, the perfumed air, the pink onyx villa in the background, the -silk-robed party swinging lazily to and fro, the attendants standing -near, and above all, the glorious moon, made an enchanting scene. -Suddenly, as if in a dream, too faint almost to be heard, was wafted on -the evening breeze a strain as sweet and indistinct as the low melody of -an Æolian harp. Onrai half rose and as the music grew stronger he became -erect, and bowing his head, almost whispered, “’Tis the night of -prayer.” - -The attendants discontinued the swinging of the chairs and also bowed -their heads. Our friends, half aroused from the sweet languor into which -they had fallen, looked with wondering eyes at Onrai. The exquisite -music was coming nearer and nearer, and now could be discerned -harmonious voices mingling with the strains of the harp. On and on they -came, the music growing louder and stronger, but losing none of its -sweetness. Onrai and the attendants still stood with bowed heads, and in -a subdued voice, Onrai was evidently repeating a prayer. So impressive -was the beautiful music and the devout attitude of those about them, our -friends were deeply moved, and had now also arisen and were standing -with bent heads and clasped hands, breathing a prayer. - -Now those who were making such sweet music had reached the villa, and -our friends raising their eyes, looked upon a picture. Standing in the -foreground, with his arm thrown over the neck of the zebra, from which -he had dismounted, and holding in one hand a shepherd’s hook, was a -white-robed priest. Grouped in a semicircle about him, were a number of -maidens all carrying tiny torches. Back of them was a body of men, and -still further in the background were the elephants and zebras which had -brought the party from the city. - -As they stood there, Onrai approached and spoke to the priest in the -native tongue. Then, with the King leading, they went direct to the -villa and entered. - -“How strange,” said Enola, when Onrai with his visitors had left them -alone. - -“Strange indeed,” said Mr. Graham. “Can it be that they bring unexpected -news from the city?” - -“It is hard to tell,” said Mr. Bruce. “But I think not. It is evidently -a celebration of one of their religious rites. From the solemn -proceedings I should say that this was so.” - -Just then Onrai was seen approaching them and when he was directly -opposite, he said: - -“’Tis the night of prayer, come;” and turning, he retraced his steps -with our friends following. - -They were led through the wide hall to a spacious apartment in the rear. -This apartment was the exact counterpart of the large devotional chamber -in the Temple, but somewhat smaller. Subdued lights were placed at -frequent intervals about the sides of the apartment, and others hung -from the lofty ceiling. In the centre was a wide, crescent-shaped -platform, and standing about its base were those who had so recently -come from the city. - -As the King entered with our party the natives commenced playing on -their native harps, and the low, sweet music penetrated to the very -souls of our friends. Onrai led them to the platform on which seats had -been placed; then the priest also mounted the platform, and facing the -King, commenced reading in the native tongue from one of the polished -tablets of wood. He then passed this to the King and he, arising, read -from it the same inscription. Then the priest raised his hand, and all -joined in a chant, the maidens accompanying the voices on the harps. It -was solemn but grand and very impressive. The chant ended, the priest -again turned toward the King and began speaking, the maidens in the -meanwhile playing a sweet refrain on the harps. The priest having -finished speaking, the King arose, turned his face heavenward and -prayed: - -“God our Father, God of the Heavens and earth, God of On, God of all, as -the flowers turn their faces to the great orb of day, so we on this -night of prayer, turn our faces to Thee. O God, we know that all -blessings come from Thee and we thank Thee. We thank Thee for the -fertile fields, the green pastures, the silvery waters, the shady -forest, the life-giving sun of day, the soft-lighted moon and cool -breezes of the night. We feel Thy presence O God, we know that Thou art -near us. Still be with us and when our time has come take us home to -Thee, our God, our Father.” - -Onrai ceased praying and the sweet voices and the music of the harps -again broke forth. Now the voices grew fainter, the music more subdued, -the lights growing dimmer and dimmer. Now the voices were almost -whispering, the strains of music are dying, dying, the lights are -flickering. At last all is hushed and dark. Suddenly the Temple was -flooded with brilliant light, a glorious grand flood of song and music -burst forth. More brilliant becomes the light, louder and grander grows -the music, as if from a thousand voices, as if from a thousand harps. -Now comes a troop of maidens robed in shimmering white, singing and -playing. Lightly they trip over the polished floor, their forms swaying -and their limbs bending gracefully as they dance. - -Our friends hold their breath for fear of losing one strain of the sweet -music; they lean forward eagerly to catch every movement of the willowy -figures. All is grand beyond conception. The music becomes more -soul-stirring, the dance grows quicker, the lights blinding in their -brilliancy. Our friends arise in their eagerness to see and hear. ’Tis -glorious! - -Suddenly the maidens leave the room, the song and music cease, the -lights are darkened. ’Tis over. - -The night of prayer with its grand and imposing ceremonies had passed, -and now the party had again assembled and were partaking of the morning -meal preparatory to starting on the day’s journey. It was yet very -early, for in this equatorial climate the journeys had to be taken in -the cool of the mornings and evenings. The sun’s rays in the middle of -the day were too hot to withstand. Through the open door could be seen -the elephants and zebras trapped and waiting for the start. Nearby -stood, not only the attendants, but also the party which had arrived the -night before. Turning to Onrai, Enola asked: - -“Are those who came from the city also to accompany us, Onrai?” - -“Yes,” answered Onrai, “it is essential that they should go with us, for -we shall not have returned to the city before the night of prayer shall -have again come, and on this night we must have a priest and -attendants.” - - - - - CHAPTER XIII. - THE ACCUSATION. - - -The heat of the day had been excessive, but our friends had not suffered -to any great extent because of the shade which the avenue trees had -afforded; and then they had rested during the midday hour, and had not -taken up the journey until late in the afternoon. Then, too, the brisk -trot of the animals, as they moved over the smooth stone pavement, had -created a breeze which was very cooling to the riders; but as they -emerged from the forest, dark clouds were seen rising out of the west; -dark, forboding clouds, which portended rain and probably a hard blow. -The forerunner of this equatorial storm reached them before they arrived -at the villa, in the shape of quick, rapidly moving gusts of wind, which -would overtake them and moving on would leave the air perfectly calm, -hot and humid, until the next gust would spring out of the ground -seemingly, and fly after its leaders. - -The riders hurried on, one minute fanned by a refreshing breeze and the -next almost sweltering in the dead calm. But they suffered only a short -time, as the villa was reached and once inside its cool, onyx walls, all -thought of the humidity of the outside was forgotten, and the on-coming -storm was only thought of as making the air cool for the morrow’s -journey. After dinner the travelers went into the garden and hardly any -signs were seen now of the approaching storm; in fact, the evening was -much the same as had been many others since their arrival. They retired -late but had not slept long when the wind rose almost to a gale. The -storm was a novelty, and our friends never having seen an equatorial -storm, all arose and went on the terrace. - -The elephants had already sniffed the approaching storm and began to -throw their trunks in the air, moving their huge ears back and forth, -all the time making those funny sounds, which seemed so strange in such -large animals. The storm meant to them a refreshing bath, coupled with a -feed of grass and herbs washed by the cooling rain; they gloried in it. -The zebras were already grazing, or half buried in the long grass, were -rolling and kicking, happy to be free from bridle and saddle. - -Onrai alone, of all the party, after going onto the terrace, seemed to -be worried over the storm. He had gone to one end of the terrace, and -now stood looking intently at the black mass of clouds which were -rolling on, coming nearer and nearer, and reaching out huge, dark arms -toward the earth. He was muttering in the strange tongue of his people: - -“An omen. Is our great God angry? Have my people failed in their duties? -Have we neglected our work? Have we treated lightly our teachings? No; -but our God is great. He sees all things, and goes deep into the hearts -of his people, and he knows even if they contemplate doing wrong. Oh!——” -Onrai raises his hand to his forehead, and pressing it tightly against -his throbbing temples, he staggers and almost falls. - -“Can this thing be?” he gasped. “Is this a warning to me, the King of -the Land of On? Is this to show me that God knows my sinful thoughts and -would check them before it is forever too late? Oh, my God, spare me!” -he cries, and sinks into one of the onyx chairs near him. His powerful -frame shook like an aspen leaf; his breath came in gasps; his hands -twitched nervously; his eyes almost started from their sockets as he -gazed on the black clouds, which seemed to engulf him. Unable to look -upon the fearful sight any longer, he sprung to his feet, and shading -his eyes with his hand as if to hide from view those fearful clouds, he -staggered towards the entrance. He struck something as he hurried -forward, and started back frightened. Looking up he saw that it was -Enola, and raising his hand as if to warn her back, he said: - -“You, too? Have you come to accuse me at this moment? Could you not have -spared me?” - -Onrai again started for the entrance, but Enola noticing the pained look -in his face, and being totally at a loss to know why he should address -her in this manner, caught him by the light tunic as he was passing her. -He stopped and looked at her with frightened eyes. - -“Onrai,” said Enola, “don’t look at me in that way. How have I offended -you? Tell me, is it I or one of my people?” - -Onrai looked at her, his heroic figure standing erect, his shoulders -thrown back as if to defy the influence which Enola was exerting over -him. But his face was deathly pale and his hands clutched nervously as -they hung by his side; his eye never flinched, however, as he looked at -her. - -“Onrai, do not look at me so,” said Enola, stepping back, growing afraid -of that unbending figure and steely gaze. - -“What have I done?” she continued. “I come to seek you to-night to thank -you for the happy, happy day which you have given me; for having -suggested this pleasant journey. The beautiful music of the evening made -me forget for a time this duty, but I thought of it as I retired to my -apartment and was glad of the opportunity which the storm afforded me to -thank you yet to-night. My heart was light as I came from the villa, -expecting to find that great, noble Onrai glad to see me and ready to -hear my thanks, but I find him excited and nervous, and when he sees me -he speaks as I never heard him speak before. Tell me, oh, tell me, -Onrai, what have I done?” - -Enola stopped near the entrance and waited for Onrai’s answer. - -“What have you done?” he said. “Everything. You have come from that -planet home of yours and have stolen into our land in the night; but we -have received you as guests and have treated you as we would those who -come from afar and sought our hospitality. - -“Myself and my people have done all in our power to make your sojourn in -our world a happy one. From that world of yours, far above, in one of -those shining stars which twinkles and throws its soft light on us on -the clear beautiful nights, we believe that your people have for ages -looked down on us, and have learned our life, our customs and our -secrets. This we have learned to believe since you have come among us, -for before that time we knew nothing of another people. And you come to -us with the chain of the high priest about your neck, and this is proof -that you know the great secrets of the high priests and those of the Day -of Resis. For this reason we have looked for you to respect our laws and -customs. To all but me you seem to have done this. I have just begun to -believe that you, and may be your people, have no respect for the sacred -laws that govern me, the King of On. To-night has been a revelation to -me. Never before, during my life, has there come such a storm at this -season. I looked at the dark heavens and saw the black clouds hurried on -by the mad winds, almost sweeping the earth, and I could see in it only -a warning. Then it flashed over my bewildered brain that the warning was -meant for me. I had sinned. But why had I sinned? Because tempted by you -who knew our laws, and knew the fearful punishment which would be the -King’s who would dare disobey these laws. You who cared naught for all -these, but still threw out your alluring temptations, your subtle -fascinations, in order to entrap me. But God has spoken in this storm -and I am saved. Listen to His voice,” and as he ceased speaking a -fearful peal of thunder broke through the air as if in answer to him. - -Enola stood aghast during this accusation, unable to account for this -fearful change in Onrai’s conduct toward her, until he had mentioned the -storm, and then she realized that it was this unusual phenomenon which -had wakened in his mind the sin he was committing in loving her; she -must let him know that these fascinations were only those which God had -given her, and that the seeming allurements were but the graceful -acknowledgments of his many courtesies. But how to tell him, how to -convince him! He still stood like a statue, like an accusing Apollo who -had but little mercy for one who had caused him even a moment’s pain. To -suffer for even an instant was such a new sensation to the man, and it -was so acute withal, that for the time he could find no forgiveness for -the one who had caused it, and he stood contemplating Enola, for the -moment a savage, glaring at the one who had caused him a moment’s pain, -and whom he had in his power to torture as he saw fit. - -He forgot his love for her for the moment; he only remembered that she -had hurt him, and when the first great fear of the discovery was over, -he grew hard and cold and wanted revenge. Enola saw that she had blind -superstition to deal with, superstition whose birth was in sin, and she -knew that it would be hard to convince Onrai of her innocence. But this -she must do; so taking a step timidly toward him, she raised her hand as -if she would touch his arm, but when he saw this movement he -involuntarily drew his arm away as if afraid that her touch would -contaminate him. The movement hurt her more than all his harsh words had -done, and she partially turned as if to walk away, but remembering the -fearful consequences that might ensue unless Onrai’s mind should be -disabused of this fearful mistake which he had made, she turned again, -and placing her hands behind her, walked up to him and looking him -straight in the eye, said: - -“Onrai, look at me. Do you see any guilt or flinching in my eye? Do you -think that I, who have the same faith in the same God that you have, -could look at you now if I were guilty, and too, when this fearful storm -is raging, which you call the voice and anger of God? No, Onrai; you and -your people have a mistaken idea when you think we knew your life, -customs and laws before we came to your world. We did not even know that -your people existed; but we knew that there was a world here and we -determined to visit it, and learn whether it was inhabited or not. So we -came and found this glorious land and this beautiful, justice-loving -people. And never until to-night have I learned to think that they had -any but the grandest minds, with the most charitable thoughts for those -who had been thrown in with them for awhile. I understand your laws but -imperfectly, and I do not understand why you should treat me thus, or -accuse me of wishing to make you sin or suffer because of an unusual -phenomenon. Search your mind, Onrai, and see if it was not yourself who -sinned willingly and not because I have tempted you; ask yourself if in -any way I have been less modest than your native women; whether I have -sought you, or you me; whether I have not avoided you rather than sought -you. Ask yourself these questions, and then accuse me if you can.” And -as Enola finished speaking, she drew herself up nobly and started to -walk toward the entrance. She had nearly reached this when Onrai stepped -forward and almost in a whisper, said: - -“Enola, wait; wait; let me think; let me think; my brain is whirling; I -cannot see all clearly yet; but it is growing brighter. Oh, Enola, -forgive, forgive me. I cannot now tell you the great sin which I thought -was your making, but which I can now see was all my own. The laws of the -Land of On are stringent on this point, and if I should give up to the -temptation I would be killed. To be killed for sinning means not only -the death of the body, but the everlasting torture of the soul. It is a -fearful thing for any of us to sin, but how much more so is it for the -King, the chosen one, who is the people’s choice not because he is the -greatest physically, but the purest of mind, if there can be one purer -than the others. But I have sinned unwittingly, and it is because of -this that I was so ready to accuse you. But I look at you now and see in -that clear, unflinching eye, that smooth brow and erect body, no guilt. -You are innocent, Enola; innocent and I ask forgiveness. It seems -strange that I should use the word to one on earth, for it belongs to -God, and is never used among us. But I have wronged you fearfully and I -know not how else to make amends. Forgive me, Enola,” and as he -finished, he took her hand and raised it to his lips. - -Enola was crying, for the pleading words of this strong man, this King, -touched her strangely. - -“But tell me, Onrai, of this strange sin, that I may know,” she said. - -“No,” Onrai answered, “it would be a greater sin to tell it to you. But -listen; what is that fearful rumbling sound?” - - - - - CHAPTER XIV. - THE STORM. - - -So absorbed had Enola and Onrai been in their talk that the storm had -been forgotten for the moment. But it had not abated but had rather -grown fiercer and blacker, until now it was so dark that objects only a -short distance away could not be seen. The elephants could be heard -stalking through the garden, and occasionally their huge bodies and also -the zebras would be lit up by the lurid lightning. But the wind had died -down to almost a calm a few moments before, and nothing had broken the -stillness of the night but the sharp peals of thunder which would follow -the brilliant lightning. - -But as Onrai spoke, a rumbling was heard, not like distant thunder, but -less distinct, like the rattling of a distant railway train, the sound -being regular but growing louder each moment. The others of the party -now joined Enola and Onrai, and the attendants grouped themselves about -the terrace. There was no fear depicted on their faces, or shown in -their actions, but there was the greatest wonderment. This was something -unheard of, a storm like this promised to be, in the heart of the dry -season; still fear was unknown to them, or that fear which is caused by -a possibility of bodily suffering. They simply wondered and did not even -try to make out the mystery. - -Now the elephants seemed to scent danger, for they would sniff the air -and then give out that peculiar cry. The zebras had gathered together in -one part of the garden and would neigh in a pitiful manner as if -expecting danger. The rumbling grew louder and more distinct and now -sounded like the falling of many trees. The heavens were lurid with -flash after flash of lightning, this lending a fearfulness to the scene -which was awful. Now the elephants came up quite near to the terrace as -if trying to find a place of refuge, and standing together with their -backs turned toward the storm waited for the worst. Then the trees gave -out a gentle wail as they were touched with the first breath of the -wind; then they began to sway and groan as if in mortal agony. Each -moment the wind grew more fierce, the lightning more vivid, the rumbling -more deafening. - -“Is this not unusual, Onrai?” asked Mr. Graham. - -“It has never before happened at this time of the year,” said Onrai. “At -this season we never expect rain and depend wholly on the heavy dews to -moisten our vegetation.” - -“It seems to be very fierce. Are your storms all like this?” asked Mr. -Bruce. - -“We have very hard storms accompanied by very strong winds, but I have -never seen, or heard anything like this. Listen; is it not growing -worse?” and Onrai’s face for the first time looked troubled. - -“Yes, very much worse,” said Harry, “and I would advise that we all go -inside the villa.” - -“No, Harry,” said Enola, “let us remain outside until driven in. The -sight is too grand to lose.” - -“I am willing to remain but it is much safer inside during a storm like -this,” said Harry. - -Now the noise drowned their voices and conversation was given up. The -air seemed full of electricity; the flesh tingled with it; the nostrils -inhaled it and a copperish taste was left in the mouth. - -“Look,” shouted Enola, “what is that fearful mass approaching, and hear -that terrible sound. It is like the dashing of thousands of waves -against the rocks, or the tearing asunder of mighty mountains.” - -This was true; and now in the lurid lightning could be seen the dark -clouds flying over Mother Earth, crushing all in its way. On the left of -the villa was an open space, probably five miles broad, and on the far -edge of this, as Enola spoke, could be seen the black cloud approaching. -It seemed to take everything in its course and now the air was filled -with all kinds of debris; huge logs of wood and even large boulders were -seen flying through the air. It was a seething, hurling mass, made more -awful by the ear-piercing noise and the continuous lightning. - -“A cyclone,” shouted Mr. Graham, but his voice could hardly be heard -above the fearful din. “Hasten,” he continued, “into the house,” and -leading his wife by one hand and Nellie by the other he hurried toward -the entrance. - -Onrai took Enola by the arm and was hurrying with all speed toward the -large arch, when Enola, looking at the elephants, saw Gip looking -pitifully at her and extending his trunk toward her as if begging her to -help him. “Poor Gip,” she said, and freeing herself from Onrai’s -retaining arm, she walked to the edge of the terrace and patted the -elephant on the trunk stretched toward her. - -“Come Enola or it will be too late,” said Onrai. But it was even then -too late, for Enola had leaned too far over the edge and losing her -balance, fell to the lawn beneath. The distance was not great and Enola -was not hurt, so she picked herself up and started for the steps leading -to the terrace. But the wind had now grown so fierce she could hardly -keep an upright position, and before she realized it she was being -hurried forward with a speed which almost took her feet from under her. -On by the steps she sped, unable to battle against the wind and force -her way up these. - -Gip had followed her, wonderingly at first, but at last, seeming to -realize her peril, quickened his pace and just as the wind was about to -hurl her to the ground, he grasped her about the waist with his powerful -trunk and turned toward the terrace again; but the awful wind was even -stronger than this mighty animal, and he was losing ground each step. -Bravely he battled, holding Enola far above his head, his trunk -encircling her body just tightly enough to keep her from slipping -through its folds. His great body now began to sway in the gale and it -looked for a moment as if both elephant and Enola would be picked up and -swept into the fearful, swirling holocaust overhead. - -Gip knew his danger, so turning his back to the storm he hurried on with -it. At first he traveled only in a trot as if reluctant to give up to -the power of the storm, but his pace grew faster and faster as this -fearful power asserted itself, until he was flying over the ground, he -seemed to no longer touch the ground so rapid was his pace. He had -thrown Enola over on his back so that she could rest her limbs, but he -still kept a firm hold on her with his trunk, and they kept up the mad -rush together. The air was filled with debris of all kinds and Enola was -afraid to open her eyes for fear of being blinded. On they rushed, the -elephant keeping up the mad pace before the wind. One moment it would be -as black as Erebus; the next the lightning’s glare would break through -the dirt filled atmosphere. It was a seething mass, a hurricane sweeping -all before it; twisting trees from their roots or snapping their huge -trunks like straws; sucking up great quantities of water as it crossed -inlets of the lake; picking up in its mighty grasp cows, sheep, deer, -zebra and all other animals excepting the huge elephants, whose great -weight kept them from being carried from earth. - -Enola was lying flat on Gip’s back, he holding her there as if he -understood that she would be drawn from his grasp if he allowed her to -sit up for even a moment. Grandly the noble beast fought against the -fearful storm; the awful pace had now kept up so long he was fast giving -out, and Enola could feel his grasp growing weaker, and feel the weary -limbs give way when they would strike the earth; his breath came quick -and he was gasping like a dying human being; but he kept on fighting, -still fighting that enemy which was each moment getting the best of his -efforts. - -He stumbled and fell to his knees, but he was up again in an instant and -hurrying before the wind; again he fell, and this time his huge body lay -flat on its side, but he had held Enola aloof and she had been only -slightly jarred. A groan escaped the noble beast as he tried to regain -his feet. “Brave Gip!” said Enola, as she patted him on the trunk. “Once -more, Gip, just once more, my noble friend, and we may yet escape.” Gip -made a supreme effort, and regained his feet. The thought now occurred -to Enola that if she could guide the elephant out of this current of -wind which was hurrying them on to destruction, they might yet be saved. -She had seen the attendants touch the elephants on the right or left -side of the head when wanting them to move in either direction, and she -determined to try it. Reaching her hand out as far as she could, she was -just able to touch the right ear of the elephant. - -She struck this with her open hand, saying, “Try it, Gip, good Gip,” and -Gip, with strength nearly gone, turned as much to the right as possible, -and beating against the strong wind, hurried on as fast as his weakened -condition would allow him. In thus beating against the storm in an -oblique direction, it brought them in a direct line with the flying -debris, and Enola began to be bruised by the sticks and small stones -which filled the air. She could hardly breathe either, for the dust and -dirt which were swept up by the swirling current. She tried to protect -her face with her hands, but these were soon raw and bleeding with the -sand blast. Her eyes were filled with dirt, and her throat was dry and -parched with the inhalation of the dirt-filled atmosphere. - -She was suffering fearful agonies, and her suffering was growing worse -every moment; she tried to hold her face closer to the elephant’s back, -but she was too weak now to make any exertion at all. On the great, -brave beast moved, his body swaying with the wind, and each minute -looking as if he must give up the struggle. Now the fury of the storm -seemed to have grown worse, and the next instant it seemed to be -abating. This would give hope to the suffering girl and to the animal, -and a moment’s breathing space in which they could recuperate slightly -and prepare for a renewed effort. - -It was just after one of these momentary spells of comparative quiet, -that Gip, reeling and almost falling, had tried to pull himself together -for another trial. His massive body seemed almost rigid as he stopped -for a moment and braced himself; he half released his hold on Enola, and -she, almost exhausted, felt that the grand fortitude of the animal and -his sublime strength had given way, and that hope was indeed gone. But -no; Gip shook all over; and, his nerves again relieved, made a last -effort to go on. Painfully he strode on, never for a moment leaving the -course which Enola had started him on. - -The air seemed to grow thicker with sand and dust, while above them and -all about them were flying logs, trees and stones. Enola was bruised and -bleeding and she was on the point of fainting, when she opened her eyes -for a moment, and just in time to see a huge tree fly through the air, -and strike Gip fairly on the side of the head. Down he went like a shot, -carrying Enola with him, but still holding her in his trunk. He had made -a brave fight and lost. - - - - - CHAPTER XV. - IN THE TRACK OF THE STORM. - - -Sedai, who had been such a prominent figure in the first part of the -journey, and who had played such a part in the real cause of the -expedition, had not been forgotten since reaching the Land of On, but so -many new and strange things had come up to occupy the time and minds of -our friends, and so many attendants had been placed at their disposal, -Sedai had not been called upon to perform the many little duties to -which he had become accustomed, and he was left to enjoy himself much as -he saw fit. He had accompanied the party on the first part of the -journey, but the King wished to send word back to the city, of the -change in the programme and of their intention to proceed to the far end -of the country before their return, and Sedai had offered to carry the -message. Not that native messengers were wanting, but Sedai seemed to -find more enjoyment in the delightfully cool and comfortable city than -he did riding through the somewhat heated country. - -But he had been too long accustomed to the march, and the white -companions of the past few weeks had become too dear to him, to long -remain away from them; so after spending one day in the city, he -determined to start out and overtake the party. But now a strange thing -occurred. Far off in the west, just creeping up from the horizon, rose a -dark cloud, at first no larger than a zebra, but growing in size each -moment and fast approaching the city. It soon overcast half the heavens -and the entire populace was standing in the streets gazing at this -wonder. The cloud had cut off the twilight completely and now, while it -was yet early, darkness was over all, a darkness which was appalling. -The populace exchanged looks of wonderment, but offered no explanation -of this strange freak of the elements. - -Sedai, who had long been accustomed to seeing these fearful electric and -wind storms, was surprised to see the wonderment in the faces of these -people. Turning to one who was near him, he said: - -“Why do you gaze at the heavens in that way; have you never before seen -a storm?” - -“Many of them,” answered the man, “but never at this time of the year, -and never at any time as fierce a one as this promises to be.” - -“It does indeed look very threatening,” said Sedai. - -The night grew even darker, and then the lightning broke through the -black clouds for a moment illuminating the beautiful city which the -inhabitants had for the first time in their lives, failed to lighten. -The thunder rolled up from the west, making a deafening roar, and still -the people stood gazing, so overpowered were they by this strange event. -And now the fitful gusts of wind reached them, and then a few drops of -rain fell; and listen: what is that fearful sound. It is not thunder, -for the thunder is roaring peal on peal and cannot be mistaken. This is -something else. It can be heard only when the thunder rests for a -moment. And it is growing nearer, and a little longer and it seems to be -almost on them. - -Like a flash it comes to Sedai. - -“It is the simoon,” he cries, in such an alarmed voice that all look at -him in surprise. Again he called out, “the simoon.” And now the natives -all crowded around asking him what he meant. He had not learned the -language sufficiently to make them understand by words, but by making -signs he explained to them how the great winds sweep over the earth, -leveling houses, trees and all else to the ground. Even then they showed -no signs of fear. But one of them happened to remember the King, and -that he, with the strange guests, was somewhere in the country, over -which the storm was now approaching. - -“The King,” the man cried, and then, the others catching his meaning, -and realizing the King’s danger, the cry of “the King” rose high above -the roar of the storm. - -Sedai grasped the situation at once and knew that the King and his -friends must be in imminent peril. The storm had come up just at that -hour of the evening when the party, having rested during the heat of the -day, might be expected to be on the road. If this was true and they were -near no villa at the time, they must have fallen victims to the storm. -But the populace was also fully aroused now, and already men were -appearing in the streets astride of zebras, waiting only for others to -congregate when they would hurry on to the rescue of the King and his -party, if it was not already too late. - -Sedai also brought out his zebra and joining the party, they started for -the shore of the lake, knowing that somewhere near this would be found -the King and his party. They started down the Avenue of On with the hope -of reaching the King and his friends in time to help them, but the air -was now becoming thick with sand and even sticks and stones, and the -rescuing party were riding right in the face of this merciless -hurricane. The zebras held their heads far down and moved on -determinedly. Their riders lay close to their necks, endeavoring in this -way to protect their faces. But it grew worse. The zebras, now -thoroughly blinded, stumbled on, making heroic efforts to keep up the -uneven struggle, but their pace was growing slower and slower and there -seemed to be no chance for their getting much further. Suddenly Sedai’s -zebra turned to the right and left the avenue, the others followed. The -party dared not open their eyes to see where the zebras were taking -them, but after a little while noticing a cessation of the pitiless rain -of sand and gravel, they opened their eyes as well as they could, and -found that the animals had left the road and had sought shelter from the -fearful storm near one of the farm villas. They had stopped under the -east wall which protected them to some extent. - -The men hurriedly dismounted and led the zebras to the large stable in -the rear. All realized that it was useless to try to proceed further in -the pitiless storm; it would only be death to do so, and they could not -help their friends if they were in such a condition as the storm -promised to put them in if they continued. Another hour of that fearful -onslaught of gravel and sand, and small sticks and twigs, and every man -would be dead. So they determined to wait until the storm would abate, -when they would hurry on and give assistance to their friends, if it was -not forever too late. - -The inky blackness of the night, lit up only occasionally by the -lightning, the fearful peals of thunder, the roaring of the storm as it -rushed madly on, made the night one never to be forgotten. It must have -been several hours past midnight before it abated in the least, and -after it had once spent its wild fury it died quickly, and in a very -short time it was perfectly calm. - -Sounds of wounded and distressed animals could now be heard, pitiful in -their mournful cries; trees could still be heard falling, and the -night-birds which had escaped the fury of the storm, again took up their -flight, giving out most dismal screeches. But the storm had passed, and -Sedai and his party were again moving slowly along the avenue, for the -night was still dark and many fallen trees now covered this beautiful -highway. - -So hurrying was out of the question, but the zebras, who had had their -eyes washed out in the stable, and keen-sighted and sure-footed now, -they went along at a good pace, considering the condition of the road. -But it was so dark, and they had now proceeded far enough on their -journey to expect to meet couriers from the King and party, if there -were any left to tell the tale. Torches had been procured at the villa -at which they had sought shelter, and lighting these, they carried them -high above their heads with good effect. The lights threw weird shadows -along the avenue as they picked their way through the debris. The storm -seemed not to have touched the avenue or the grand trees bordering it, -but had taken a course parallel to this, the outer edge of which had -come very close to the southern border of the avenue. It was not, then, -the avenue shade trees which occasionally lay across it, but the forest -trees which covered the fields on each side. So close, however, had the -tornado or cyclone come to the avenue, that some of the branches of its -bordering trees had been cut off as with a knife. - -Occasionally, in the glare of the torches, a wounded or dead animal -would be seen. In one instance, a deer had been killed by a falling -tree, and its mate, which had probably been with it at the time, now lay -beside its dead licking the eyes and face. Again, a zebra had been torn -and lacerated by the fierceness of the storm, and as it saw the lights -and the familiar forms of the zebra in the cavalcade, it made a painful -effort to rise and follow. Sedai seeing its suffering, dismounted and -killed the poor beast, thus putting it out of its misery. The onyx -pavement was covered with dead and wounded birds, the storm having -played greater havoc among the winged inhabitants, than among any of the -other. - -At last faint streaks of dawn lighted up the eastern heaven, and -gradually it grew lighter, until the great hot sun burst forth, its rays -disclosing a scene of fearful devastation. But our friends had but -little time to notice all of this. They were looking for the wounded or -dead bodies of the King and his party. But look as they might, they -could not see either a wounded or dead zebra or elephant, in this part -of the avenue. This was probably because these animals had stables, into -which they could run if they chose, and as all the buildings were of -onyx, and built to stand for centuries, the storm’s violence had no -effect on them. - -The rescuing party’s progress had necessarily been slow, for they were -not only hindered by fallen trees and other debris which strewed the -avenue, but a great deal of time had been taken up in looking over the -ground carefully, they fearing that if they did not do this, they might -pass some of their wounded friends. They had now reached the lake, and -the numerous inlets, or bays, which stretched into the mainland for a -short distance, showed, from the appearance of their banks, that they -had also received harsh treatment by the storm. Near one of these, lay, -with its body half twisted in two, one of the sea monsters which had -been sucked from the stream and hurled against a neighboring tree. Many -fishermen’s boats were strewn along the banks smashed to splinters. The -villa in which the King and party had spent the night of prayer, was -visited by the rescuers, but the bewildered attendants here could only -say that the King and his party had left the morning before, and had not -again returned. Then Sedai, and those with him, after exchanging their -poor, tired zebras for fresh ones, and after a hasty meal, pushed on. -They might reasonably suppose that the party had reached a point at -least twenty miles farther to the northwest before the storm broke in -its fury; but it might have been that they saw the storm approaching -even before those in the city did, and fearing serious consequences had -turned back. In this case the rescuers might expect to meet them at any -time now and especial care was taken to look behind each fallen tree or -pile of debris. - -An elephant had been taken along from the last villa in hopes that he -might be able to sooner detect their near approach to any of his -companions used by Onrai and his party. These animals are very sagacious -and their senses are very acute, they being able to hear the slightest -noise or see the most minute object, while their scent is only equaled -by a bloodhound. - -Carefully this great beast picked his way, stepping gingerly over the -fallen trees and testing each bridge with his fore legs before venturing -to cross it. The distance between the villa and where our friends might -expect to be found, if safe, was now half covered and the rescuers had -gained heart with each step forward, for if those whom they were seeking -were not found within the next few miles, they would know that they were -safe. Suddenly the elephant stopped, and sniffing the air gave a sharp, -quick cry. Looking to the left the party saw the huge body of an -elephant, and beside it that of a woman. - - - - - CHAPTER XVI. - ENOLA FOUND. - - -Onrai had seen Enola slip and fall, and then carried away from him, with -the greatest anguish. He stood for a moment gazing at the retreating -figure, and saw the noble elephant grasp her. He now thought her safe -and started toward her, but the storm caught him in its folds and he was -also being hurried before it. But the attendants had been watching him -and Enola from the entrance, and seeing him hurried on by the storm, -they formed a line by clasping hands, and throwing this human barrier -across the terrace they prevented the King from being blown further by -the storm, and before he could realize it, he was hurried into the villa -and was standing among his friends and attendants. The action had been -so quick that he was at first bewildered, but the truth having suddenly -dawned upon him, he made a rush for the door. - -“Back, man,” said Mr. Bruce, throwing himself across his path. “What -would you do? Do you not know that it is sure death to venture forth in -this storm?” - -Onrai stopped and looked at Mr. Bruce almost scornfully, then said: - -“And would you let Enola perish?” - -“No, not if the giving of my life would save hers,” said Mr. Bruce, “but -to throw myself into that howling vortex, would mean instant death, and -in no way could I help Enola. We must wait until the storm abates and -then look for our friend. She has the protection of the only living -thing which can help her now, her good friend, Gip. God grant that his -powerful strength may prove mightier than the power of the storm,” and -as he finished speaking, Mr. Bruce raised his hand to his eye and -brushed away a tear. - -Onrai turned away and paced the long hall like a caged lion, his hands -crossed behind his back, and his body slightly bent forward, as if ready -to spring through the open entrance and run, as soon as the elements -would permit. Harry, who was also crazed with pain because of the fate -of Enola, was also on the alert to give Onrai a race in his rush to -rescue his friend. - -The storm grew fiercer each moment and the noise more fearful. Mr. -Graham stepped up to Mr. Bruce and with a white face, said, “No human -being could possibly live in that storm; it is fearful.” - -“Yes, the most terrible I have ever seen,” said Mr. Bruce. “But let us -hope that in some way Enola has reached safety.” - -“If I could only hope; but I cannot, that storm would kill every hope,” -said Mr. Graham. - -“Enola was not in the heart of the storm,” said Mr. Bruce. “She was not -carried into the centre of that seething, swirling tornado. She was only -in the outer edge, and maybe the elephant was sagacious enough to work -its way out of danger. Let us hope so at least.” - -But hope seemed futile when they looked into that fearful on-rushing -storm. - -“Look,” said Mr. Bruce. They all turn toward the door. The elephants had -gathered beneath the trees in one corner of the garden, and here, -bunched together they had resisted the storm, but as Mr. Bruce spoke, -the storm had reached the height of its fury, and the elephants no -longer being able to withstand its power had been blown forward, some of -them falling and the others tumbling over them. Those that were able to -keep their feet had been rushed forward with such force, that in -striking the trees they were crushed and badly wounded; those that were -left prone on the ground were rolling over and over in their efforts to -regain their feet, the wind blowing them over again before they could -stand erect. - -Most of the zebras had run to the stables when they actually realized -their danger, but others, which had remained to graze the fresh grass -until too late, had been drawn into the circling, whirling mass and -hurried on. - -Onrai was still pacing the floor, almost crazed with the thought that -Enola was in fearful peril and he unable to help her. Frequently he -would walk to the door and clasping his hands, cry in an agonized voice: -“Will it never cease?” It was now three hours after midnight and the -fierce winds had slackened, and the storm seemed broken. All were -watching it now with an eager look, praying for its speedy death. The -attendants went into the stables, and in a little while brought zebras -to the terrace, and Onrai with his guests and twenty attendants started -in search of Enola. But the night was still very dark and the torches -helped them but little. Every foot of ground was gone over carefully. -They did not keep in the avenue, but to the right, or in a direct line -with that taken by Gip as he left the garden. - -Several elephants were lying about the garden or in the surrounding -fields, dead or too badly disabled to work. In the clear light of day -Gip could have been easily distinguished from any of these, but in the -darkness all looked alike, and each prostrate form was examined -carefully, and in some cases ropes were thrown about the legs and the -elephant turned over, the party thinking that Enola might possibly be -lying crushed beneath it. But none of these proved to be Gip, and the -party moved slowly on. - -“I feel hopeful that the elephant with Enola has escaped,” said Mr. -Bruce to Onrai, as they rode along. - -“Oh, I hope so,” answered Onrai, “but it was fearful,” and he shuddered. - -“But tell me, Onrai, when you have such storms as these, are many of -your people killed?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“We have never before had such a storm, never during my life. We have -some storms in this season, but never like this, and death has never -resulted. The death and ruin which I have seen to-night appalls me. -Never before have I, or any of my race, I believe, experienced such -sensations as these fearful sights bring forth. I cannot understand why -this should be. That it is a visitation of our God, I know; but why? -That the punishment is just I cannot doubt; but for what is this -punishment? I or my people have sinned, but I know not what this sin is, -unless——” and Onrai’s face turned ghastly pale in the glare of the -torches. - -“Unless what, Onrai?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“Unless it be in a way of which I cannot tell you,” said Onrai, “or, -unless my people have failed, in my absence, to carry out certain rites -preparatory to the Day of Resis, which must not be neglected.” - -Mr. Bruce looked at him for a moment with the intention of asking him -something further regarding this strange day, but something kept him -from doing so. - -The dawn was breaking and it seemed that these hours had been spent in a -fruitless search. But so careful had been the search, that all felt -assured that Enola had not been passed. They had covered but few miles, -but in this space the whole width of the storm’s track had been -carefully looked over. - -“I cannot see how the elephant could have held out sufficiently long to -reach this distance,” said Mr. Graham to Mr. Bruce, “and I think that it -is convincing proof, that the beast beat his way out of the trail of the -storm and took a circuitous route back to the villa.” - -“If that was so,” answered Mr. Bruce, “he should have reached the villa -before we departed, or else we would have met him on the way.” - -“No, I think that we will yet find both the elephant and Enola safe,” -said Harry, who then joined them, but probably too exhausted to return, -and awaiting assistance. “See there,” and as he spoke all looked in the -direction of the avenue and saw a party of natives, headed by Sedai, -approaching. - -“They are coming towards us,” said Onrai. “Let us meet them.” - -They started towards the approaching party, Onrai in the lead. He turned -his zebra to one side to go around a pile of debris, when, upon reaching -the far side of this, he pulled up his zebra so quickly, that it nearly -dismounted him. His eyes were bulging from their sockets and a groan -left his lips; he seemed paralyzed, so rigid had he grown. The rest of -the party had now come up, and also Sedai and his followers, and all -looked in the direction in which was Onrai, and there, half hidden by -the debris and great body of the elephant, lay Enola, her robe almost -torn from her body and her face and hands black and bleeding. - - - - - CHAPTER XVII. - “SHE IS MAD.” - - -As both parties met and looked down on the bruised and blackened face of -Enola, a cry of horror went up from each one of them. Hope had still had -life as long as there was any uncertainty, but now it had met its death. - -“Look,” said Harry, “the elephant is not dead. See, he is trying to move -his head.” - -Hurriedly the party dismounted, and Onrai lifted Enola carefully in his -arms. She had fallen across Gip’s outstretched trunk when the crash -came, and here she now laid. When Onrai lifted her up, Gip tried to -raise his head, but this he could not do. The whole side of it was -crushed in, or the lower part of it was, and he looked up with pitiful -eyes, begging help from the party bending over him. - -Onrai still had Enola in his arms when Mr. Bruce came up and said: - -“Lay her down on the grass, Onrai, until I can make an examination. -Quick, she may yet be living; the elephant is.” - -Carefully Onrai laid her on the grass, holding her head in his lap. Mr. -Bruce bent down, and placing his ear to her heart, said: - -“She yet lives. Quick, bring me a flask of brandy.” A flask was handed -him, and placing this to the lips of Enola, poured a few drops down her -throat. “Bring some water,” he again commanded, and this having been -handed him, he bathed her bruised face and hands with it. She was badly -lacerated, the cuts not being deep, but so many of them that an inch of -whole skin could scarcely be found. - -Harry looked as long as he could, but finally walked away; the sight of -his loved one in this condition crazing him. - -But for the faint beating of the heart, all would have pronounced her -dead, for it could scarcely be hoped that one so terribly cut and -bruised could survive. Even the body had not been spared, and great -blotches of flesh had been torn from it by contact with the flying -debris. - -“Is there hope?” almost whispered Onrai. - -“I cannot say,” said Mr. Bruce. “But if blood-poisoning does not set in, -I should think, with her splendid constitution, she might get well. But -she has laid here for hours exposed, and it is greatly against her -chances for recovery. She must be taken where women attendants can help -her, and that immediately.” And Mr. Bruce had to again place his ear -over the region of the heart in order to tell whether she was yet alive. - -“See, she opens her eyes,” said Harry, as he again comes up. - -Yes, it was true, she had opened her eyes, but only for an instant, and -then closed them again. - -“Enola, look; do you not know us?” said Harry, as he bent over her. - -Her eyes again opened, and she tried to part her parched and bleeding -lips, but she had not yet the strength. - -“There may be some hope now, I think,” said Mr. Bruce. - -Hurriedly a litter was made from the blanket taken from the elephant, -and with one of her friends at each corner of this, Enola was carried to -the nearest villa. This was not far away, and, when reached, attendants -were found in waiting, and Enola being carried to one of the large, cool -and comfortable apartments, she was soon under the care of female -attendants. Carefully they bathed the bruised and bleeding body, and -under Mr. Bruce’s orders they anointed and bandaged the cuts. Finally, -after long and hard work, and after hope of resuscitating her was nearly -lost, she opened her eyes. - -Mr. Bruce was standing at her side at the time, and seeing that she had -regained consciousness, and that danger for the time was passed, he -carried the glad news to the anxious ones waiting for his report. All -immediate anxiety being allayed they breathed freer. Onrai, who now felt -at liberty to return to the city, began to make preparations for so -doing, he feeling that at such a time his presence was greatly needed -among his people. Accordingly he took a few of his attendants, and after -making arrangements for hourly messengers to be sent him, giving full -account of Enola’s condition, he started. Just before leaving, Enola -opened her eyes, and after a moment, uttered the one word, “Gip.” - -It was perfectly natural that returning consciousness should bring to -memory the fearful experiences of the night before and of the brave -animal which had fought so nobly to protect, and save her life. In their -anxiety for Enola all thought of poor Gip had been forgotten, but when -she spoke his name and they knew that she was anxious about him, and -when they remembered all that he had done for her, they censured -themselves for having forgotten him for even a moment. - -Onrai gave orders to some of his people to go to the assistance of Gip, -and to do all in their power to relieve the noble beast, if yet alive. -Mr. Bruce, not being needed for the time in the sick-room, went with the -party as did also Sedai. The great animal heard them coming, and tried -to raise his shattered head, but could not. A slight movement of the -trunk was the only sign of life he could give. Mr. Bruce had not made a -study of the anatomy of the elephant, and he understood very little -about them, but he determined to do all he could for the animal. - -Gip had unfortunately fallen on his right side and it was necessary for -them to turn him over. This was no easy task; in fact it looked at first -as if this could not be accomplished; but Mr. Bruce quickly thought out -a plan which proved successful. Large ropes were tied to the legs of the -side on which the animal was lying, and by a long and hard pull he was -turned over onto the unbruised side. A groan, almost human in its -intensity, escaped the crushed beast, as he was pulled over but he -seemed to understand that his friends were there to help him. Mr. Bruce -commenced at once to examine his wounds. - -The lower side of the head had been crushed and the body for half its -length was lacerated. He had fallen on these wounds and the sand and -gravel which covered the ground had worked into the wounds and were now -held there by clotted blood. Water was brought from the lake and poured -into the wounds until cleansed of all dirt, and then soothing liniments -were poured into them. Gip did not make a movement, the great -intelligent beast realizing that all this washing and anointing was -being done to help him. It was a question as to how they were going to -bandage the huge body, and after careful consideration this was deemed -impossible until he could stand, as they could not carry the bandage -about the body otherwise. The head, however, was lifted by the exertions -of a dozen of the attendants and great, white silk bandages were carried -around the monstrous hulk. Pails of water were now brought and he drew -in great draughts with his trunk. Food was also brought where he could -reach it. Everything that could possibly be done for his comfort was -done, and two men were left to watch over the animal until evening, when -he was to be again bandaged, and, if possible, gotten on his feet and -taken to the villa. - -Mr. Bruce now hurried back to the villa. He had been gone for some time -and he feared that Enola might need his attention. He had considerable -misgiving regarding her speedy recovery, or even her recovery at all, -for she had been fearfully bruised and cut, and had been so long exposed -afterward, that there was great fear of blood-poisoning setting in. He -realized what this wonderful woman had undergone in these few short -hours, and he doubted if another could have passed through such an -ordeal and lived. But Enola had a perfectly healthy constitution and Mr. -Bruce had a faint hope that this intrepid girl might pull through. - -As he entered the villa, Nellie, who had been sent for, met him in the -hall, and to his look of inquiry, said, - -“She has awakened but her mind is gone; she is mad.” - - - - - CHAPTER XVIII. - ONRAI VISITS THE PRIEST. - - -Onrai hurried on to the city. At frequent intervals on his journey he -met couriers from the city, all hurrying to give him the details of new -discoveries of the storm’s devastation. The track of the tempest, as he -now followed it, so shortly after its fearful advent, showed ruin and -death everywhere. But so far no loss of human life had been reported and -the King felt more than thankful for this. As the inhabitants would meet -the King, they would look at him in the same wondering way as they had -at the storm the night before, they were evidently seeking an -explanation from their King, of the phenomenon. When they did ask him -why such ruin had overtaken them, he would invariably answer by saying -that there was sin among them. Then they would look one at the other as -if wondering, if it were he or she who was guilty. - -Arriving at the city, he found the populace awaiting him. On all -previous occasions when Onrai had been away from the city for a season, -upon his return the people had been glad to see him and had met him at -the city limits with harps and glad songs. But now they stood and looked -with no joy in their faces; but this was easy to account for. The people -had never before in their lives had one little thing to occur to disturb -the even tenor of their existence. Their lives were simply one long, -happy or perfectly contented existence, they knowing no pains or -sorrows. - -The seasons came and went, each occupying just so many months, never -varying greatly one from the other, for it was perpetual spring in this -delightful country. But at one season more rain fell than at another, -and for several months of each year rain never fell. Severe storms were -very infrequent and such storms as the one of the night previous had -never been known before. And this had happened right in the middle of -the dry season. It was not so much this latter fact probably which made -the people wonder, as it was the death and ruin which it left in its -wake. This the people could not understand, for life to them was a -sacred thing, even those animals of a meat-serving kind, never being -allowed to be killed wantonly, or where there was no use in the -slaughter. Why had the poor dumb beasts been killed in this way? There -was a world of inquiry in their looks as they stood perfectly still, and -saw the King pass. - -But Onrai heeded them not. He hurried on past the great square and up -the broad avenue to the Temple, where the head priest was awaiting him, -and as the King drew up, the priest approached him, saying, “You have -come, oh King. Throughout the night I have prayed for you and those with -you. You are safe, God be praised,” and taking Onrai by the hand he led -him into the Temple. - -“It was your prayers then which brought us to shelter before the storm -overtook us,” said the King. “But tell me, you who know all of the -sacred writings, what has caused this death-dealing and destroying -storm. I can only believe that our people are sinning. Tell me, do you -not think this so?” - -“I have made research, knowing that both you, King, and the people would -want to know the cause of the storm, and I too have wished to learn the -reason. I find among the sacred writings words admonishing us to do -right at all times and if laws were broken and the inhabitants of this -great Land of On treated lightly, the commands laid down for their good -and prosperity, they would be made to suffer in such ways as God would -devise. I also find that God will give warning to the good of coming -events. I do not know what to think, but I hardly believe that our good -people are sinning.” - -“Are there any motives which might make us break the laws?” asked the -King. - -“I think not,” answered the priest, and as he said this, he looked at -the King and was surprised to see his face so pale. “No, it must be a -warning,” he continued. - -“But what unusual event can come to our country?” asked Onrai. - -“Was not the storm of last night an unusual event?” asked the priest, -“and should this not be a sufficient warning to us to guard against all -such? I believe that naught else can come to the Land of On but the wars -of the elements, and if these visit us, it is God’s will and they -purpose some good.” - -“If it be God’s will, he must have some object in it,” said Onrai. “But -tell me, priest, did the Kings of On ever marry?” - -The question almost staggered the priest and he started back for the -moment unable to answer. But controlling himself he came forward and -looked Onrai straight in the eye, asking sternly, “Why do you ask? Do -you not know that it means death to the King who even contemplates -marriage? Were not the sacred teachings imparted to you when you were -yet young, and have these not been told you many times since and -expanded on, and explained? And does not the law say that the King shall -not marry? I cannot understand you, King.” - -Onrai’s face was puzzled as he looked at the priest as he spoke. - -“I hardly understand myself,” said the King. “I have indeed read the -great laws and have heard them read since my earliest childhood, and I -know that the King cannot marry and that there are great and good -reasons given for his not marrying. But God forgive me if I have thought -for one moment that this law was unjust. I am King, chosen by the people -because of my physical attainments and stature. I am strong, powerful; -through my veins courses the blood of endless generations of perfect -manhood; every nerve, every tissue, every muscle tingles with life; I -have been trained until my naturally healthy sinews are as hard as the -black metal which we dig out of the foothill of the cliffs; my whole -being vibrates with health and vitality and for these reasons I am -chosen King and denied a wife; I of all men who should be granted a -mate,” and as he ceased speaking he strode up and down the Temple, his -powerful form shaking like an aspen; his breath came quick and short; -his hands opened and shut nervously. - -The priest looked at him in wonderment and seemed at a loss to know how -to answer him. But he must say something to this rash man, this ruler of -the people, who was supposed to be pure, to be sinless. If others should -hear him talk in this mad way the consequences might be fearful. He -stepped in front of the King as he came near him and said, “Onrai, are -you not mad? Do you not realize the consequences of such ravings? Do you -not know that death awaits you if you give up to such sinful thoughts? -Oh, Onrai, King, brother, great and good, strong and beautiful, drive -these fearful thoughts from your mind; smother these emotions, which can -only lead you to destruction. Remember that endless line of ancestors of -whom you speak, and let not an act of yours disgrace their memory or -make sorrowful the people who chose you for their King. Tell me, oh my -brother, what it is which has wrought this great change in you,” and -then, seeming to remember the strangers, he clutched Onrai’s arm -nervously and said, “Tell me, is it they?” - -“Of whom do you speak,” asked the King. - -“Of the strangers,” answered the priest. - -“Why should you suspicion our guests,” asked Onrai. “Is it just to them, -who for the time may expect only the kindest treatment from us? I do not -like this,” but as he spoke, his heart smote him for being the first to -suspicion the good motives of the strangers. - -“Forgive me, King,” said the priest. “I had but your interest at heart -and thought only of you when I spoke; but I could not suspicion you of -fostering such thoughts unless encouraged by some one. And I could not -suspicion any of our people, for they have too great a reverence for our -holy laws to ever speak on such subjects. Then, who could I think of but -they of the fair skin? But I was wrong, forgive me.” - -“No, it has been nature itself, this strong vital power which permeates -my being, which has prompted the thoughts. I cannot be held responsible -for these thoughts, but only for nurturing them, and allowing them to -influence me in doing wrong. It has not reached this point yet and it -never shall. If I am weak in the body I am strong here,” and Onrai -tapped his forehead. - -“Now, you are the Onrai I have known since a boy,” said the priest. “But -Onrai be careful; guard against temptation, as our sacred writing -commands us to do. Come to me and tell me if you are again tempted; I -have never had such thoughts as yours and I can better counsel and -advise you. And if others should hear you vent such thoughts, the whole -populace would soon know it and the end would be death. Let me again -admonish you, my King, to fortify your mind against such temptations. If -certain ones create such thoughts, go not near them,” and the priest, -with this advice, left him. - -Onrai walked down the main hall of the Temple, his mind trying to throw -from it the gloomy thoughts which the priest’s negative assertion had -raised. So the hope, which sprung into being when he saw Enola’s -innocence, could not be cherished; the fulfilment of it could never be -realized. The thought was maddening and Onrai groaned aloud in his -fearful agony. - -“God help me in this struggle,” he cried, “is it sin, can it be sin, -this longing to be like other men, be allowed to take unto myself a -wife? I cannot believe that it is, but the law says “No,” and I, with -every impulse fighting against it, must comply.” - -He now left the Temple and walked down the broad avenue. Word had gone -forth that the King would speak at the large open square, and crowds who -had seen the King come to the city had now, with their friends gathered -and were waiting with those same wonder-depicting countenances, for the -King to come and tell them why the strange storm had come and ruined the -Land of On. Walking straight to the fountain, Onrai mounted the dais and -glancing about him for a moment at the hushed, bewildered Onians, said: - -“It has pleased our great God to give us a warning; this warning -admonishes us to be careful, watchful and diligent. If any among you -have sinned or are sinning, this fearful storm tells you to turn from -the evil of your ways; if you have intentions of sinning, it speaks to -you a warning, but I cannot believe that my people are sinning. I look -among you to-day and see not one guilty face. You are bewildered, in -wonderment, but this is not guilt. It can be a warning to us of some -disastrous event which may visit our fair land. It may be that it will -all be revealed to us later, but let us not be worried, but obeying the -laws, go on in our happy way. The fearful storm has caused no loss of -life of our people, and we may believe from this that God was not angry -with us. Let us be watchful of coming harm, but let us not live in -dread, for such will destroy happiness. The storm has left a vast track -of ruin behind it, but ruin easily righted. We must, for the time, give -up all other occupations and repair the damage done by the storm. Only -let the food be furnished and the city kept clean. All traces of the -devastation will soon be gone and we will forget, or it will only be a -memory to us after a short time. Our guests from the far-away planet -escaped injury, all but one and that one was the fair and sweet Enola, -who is so much loved by you all. But I left her better and she will -recover, for God would not take one of our guests, and leave our people -unharmed.” - -As if in denial of Onrai’s words, a messenger stepped to the edge of the -crowd and waved a piece of papyrus over his head. Onrai saw him at once -and raising his hand, said: - -“A courier has just arrived from the villa in which lies the fair Enola. -I must hasten to this villa as these people are our guests, and I should -be with them. Again I pray of you, be watchful, and keeping from sin, be -happy and contented as in the past.” - -Onrai ceased speaking and descending to the pavement took the message -from the courier. It read as follows: - -“Enola lives, but her reason is dead.” His face turned ashen and he -jumped on to the zebra held for him by an attendant, and dashed off -madly down the avenue. The populace watched his retreating figure in -still greater wonderment, and the attendants who followed him were soon -left far in the rear, as the zebra which he rode was fleeter than any -other in the land. On the King rode, each moment urging the zebra to -greater efforts, each moment shortening the distance between Enola and -himself. The avenue had been almost cleared of fallen trees by the large -body of men who had immediately gone to work after the storm, and Onrai -hardly met with any obstructions in his mad rush. It was growing dark -now and Onrai had ridden nearly fifty miles that day, but he showed no -fatigue as he bent well over the zebra’s shoulders and urged it on. He -had but one thought, an excruciating one: “Enola was mad.” The agony of -that thought. She would no longer look at him with those beautiful eyes -or speak to him in those charming accents, or smile on him with those -lips which seemed only made to kiss. Mad, mad, mad; the word rang in his -ears, the zebra’s hoofs seemed to pound it out of the flinty pavement, -the birds in the air were screeching it; everything seemed to be telling -him the fearful story. On, on he rushed with unabated speed, the zebra -reeking with sweat and panting as if it would drop each moment, its eyes -bulged and glaring, until, pulling up in front of the villa, and Onrai -jumping from its back, the beast falls dead. - - - - - CHAPTER XIX. - ONRAI CONFESSES HIS LOVE. - - -Yes, it was only too true. The sufferings of that mad ride before the -storm and the long exposure had unbalanced Enola’s reason. As Mr. Bruce -entered the apartment after visiting Gip he found two women attendants -struggling with her trying to prevent her leaving the couch, while Mrs. -Graham was standing near trying to reason with her. But there was no -longer any reason in Enola. She had awakened to oblivion, her mind -groveling in darkness. - -Mr. Bruce walked up, and looking at Enola closely, saw that she was in a -high fever; feeling her pulse he knew that she was in a very dangerous -condition. His troubled look told the story to Mrs. Graham and Nellie as -they stood watching him anxiously. He sent for the small medicine chest -which they had brought with them from the States, and which they had -thought to place with the equipments when starting on this excursion. -From this he took medicines that would allay the fever, first giving -Enola a quieting powder. This had to be forced down her throat as she -closed her teeth tightly and refused to take anything. It soon had its -effect and as her muscles relaxed and bruised limbs became quiet, Mr. -Bruce could better diagnose the disease. - -After a careful examination he came to the conclusion that she was -suffering more from a nervous fever than anything else, caused by the -fearful suspense, suffering and exposure of the night before. - -“Is there any hope for her?” asked Harry, who had come into the -apartment. - -“I cannot say,” said Mr. Bruce, “but we will hope until the disease has -run its course and the change comes.” - -“But of her reason,” questioned Harry. “If she lives, will her mind -always be clouded?” and Harry’s look of agony was fearful. - -“That I cannot say, for unfortunately, I am not an expert in mind -diseases,” answered Mr. Bruce. “It may be though only the ravings of a -fever-racked brain, and when this has passed she may regain her reason.” - -“God grant that this may be true,” said Harry. - -Mr. Bruce was a great advocate of ice in cases of fever and he had at -once ordered a liberal use of this. Fortunately Mrs. Graham and Nellie -were with Enola, for they had both had experience as nurses and knew -just what to do, and then their love for her would insure her the very -best of treatment. - -The day rolled by and Enola had not yet come out of the long sleep into -which the morphine had thrown her. Harry had strolled up and down before -the door of the sick chamber, stopping occasionally to listen, hoping to -hear signs of returning consciousness from within. But all had remained -quiet and Harry had kept up the vigil from without. He had suffered -fearfully in those few short hours since Enola, snatched by the storm, -had been carried away, giving her up only after it had destroyed the -greatest gift of God—reason. It seemed an age to him, these few short -hours and the suffering had grown more intense as the day advanced, and -the possibilities of returning life and reason grew less. Harry was not -one to say much or to carry his heart on his sleeve, but his love for -Enola was deep and sincere, and his suffering now fearful as a -consequence. He had seen Enola’s growing friendliness or infatuation for -the King and this had wounded him terribly. Still he had so much faith -in her that he could not doubt but that she would be perfectly true to -herself in the matter, and if, in the meantime she should learn to love -Onrai, she would tell him candidly. - -But the thought was torturing, the very possibility of his losing her -after these long years. The barbarous grandeur, so it might be called, -of the King and his people, was enough to turn the head of any woman or -man, for that matter, and he could not blame Enola if she should turn -from him to the King. Yet there was something about these people which -could not be understood, a certain mystery unsolved and unsolving; they -had now been among them several weeks, and had been let into all their -mode of life, their customs, habits, and nothing, seemingly, had been -kept from them; but there had been mentioned a certain day, the Day of -Resis, over which there hung a cloud. This had only been mentioned -unguardedly, and there seemed to be a secret connected with it, which -was not to be divulged to the vulgar ears of the strangers. Harry had -hopes that the uncertainty of this mystery would guard Enola from -allowing herself to form an alliance with the King, an alliance which -might make life a hell ever afterwards. - -Harry was not superstitious, but there was a certain dread of the future -with these people; a sort of premonition of coming evil; that before -long this pleasant life would end, and a something would occur which -would make the party forever regret the day they entered this strange -country. These thoughts might have been occasioned by the fear that -Enola was being infatuated by the subtle influence of the King; an -influence, which he, Harry, thought lay in the mystery overhanging the -entire race. But when Enola would once come to believe as he did, that -there was a future life with these people, which was the very reverse to -the one they were now enjoying, she would at once turn a deaf ear to the -love-making of Onrai. But had he made love to her? Harry could not make -himself believe that Enola would allow this from one whom she had known -but such a short while; and then Onrai, when Harry came to think of him, -was such a great, powerful man, so straightforward and free from all -deceit, so brave and strong; he looked a lover, and yet he did not know. -One thing Harry was assured of: Onrai did not make love to Enola with -those simple nothings which make up the wooings of modern lovers in -civilized countries. And it might be the total absence of these idiotic -expressions which won her friendship and esteem, and finally, love. It -might be the grand physique and strength of the man which attracted her. -But at any rate, Harry would not relinquish all hope of yet winning -Enola, and when he thought of that mysterious something which threw a -sort of shroud over the future of these people, he felt almost confident -that Enola would not allow herself to become entirely infatuated, or, as -it has been said, allianced with this King. - -But now this slender hope had been shattered. Enola lay at death’s door -physically and mentally, with but slight hopes of regaining bodily -health, and less of her ever regaining her reason. For the first time -Harry regretted their ever having started on this hazardous journey, but -when he thought of the determination of Enola, and realized that she -would have come at any rate whether he had or not, he felt glad at least -that he was now here to help her. He must be resigned and await the -future. But this was easier said than done, especially when the one -great loved one was lying at death’s door. Again he stopped and -listened, and hearing no sound, walked to the entrance, and looking out -saw Onrai dash madly up on his winded charger and dismount. Onrai almost -stumbled over Harry as he hurried through the entrance. Looking up -almost angrily, he was about to make some passionate remark, when, -seeing that it was Harry, he grasped him by the shoulders, and said, -hoarsely: - -“Tell me quickly, how is she?” - -“The same,” answered Harry. “Still mad, and no hope.” - -“It is fearful!” cried Onrai, as he dropped his hands from Harry’s -shoulders and commenced pacing the floor. - -Harry watched the suffering of this strong man, and for a time, almost -gloated over the thought of this rival’s agony. But why should he feel -this way? Had not Onrai been open and above board with him, and did he, -Onrai, ever suspect that he had a rival in himself? So if they were to -be rivals, let it be an open and square fight, and not for a moment -harbor such miserable jealous thoughts. Going up to Onrai, he said: - -“Tell me, King, why do you take such an interest in us—in Enola? We are -your guests, certainly, but your interest in us is even greater than we -might expect from you, our host.” - -“I cannot answer you,” said Onrai, “further than as you have suggested, -it is because you are my guests. You come to us strangers; you knew not -what to expect when you threw yourselves on our bounty, but you trusted -us, and for that reason you are deserving of every attention which we -can give you.” - -“But pardon me, Onrai,” said Harry, “if I ask you a pointed question. I -saw your fearful agitation as you witnessed Enola being borne away from -you last night in the teeth of the storm; I saw that you suffered far -more than if you had only a friendly interest in her; and I saw you -to-night when you came tearing up the driveway and then up the steps of -the terrace, the dead zebra testifying that you must have ridden like -mad: I see you now, your face pale, your eyes bloodshot, your whole -appearance displaying mental anguish. Have you not a personal interest -in Enola, and is not this interest prompted by a feeling deeper than -friendship?” - -Onrai now stood with his arms crossed over his breast, his bearing erect -and scornful, as if to give Harry the impression that he was accountable -to himself alone for his actions and did not recognize Harry’s right to -question him. He stood looking at Harry for some time after he had -finished speaking, as if debating with himself as to whether he would -answer him or not. But his just nature asserted itself, and he said: - -“Your question is a strange one, but I feel that you have some right to -ask it; for you have been Enola’s companion for years and must have a -brotherly regard or love for her. I cannot blame you, now that I -remember the difference in our lives, for this solicitation for her -future. But have not my attentions to Enola been honorable? Do you think -that I, the King of the Land of On, chosen by the people because they -knew that I was pure of mind, do you think that I could so far forget my -natural traits or early teachings, as to have any but the purest -thoughts of Enola, and do you not know that the Kings of On cannot -marry?” - -“So I have learned,” answered Harry, “but are you not still a man, and -as a man have you not human emotions and passions? Because you are a -chosen King, is the ruling passion, love, driven from your heart?” - -“No, I would to God that it was,” answered Onrai, and his face betrayed -his fearful agony of mind. “No, this passion is still ours, but -sufficient strength is given us to keep it in check. We must smother it -and cast it out. We must so interest ourselves in our people as to -forget all else.” - -“But can you do this?” asked Harry. “Is not love all-powerful? Even -among your people, who are supposed to keep it in check until after -marriage? You have lived, Onrai, thirty-five years; have you not in that -time felt the delightful sensations of love, and have you found it -possible to smother it?” - -“Yes, I have loved,” answered Onrai. “But it came over me like a dream -and was so subtle in its movements that I did not realize that it had -taken possession of me until a long time afterwards. But an unlooked for -event opened my eyes to my sin and the knowledge of it nearly crazed -me.” - -[Illustration: “No, I would to God that it was.”—_Page 154._] - -“Your sin?” asked Harry. “Do you consider it a sin when you did not -realize that it was love that had taken possession of you? I would not -call it by such a name.” - -“Still it was a sin,” said Onrai, “for I had allowed myself to be drawn -into its meshes without even making an effort to extricate myself. To -escape this tempter it is necessary that we guard against the influences -which lead to it, and I have not done this.” - -“But, King, could you, after your discovery, tear this love from your -breast and go on as if you had never experienced this grand emotion?” -questioned Harry again. - -“I must,” answered Onrai, “for it would be death for me to nurture it -and allow it to influence my life, which it would do if I did not kill -it. Still, the struggle will be terrible, and I know not how it will -end. It is too early now in the fight, perhaps, to expect great results, -but I almost doubt my strength to overcome its machinations. But I must -see her,” and Onrai hurried toward the door of Enola’s apartment, Mr. -Bruce having beckoned him to come. - - - - - CHAPTER XX. - THE AGONY OF ONRAI. - - -The day must have seemed interminable to the wounded elephant as he lay -on the hard, sand-covered earth. All that could be done for his comfort, -however, had been done; his wounds had been dressed again in the evening -and repeated efforts had been made to get him on his feet, but without -success. They had, though, gotten him on his haunches and he seemed -easier in this position. They had gone to the villa and procured ropes -and a sort of pulley, which they were now rigging to one of the trees -above Gip. They thought that by getting him on his feet he might be able -to walk to the villa stables, as the trouble all lay in the right -foreleg, which had been sprained by the log striking it. The block and -fall had been rigged and the rope worked under the immense body and -fastened in a loop; then two other elephants were hitched to the other -end of the rope and started. They moved slowly, and as the rope -tightened about Gip’s shoulders, he did all in his power to help regain -his feet. But his help was not needed for the two elephants lifted him -bodily until his forelegs were pulled from off the ground, his hind feet -alone touching; then he was lowered until the forelegs again touched the -ground, and after awhile, when he had become used to the weight, the -rope was taken from about his body and the other two elephants taking up -a position, one on either side of him, he was gently urged to take a -step forward. - -It was painful to see the effort he made to walk. His right foreleg was -stiff and he had to limp in a distressing manner. It took a long time to -reach the villa stables, where a soft bed had been made for him with a -sling rigged above, so that he could be raised or lowered as the -attendants saw fit. - -“I declare,” said Mr. Bruce, “it does me good to see the brave animal -housed. If it were not for him we would not now have even a small hope -of Enola again being with us, alive and well.” - -“It is a small hope, indeed,” said Mr. Graham. “But it is a hope, and -even that is better than knowing that the bruised and mangled body lay -buried under a pile of debris. Gip, you do not realize the full -significance of your brave act. It may mean health and happiness or it -may mean suffering and mental death. God forbid that it should be the -latter.” - -Mr. Graham and Mr. Bruce now turned and went into the house and direct -to Enola’s apartment. She lay still in that death-like sleep into which -she had fallen after taking the morphine. Mr. Bruce looked at her -anxiously, and stepping up to her couch, felt her pulse. - -“Her fever is abating,” he said, “and I can now say there may be some -hope of her recovery. When I first felt her pulse this morning it was -beating at the rate of 105; but the smallest rise in this and she could -not have survived,” and saying this, Mr. Bruce proceeded to rebandage -the swollen and inflamed face and limbs. Now that the fever was checked -he feared blood-poison, and especial precaution against this had to be -taken. As Mr. Bruce and the attendant unwound the old bandages, Enola -opened her eyes and looked about her in a half-dreamy way, but there was -no intelligence in that look; the eyes were dull and seemed to recognize -none of the friends about her; her lips parted and she again breathed -the word “Gip.” That was all. Everything else was forgotten, friends, -past, all was wrapped in darkness now. - -“The experiences of that night must have been terrible,” said Mr. -Graham, as he looked upon Enola with tearful eyes. - -“More terrible than we can even imagine,” said Mr. Bruce, “but the -strong constitution may bring her back to health and happiness again; I -feel more hopeful now.” - -Nellie, who was standing by one of the large curtained arches at the far -end of the room for a moment, breathing the fresh air from the garden, -exclaimed hurriedly: - -“Father, come quickly, it is Onrai dashing madly up the drive. Look, he -is now at the terrace. Oh! his poor zebra has dropped dead, and he -hurries up the steps. He looks wild, crazed by the experiences of the -past few hours.” - -“He will come directly to the apartment,” said Mr. Graham. “Mr. Bruce, -warn him back.” - -Mr. Bruce stepped into the wide corridor and motioned to Onrai to remain -where he was. Coming back into the room, he said: - -“Care must be taken when the King comes in, for he is not the Onrai we -have known for the past few weeks. One short night and day has changed -him wonderfully. He may, in his impetuosity, do something which will -injure our fair patient.” - -“How strange,” said Mrs. Graham, “that he should have changed so. Why, -only yesterday, as we rode along, happy and without a care, I thought to -myself that I had never seen a man so thoroughly free from all care and -trouble as Onrai.” - -“I think,” said Nellie, “that an explanation is easy enough to find.” - -“Then tell us, Nellie,” said her mother. - -“Why, he has fallen in love with Enola and the events of the past few -hours have crazed him. We do not wonder at ourselves for being buried in -grief at Enola’s sufferings, and it is but natural that Onrai should -feel the same.” - -“Don’t say that,” said Mrs. Graham. “It would grieve Harry deeply if he -suspected such a thing to be true.” - -“I doubt not that but Harry has seen the trend of things, for I have -watched him closely lately and he seems to be worried,” said Mr. Graham, -“but he would never admit it.” - -Enola had fallen into the stupor during this short conversation and this -was probably better so, for any violent movement would loosen the -bandages and open the wounds afresh, and this must be avoided. As she -lay partially on her side, a full view of her bandaged face could be -had; nothing but the eyes could be seen however, the remainder of the -face being entirely covered. She looked like one dead and with scarcely -a breath stirring the gauze over her nostrils, and with the white silk -robe falling about her, one could easily believe that she had succumbed -to the excruciating sufferings. Just at this moment Mr. Bruce stepped to -the arch and motioned Onrai to enter. - -“Be very quiet,” said Mr. Bruce, as the King came forward hurriedly. -Harry also came up quickly, and together they entered the apartment -where the dearest one on earth to them, lay at death’s door. - -Both stepped up to the couch, and as Onrai’s eyes fell on the white -bandages and saw only the discolored eyelids, he fell back exclaiming in -an agonized voice, “Dead;” then, almost beside himself with grief, he -rushed forward and falling beside the couch would have clasped her in -his arms had not Harry, who was also suffering untold agony, caught him -by the arm and held him back. Mr. Bruce also stepped up and said calmly; - -“Onrai, what would you do. Do you not realize that such an act on your -part would endanger her life? Calm yourself and do not ruin the small -chance which this poor girl has for recovery.” - -Onrai arose and stepped back slowly, his whole frame convulsed with -strong emotion. Drawing his hand over his eyes he said slowly. - -“She is not dead then, thank God. Forgive me, I should not have acted -thus for her sake and my own.” Then looking about him and seeing several -native women attendants in the apartment, his glance fell on the floor, -for the first time in his life ashamed of his own actions. - -Mr. Graham noticing the look of humiliation and guessing its cause, felt -for this strong man to the bottom of his heart, and taking his arm, -said; - -“No, Onrai, she is not dead; but come with me, I would talk with you.” - -Onrai, with his glance still resting on the floor, went out with Mr. -Graham. When they had reached the terrace, Mr. Graham said: - -“Onrai, I saw your suffering to-night, and, believe me, it touched my -heart. But do you realize what you are doing? Are you doing this with -your eyes open? Have you forgotten the laws of your land? I know but -little about these, but I do know that you cannot marry. Then, are you -doing yourself or that dear one inside, justice, by harboring such -feelings? It can only bring unhappiness to both of you; therefore, -banish such thoughts from your mind.” - -“It is easy enough to say, do this, and I found it easy enough to -resolve to do this, but I cannot do it. I cannot understand my weakness. -My life has been spent, like my people’s, adhering to the laws laid down -for us to follow. I have never questioned these, and have, by living up -to them, been perfectly contented, as are all of my people. But you come -to us from afar, and my life is changed immediately; at first I was -pleased with you all, and then I found myself happier when alone with -Enola and discontented when away from her; and not until last night did -I realize that it was love which had wrought this change in me. Since -then, what with the discovery of my sin and the fear for Enola’s life, I -have suffered the tortures of hell.” As Onrai ceased speaking a noise -like the marching of a heavy body of cavalry reached their ears. It was -coming nearer and nearer. What did it mean? - - - - - CHAPTER XXI. - IN PERIL. - - -The rumbling noise came nearer and nearer, and Onrai and Mr. Graham -stood without saying a word. In some respects the noise resembled that -of the night before, but it came from the opposite direction. -Involuntarily the two watchers looked at the heavens, but seeing the -stars shining brightly, all fears of another storm were allayed. - -“What can it be?” asked Mr. Graham. - -“I cannot tell,” said Onrai. “It sounds like the tramp of many zebra, -but I cannot understand why there should be any riders out to-night, -unless it be a body of men who are on their way to to-morrow’s work. But -even they would have started so as to have reached their destination -long before this. It puzzles me greatly.” - -“Could it be a body of men coming to you on a mission of some kind?” -asked Mr. Graham. - -“No, none would come to me at this time of night,” said Onrai. “And then -there is no reason whatever for any of my people coming to me. The -people know my wishes regarding the repairs to be made where the storm -has brought ruin, and this is the only thing which they could wish to -consult me upon. But they come nearer, and now we can distinguish the -different sounds; yes, it is a body of riders, but where they are bound -I cannot say,” and as Onrai finished speaking, a hundred flickering -lights could be seen far down the avenue toward the town. - -“Yes, it is a large body of men,” said Mr. Graham, as the riders came in -sight, “and they are riding fast, as if their mission, whatever it may -be, was important.” - -“Yes, they seem in earnest,” said Onrai, “and they are turning toward -the villa. They are coming here. I cannot understand,” and Onrai looked -puzzled. - -There seemed to be thousands of them as they rode toward the villa, -winding in and out between the trees, for they disdained the single -roadway. The leaders at last reached the terrace and seeing the King -standing with Mr. Graham, they dismounted and stood beside their steeds. -One of the leaders came forward and doffing his helmet and bowing low -before the King, said, - -“We have come from the city, oh King, to consult you on a matter which -has come up to-day before the people.” - -“I am always glad to heed the matters of my people. But why do you come -to me at this hour of the night; would not the morrow do as well? It is -late and within the villa lies one of our guests very near unto death, a -victim of yesternight’s storm. Will the matter not rest then until -daylight when a more suitable place can be chosen for its discussion, -and where there will be no fear of disturbing the fair sufferer? I ask -this not for myself but for one whose comfort you should all consider.” - -“It is of her and her companions that we wish to speak,” answered the -man. - -“And what manner of business can the people possibly have with the -strangers? Have they not been given into my charge and am I not -responsible for their welfare and comfort? I cannot understand your -reasons, man, for coming here on such an errand or the object the people -had in sending you. Have you lost confidence in the ability of the King, -to take care of and make enjoyable the life of our guests?” - -“No, it is not that, oh King,” said the man. “We do not fear for the -well-being of the strangers nor do we doubt your power to make all -things pleasing for them. Our mission is of a different character; we -wish to complain of them.” - -“To complain of them,” said Onrai. “What do you mean, man? Have my -people then so far forgotten their respect to the King’s wishes as to -complain to him of his guests or the guests of the Land of On? For have -not these strangers come to us from afar and have they not thrown -themselves on to our hospitality, and is it not our sacred duty to care -for them as long as they are with us? It is your duty as well as mine, -then why do you forget this so far as to make complaints of them?” - -“We have not made these complaints as yet, oh King,” said the man, “and -we wished to place our suspicions before you and let you decide if they -be well-grounded before we would call them complaints. But complaints to -us seems to be the only fitting word to use in this connection.” - -“I cannot understand you, my people,” said Onrai, “I was among you only -to-day and you said naught to me about this matter. You allowed me to -depart and come here without so much as a hint of your protest. Now, you -follow me but a short time after, at the dead of night, and here where a -fair life hangs by a thread; you come a thousand strong and voice your -miserable suspicions. Our life has been so quietly peaceful that this -trait has never before shown itself. A word which has almost passed from -our vocabulary alone can fit the act, and that is cowardice,” and as -Onrai ceased speaking he drew himself up grandly and faced them with -such a haughty bearing and scornful look that the leader drew back -involuntarily. - -“No, no, King, not that,” said the man, “not that, for we had only your -and our own best wishes at heart when we came here at this hour of -night.” - -“And had you no thought for those who are now under our protection? Had -you a right, even with complaints to make, to sneak here like a band of -jackals, in the dead of night? Why do you not come in the bright open -light of the day and then in numbers only equaling those against whom -you are going to make complaints, and not with a horde as if to -intimidate them.” - -“Listen, oh King,” answered the man. “You must know that this is an -event which has never before occurred in our land, and the people did -not know how to act. They then got together and decided that we were to -come to-night, and in a large body; this is to impress the strangers -within our land that, although war and strife, such as our sacred -writings speak of, are unknown to us, still we can come before them in a -formidable body and fight for our fair Land of On.” - -“Are you mad, man?” asked Onrai. “What is this I hear? Are you talking -of waging war against a handful of strangers, whom you ought to protect? -Do you speak of war, that which has never been heard of in this land? -Have the people of On gone mad with the advent of the storm?” and Onrai -turned and strode up and down the terrace. - -Mr. Bruce and Harry had come on to the terrace and now stood back with -Mr. Graham but saying nothing, so alarmed were they over the new turn -things had taken. The leader of the party said nothing for a few moments -after the King had finished speaking the last time. He seemed convinced -of the justice of the King’s remarks, but still he had a mission to -perform and he was expected to carry it out to the letter. Again -stepping forward, he said: - -“We do not come to fight the few of another sphere, who are now here but -to fight those of this race who might come to help them. These people -came in the dead of night to our land; we know not how they came or -whence they came and how should we know but that they could call to -their assistance thousands of others. It is this possibility that we -have prepared ourselves for.” - -Onrai turned on the man almost savagely and said: - -“Enough, now. I will listen to no more to-night. Begone, and find you -quarters until morning, when I will meet you near here on the shore of -the lake and hear these miserable complaints which you have to make. -Discuss the matter well among yourselves to-night, but remember this, -that I come to you to-morrow morning prepared to refute any statements -which you may make against our guests. Your fears, whatever they are, -are based on superstition and are simple. Now go and move away quietly, -so as not to disturb the woman whom you come to war against.” - -The men remounted after this and rode away, but not far, for when the -shores of the lake were reached they halted, and made preparations to -spend the night. Even at the villa the low hum of their voices could be -heard as they discussed the subject which had brought them here. - -After their departure Mr. Bruce stepped up to Onrai, who was standing, -lost in thought over the unexpected turn which events had taken, and -said, “What is it, Onrai?” - -“I cannot tell,” said the King, “but the people seem to have taken a -sudden fear of your party. Never before have I seen this quality in my -people and it worries me, for now that it is aroused it is hard to tell -where it will end.” - -“But why should this sudden dislike and fear of us have taken possession -of them,” asked Mr. Bruce. “Heretofore they have done all in their power -to make our stay in their country pleasant. Something strange must have -happened to make them change so suddenly.” - -“Have no fear, my friends,” said Onrai. “Whatever it is, I will learn -to-morrow and then I will know how to meet their arguments. They will -abide by my decision and will again extend to you their friendship.” - -They were now called into the sick-room for Enola had again awakened. -She was still raving about Gip, nothing else seeming to break through -the dark pall which had fallen over her mind. Loudly she called “Gip, -Gip, Gip,” half raising from her couch. - -As if in answer to her call a noise is heard outside and through one of -the open arches Gip pushes his great bandaged head. Enola seems to hear -the sound and, turning, sees the mighty head and before they can -restrain her, she springs forward and clasping the trunk in her arms -cries, “My noble, true friend, Gip, you have saved me.” - - - - - CHAPTER XXII. - “THEY MUST DIE!” - - -Yes, Gip, the great, noble, loyal Gip, had saved Enola. When that great -cry of hers had broken out, it had floated through the arches and out to -the open stables where Gip had been placed. He had just been raised to -his feet preparatory to having his wounds rebandaged, and as the -agonized cry reached him, he raised his head and listened, and when the -second cry came he pushed the attendants aside who tried to stop him and -limping and almost falling he started for the open arches through which -the sound came. Such loyalty, such love for a mistress had never before -been displayed by the domestic animals of On and Onrai and the -attendants looked with astonishment at Gip as he pushed his great head -through the arch of Enola’s apartment, and gave that peculiar cry. - -Enola a moment before had seemed very close to death’s door, her breath -being scarcely perceptible and no movement of the body showing any signs -of life. But she had awakened and in her delirium had called on that -friend who had shared the danger with her and had suffered in trying to -protect her. Her movement had been so quick when she had seen Gip, that -those about her had not time to stop her before she had fallen on the -floor clasping the great trunk of the animal. But it was well perhaps -that they did not, for any hindrance or objection on their part in -allowing her to go to that protector, the only one she had recognized, -might have resulted seriously to her reason, that reason which was -already darkened, but which now gave a glimpse of light. - -All looked at her in astonishment as she caressed the elephant, throwing -her arms about the great trunk, patting him and calling him by endearing -names in the meantime. She now noticed the bandages about his head and -said. - -“Oh, my poor Gip, and you were wounded? Ah, yes, I remember now, that -great, cruel log struck you,” and as she said this she almost fell -backwards in her weakness, but Mr. Graham caught her and attempted to -bear her to the couch, but she clutched Gip’s trunk and cried so -pitifully not to be taken from him, that Mr. Bruce stepped forward and -said: - -“It will not hurt her and it may do her an inestimable amount of good. -Listen, she already remembers a few of the instances of the storm and -mad ride.” - -“It was terrible, was it not, Gip?” Enola went on, “and you tried so -hard to keep me from danger; but it blew so furiously and the air was so -thick with stones and sand and sticks, and you were blinded, dear -friend. But you are safe now, all but that poor head which the cruel log -struck. But where are we now, Gip? The storm is over and we are -together; but where?” and Enola looked about her with eyes which began -to show some signs of returning reason. - -“Ah, I see, they have found us and have taken us back to the Temple; and -what are these?” and she looked at her bandaged hands and arms. “And my -face, too! Oh, they hurt so,” and the poor girl seeming for the first -time to realize her suffering, fell back on the floor. - -“Come, Enola,” said Mr. Graham, “you are tired and weak, and must lie -down. Gip shall stay near you,” he continued, as Enola again turned -toward the elephant. - -“Oh, uncle, I am so tired,” said Enola, as Mr. Graham laid her on the -couch. - -“Thank Heaven!” almost whispered Harry, “her reason is not destroyed.” - -“No,” said Mr. Bruce, as he gave her a quieting powder, “Gip has indeed -saved her life and her reason, too, for the sight of him has brought -from out of the chaos the scenes of last night, and these have brought -in their train other thoughts, until reason itself has been restored.” - -This news was received with tears of joy. All fears were now allayed -regarding Enola, but there were the greater ones awaiting them on the -morrow. What was to be the result of the conference of the King with the -people to-morrow? Onrai had assured them that it would be all right, -that they would abide by his decision in the matter; but was there not a -possibility of these people, who were experiencing for the first time -the fears which superstition brought out, being swayed by these rather -than by the King? Such thoughts had occurred to Mr. Bruce, but he had -said nothing of his fears to the others, not wishing to worry them -unnecessarily. Indeed, the thought had come to Mr. Bruce to suggest -their immediate departure from On, but Enola’s condition forbade this, -and again, they could not possibly reach the cave before morning, and if -this intended escape was once discovered, they would be stopped and -dealt with roughly to say the least. - -The news of the coming conference had not been imparted to Mrs. Graham -and Nellie and they, happy at Enola’s assured recovery, were quietly -dozing in their chairs, the events of the past twenty-four hours having -tired them greatly. The watches were now set for the night and the men -had retired with the exception of Onrai, who went into the garden and -strolled up and down, his arms hanging listlessly by his side and his -head bowed as if in deep thought. Was he, too, thinking of that coming -conference and of the possibility of the men refusing to heed him, and -following their own blind reasoning? Whatever his thoughts were he was -completely wrapped up in them and hardly heeded the approaching morn. -The eastern heavens grew lighter and lighter, but still Onrai paced the -drive, his head bending low and his eyes cast on the ground. The whistle -of a bird seemed to rouse him at last, and raising his head and noticing -the rosy tints of morn lighting the east, he shook himself and said: - -“The battle is fought and I now feel stronger; but it has been cruelly -hard.” - -A song sung by a thousand male voices, now arose on the morning air, and -Onrai, turning toward the lake, exclaimed: - -“Oh, I had forgotten. I must meet the people this morning at the lake,” -and he started off in that direction. - -Mr. Bruce came running from the villa, and hurrying up to the retreating -figure of Onrai, said: - -“Onrai, you are about to go to your people. They have a grievance with -us. Is it not best that we also accompany you, and plead our own -defense?” - -“No,” said Onrai, “I can better do this myself. I am dealing with a new -phase in their character to-day, and I do not know just how I will -handle them, but, at any rate, it is best that I should go alone.” - -“I would ask one favor of you before you leave,” said Mr. Bruce. “We -came to your land uninvited, and it is not right that we should create -any disturbance, or destroy the peace of mind which your people have -always known. If they demand our departure, and you feel that their -demand is just, and this decree is irrevocable, do not hesitate to tell -us, and we will leave immediately, although it would grieve us greatly -to be compelled to do so, just when we have fully experienced the full -delights of your beautiful country, and tasted the pleasures of your -hospitality. We cannot understand why they have learned to fear us, but -we do not question their motive, in wishing us to leave, if this be so.” - -“Fear not,” said Onrai, “Some question of difference has come up -probably, which has led them to fear that if you should remain here -long, established customs might be changed. By talking on this subject -and expatiating on it, it has assumed great proportions, and has seemed -of greater importance because of the mystery which surrounds you. They -have never been able to understand how you came to our country. They -found you on the side of the cliff one morning in the heart of our wild -beast range; you had been there overnight, and had been unmolested by -the ferocious beasts. This alone made them look on you with awe, and -they have never forgotten it. As I have said, it is superstitious fear, -which is now urging them on, and we will have to first destroy this.” - -“I hope that you may be able to do this completely,” said Mr. Bruce, -“for we wish to be friends with your people, and remain a long time with -them.” - -“I would have it so,” answered Onrai, as he turned and again started for -the shore. “I can understand now, I think, why these people have turned -on their guests. In some way they have learned of my love for Enola, and -a fear has taken possession of them that I would give myself up to the -fascinations of this fair woman. And they have attributed a supernatural -power to her, for they could not believe that any other could make me so -far forget my laws and people as to love; and I do not know just how I -am going to deny their charges and still ask them to allow the strangers -to remain with us. This they must do, however, for I would have them -with us until they have fully learned our customs and ways. They will -not fully know these until they have seen the ceremony of the Day of -Resis. And, am I still weak? May be so; but I cannot now see Enola leave -me. I will be strong, I will bury the love, which, if mentioned, will -ruin my whole life and that life to come. But I must see her; I must -have her with me yet awhile. Ah, I am approaching the appointed place. -Now for the struggle.” - -The party had seen him coming and were now drawn up before a large rock, -which was intended for a platform, from which Onrai was to speak; Onrai -approached and took his stand on the rock; the men stood in a semicircle -about him, their heads uncovered and as Onrai took his position on the -rock they bent their bodies respectfully, and then stood waiting for him -to speak. - -“My people,” he commenced, “you came to me last night with a strange -complaint. For a short time we have had in the Land of On a number of -strange people, the first which has ever visited our world since we can -remember. If at any previous time such visitors came to the Land of On, -we know not, for the events of the past ages are not made known to us. -But we are concerned only with these strangers from a distant planet. -When we stop to consider, we cannot wonder that these enlightened -people, of another world, seeing our world as we see theirs, should wish -to visit it and learn, if here was a race of people like unto -themselves. We cannot fully understand, perhaps, the curiosity which -should prompt this desire, for we have been taught to be contented with -the good land which God has given us and not to seek anything which we -have not here given us. We have certain laws to follow, and these laws -are life and death. But it is not so with the people who are now here as -our guests; they have certain political and moral laws, as they call -them, which they must adhere to, but they have no laws restricting their -research into the unknown. They may invent new contrivances for making -their labor easier, they may advance new theories on great subjects, -even their religion, not being altogether as ours is, but a number of -different beliefs, these beliefs being subdivided, each advancing -different theories, which in the end are widely varying. And they are -allowed to study the heavens and learn the different stars and to name -them; and they learned that there was a world similar to theirs and they -determined to visit it, and immediately devised new means to do so; and -they came and found that another race was here, a race much like -themselves in many respects but different in others, principally in -physique; but they worshiped the same God, the great God, and this makes -them brothers, and now you would destroy them, or send them back to that -world from whence they came, even before they have fully learned the -world or people which they traveled so far to find. You have an -imaginary complaint to make against them; it cannot be a genuine -complaint for I have been with them almost constantly since they came to -our land and I know that they are as pure in heart and deed as any among -us. Accept your King’s word for this, for he knows of what he speaks. I -have done.” - -The party of men had stood perfectly still during this speech of the -King, but it would be impossible to tell from their mobile features -whether they were being convinced or not. They stood stolidly silent, -not a muscle moving, leaning against their zebras. They made a grand -sight, these thousand men in their beautiful tunics, holding their -bright helmets. A body of men which would make the armies of the -civilized world look like pigmies and which would make the eyes of a -general open wide with admiration. But that stolidity; not one among -them betrayed an emotion in the face. As Onrai finished they did not -even change the position which they had held while he was speaking. - -Onrai now stepped to one side of the rock and the leader, who had spoken -the night before, came forward and mounting the rock, bowed to Onrai and -then proceeded with his explanation. - -“Oh, King, I was chosen by the people, who sent us here to make the -charge against the strangers last night, but you ordered us away, and we -have always learned to obey our King before all else, so we have waited -until this morning. The decision reached by the people was caused by a -report which was brought to the city by one, who has been a member of -your expedition since you left the city and was for some time before -attached to the woman Enola before she left the Temple. She was alarmed -by certain things which transpired, and no longer being able to keep -them to herself, rode to the city yesterday morning, arriving even -before you did, oh, King. She tells of the King of On, being in the -company of the woman Enola most of the time, and that certain -expressions passed between the King and this woman, which could mean but -one thing; the King had become infatuated with the woman. This news -could hardly be credited and would not have been believed probably, if -one of our men, who was also in the party, had not rushed madly into the -city yesterday, giving out that the King was mad; that he had stood on -the terrace of the villa, occupied by Onrai and his party on the night -of the storm, and had heard the King accuse the woman Enola of having -bewitched him; of her having known before the laws and customs of the -people of On, even before she had come here; but notwithstanding this -she had thrown a spell over him, the King. The King told her that she -had been balked in her machinations before it was forever too late, by -the warning of God. This warning was the storm. The man had not stopped -to listen longer; the storm causing him to seek shelter. The people had -seen the King come to the city, where he should be in the time of great -trouble, but that word had come from the woman Enola and he had -forgotten his people and had rushed off quickly, even killing the zebra -which he had ridden. This latter, we learned afterwards. The people love -their King, oh, Onrai; they feel that he has not sinned but that he is -in the meshes of one who would ruin him, and they have decided that the -woman and her party should die, and we have come to fulfill this -mission.” And the man, as if this declaration ended the matter, stepped -down from the rock and commanded the men to don their helmets and again -mount. - -“Hold,” cried Onrai, “what would you do? Consider well the step which -you would take. Have you forgotten that these people are our guests and -as such demand our protection? The stories which you bring are true, but -they are the results of my own blindness and are not due to any -supernatural influence, which Enola has had over me. She is innocent and -even now lies at the point of death, and, will you not at least wait and -see if her injuries are fatal? Oh, heed your King and do not this thing -which hurts him. Let them be escorted to the place where they were -found, and let them from there return to their own world. Do not kill -them,” and Onrai wrung his hands in despair. - -The only answer the leader made him was, “We must save our King, for we -love him and this is the only way,” and he ordered the men to march. -Onrai jumped from the rock and ran like a deer ahead of the riders, and -reaching the villa, met Mr. Bruce, Mr. Graham and Harry on the terrace -awaiting his return. The hurrying figure of Onrai coming toward them -told them that something was wrong, and stepping up quickly toward him, -Mr. Bruce asked, “What is it?” - -“It is settled,” said Onrai; “they are coming to kill you; I tried to -dissuade them, but it was useless. Rush to the rear and take zebras and -make all possible speed to where you were found. I will try to keep them -back for a while; it will mean my death, but that matters little.” - -The three men turned white, but did not move. - -“But what of Enola?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“She must be taken too,” said Onrai, “but it is too late.” - -The riders had now reached the terrace and dismounting, a number of them -stepped forward and laid hands on the strangers. Others prepared to -enter the villa, for the women. Onrai stood with bowed head, overcome -with emotion. This then was to be the miserable end of the expedition. - - - - - CHAPTER XXIII. - A MESSAGE FROM THE PRIEST. - - -The moment was a critical one and the three men realized it fully; what -could they do? They were powerless against such a mob; their only hope -seemed to lay in Onrai, but he had said that the men would no longer -listen to him. Onrai stood with arms crossed and head bowed and it could -be seen that he was fearfully agitated. But he made no move to stop the -men, who were now entering the villa to take the women. But the thought -of these men, laying their hands on Enola, on that poor bruised body, -finally overcame Onrai, and rushing madly into the villa, he grabbed the -two men who were about to enter the sick chamber and pushed them -forcibly from the house. - -“What would you do?” said he, beside himself with anguish. “Would you -war against poor defenseless women, or worse, sick women? Men, have you -forgotten your manhood; have you no longer any self-respect? Has your -pride and honor all been killed by this horrible suspicion?” - -The men stood quietly by as they had at the lake, listening, but not -seeming to heed their King. Those who had laid hands on Mr. Bruce, Mr. -Graham and Harry still stood guarding them, waiting for those who had -been sent for the women to come from the villa, when they would carry -out the rest of the miserable programme. - -“Why do you look at me in that strange way?” continued Onrai, “do you -not know that it is the King who is talking to you, that it is he who -implores you, that it is Onrai who commands you; have you forgotten that -it is I, Onrai, whom you yourselves chose for King, and whom you have -sworn to love and obey, that now entreats you? How are you keeping that -oath? Oh, that I should ever be chosen ruler of such cowards.” - -The men did not move, but when Onrai ceased speaking the leader walked -up, and again bowing to the King, that King, whom he still respected, -but did not obey, said: - -“King, we know of the great goodness of your heart; we know that that -great goodness of heart would still be influenced by the love; no, not -love, but unholy infatuation, which this woman has thrown about you, and -we know that because of this, you will forget yourself, your future, -your people, the holy laws and all, and would plead for the lives of -these people. We knew this and we hardened our hearts against such -pleadings before we came to you. It was decided that we would not be -influenced by these pleadings, for we knew that it would not be our -King, our great, noble Onrai, who would ask pardon for these people, but -the evil one, which the woman Enola had possessed him with. We believe -this with all our hearts and consequently we cannot listen to you. We -are chosen by all the citizens of On to carry out this mission and we -must do it or go back to our people traitors.” - -“Traitors, traitors, did you say? The word is well-chosen, but one which -heretofore has never been used in the Land of On. Traitors to those who -sent you! Would you then rather be traitors to the King than to the -people? Which is the greater sin, if you would call obedience to your -King a sin, which is the greater sin to be traitor to the people or to -the King, which you have sworn to love, cherish and obey? Come, man, can -you answer?” - -“Quickly,” said the leader, “for as I have said, it is not now the King -which commands us, but that evil one within. If it were the King, he -would say, ‘Take these people who have made your King sin; take these -people who have called the great God’s vengeance down on us, because we -harbored them; take them and show them no mercy, for they stole upon us -like thieves in the night; and when we clothed and fed them, when we -made them honored guests, giving them every comfort and luxury which the -Land of On knows, even taking them into the most sacred sanctuary, -making them special guests of the King, thinking that he alone was -fitted to entertain them, when we did all this for them, they repaid us -by making our King sin, and bringing God’s wrath upon us. Take these and -kill them, for they have betrayed our confidence.’ This is what the -true, noble King, the great Onrai would say to his people if it were he -talking to us. Oh King, we pity you, for we do believe that even now you -suffer, when you see the people, whom you have learned to love through -their machinations, going to their death. But the people have settled -the matter, having first given it just consideration and they know that -it is best that the cause of your sin and the land’s suffering should be -put out of the way, for if they remain, even if you no longer fell under -their spell, the land or people would no longer be safe. We know that -you are suffering for these strangers; these traitors are making you -suffer, because they would have you intercede for them, but when the -spell is broken, when you are no longer in the power of this subtle -Circe, you will thank your people for thus delivering you.” - -“I look at you now and wonder if this be the happy, care and -superstition-free people, whom I have known for so long and I am almost -persuaded to believe that you are not; that I have been transported in -some unknown way in my sleeping to another world, where the people have -never known what happiness, contentment and lack of all superstition is; -where the people are governed by the most imaginative fantasies of the -brain; where common sense and reason play no part in their decisions or -judgment. No, you are not the strong, mighty people that I once knew, -and yet you are the same. I know you all, every face is familiar to me, -but that is all. The solid mind has wandered, leaving in its place -nothing, or worse than nothing—superstition. That you believe in your -own ignorance that you are now right and that you are following the -dictates of sensible minds can easily be seen and your decision is as -much as could be expected from such miserable beings, as would be swayed -by superstition. Oh, where are the noble minds which once dominated over -those bodies? Have they gone beyond recall? Have they been so outraged -by these miserable superstitions that they have gone forever? Will not -sense, and reason and justice break the flimsy wall of these -superstitions and place the right mind again in possession? Oh, men of -little brain, why will you insult me by still calling me King?” And as -Onrai finished he turned his back on them as if their presence was -hateful to him; as if their stolid gaze would contaminate him. - -The leader stepped forward again and motioned the men back. Mr. Graham -and his companions watched these proceedings with renewed hope, but -Onrai did not even turn to see what they were doing. His strong nature -and nobleness of mind would no longer allow of his suing for mercy, even -for the sick girl, whose life meant so much to him. - -He had first plead; then he called on them as men; then he had commanded -them as King, and all had been useless; they had still stared at him -with that set look which would indicate that their decision was so -irrevocable that nothing, not even positive proof of this decision being -wrong, would make them change it. Then he had used contempt, he had -belittled their manhood, their intellect, and unwittingly he had made an -impression; an impression surely, but whether a good or bad one could -not yet be said, for the men had taken a position at the edge of the -park and were now in conference. - -Mr. Bruce had slipped into the sick chamber and had looked at Enola. She -was now resting quietly; her breathing being regular, her temperature -being almost normal. Mrs. Graham and Nellie were sitting near her, and -the women attendants were gathered in a group in one end of the -apartment, conversing in low whispers. - -“Mr. Bruce,” asked Nellie, “what is that great body of men doing -outside; are they here to congratulate the King and his party upon their -escape from the storm?” - -“Exactly,” said Mr. Bruce, and he tried to smile. “They came as a -delegation from the people of the city to express their heartfelt -thankfulness for our escape; and also sympathy for Enola’s suffering.” - -“But they were here last night,” said Nellie, “and still remain. I -cannot see why they should do so.” - -“They are waiting for further news of Enola’s condition, and when this -is learned they will depart for the upper part of the country, where -they are bound to repair the devastations of the storm;” answered Mr. -Bruce; but as he spoke, Mrs. Graham had walked to the curtained arch and -parting the hangings, said: - -“See, Mr. Bruce, they are returning; their movements are very strange; -can anything be wrong?” - -“Nothing, I assure you, Mrs. Graham,” said Mr. Bruce, “I will see what -it is,” and saying this he again went on to the terrace. - -The leader was just pulling up his zebra, and raising his voice, said: - -“Oh King, we cannot heed your command or words. Our duty is plain and we -must do it. Men do your duty.” Again the men placed their hands on the -shoulders of the three men and two again entered the villa for the -women. Onrai stood motionless as if turned to stone. The men came from -the house, one leading Mrs. Graham and Nellie, and the other with the -still sleeping figure of Enola in his arms. - -A zebra’s gallop was heard on the hard pavement of the avenue. Whoever -it was, was keeping up a most fearful pace, for the sound of falling -hoofs came and quick. The men turned to see who this rapid rider could -be and just then Sedai hove in sight, his zebra fairly flying over the -ground. He turned into the park and the body of men parted to allow his -panting zebra to pass between them. - -“Hold!” he cried. “A message from the high priest!” - - - - - CHAPTER XXIV. - THE CRISIS PASSED. - - -The noise of the zebra galloping madly over the avenue, had so surprised -the men that for the moment all else had been forgotten, and those -holding the strangers had let go their hold, and stood with necks craned -to catch the first glimpse of the mad rider. Mrs. Graham and Nelly had -stood where their guard had stopped when the first sound of the zebra’s -hoofs had reached them. They had been so surprised by the entrance of -the men into the sick chamber, and by their command to follow them, that -they could not at first realize what the men meant. But when one of them -attempted to raise Enola from the couch, Mrs. Graham rushed forward, and -would have tried to stop him, but for the retaining hand of the other -man. - -“What does this mean?” indignantly asked Mrs. Graham. - -But the man did not understand English, and simply stared at Mrs. -Graham. - -But now that Enola had been secured, Mrs. Graham and Nellie were made to -understand that they were to go with the man. They then began to realize -that something was wrong, and that this was being done with the -knowledge of those outside. They walked to the terrace, and when they -saw the men holding their male companions also, they knew that they were -being made captives for some reason or other. They turned pale, and -thoughts of dungeon cells and murder came into their minds, which were -probably not far from the truth, if they but knew it. But the men -stopped as Sedai rode furiously up, flourishing a piece of parchment in -his hand. Onrai stepped forward hurriedly, and taking the parchment into -his hand, read the hieroglyphics inscribed on it. His face at first wore -a puzzled look, then became brighter, and finally broke into a smile, as -he handed the parchment to the leader, saying: - -“There, man, read that to your followers. It is from the high priest, -one whose authority you cannot question. Read also how fickle are the -people whom you represent, for they now order you to return without -fulfilling your mission,” and saying this, he walked over to where the -man stood who was holding Enola, and taking her in his arms, carried her -into the apartment, and laying her on the couch, kissed the fair cheek, -saying: - -“Mine, all mine, and they were trying to take you from me. Oh, God, I -thank thee.” - -Outside the leader had taken the parchment, and, first reading it to -himself, turned to the men who were watching him closely and -expectantly, and said: - -“This message, as you have heard the King say, is from the high priest, -and it relieves us from the painful duty of disobeying our King’s -orders, listen: - -“‘I, the high priest of On, who has access to the most sacred laws, -have, knowing that a matter of great moment depended on the proper -reading of these laws, perused them carefully, studying each character -as it is written, and have made this discovery: in those laws which -govern the King and his conduct, I find the law which says he shall not -marry; this has always been read that the King shall not marry. But it -does not end here. In believing that our race is the only one on earth, -and that we could never be visited by other people, we have read but the -first part of this law which says, the King shall not love or marry. But -the whole reading of the law is this: ‘The King shall not take unto -himself a wife chosen from among his own people.’ The great law-giver of -our land undoubtedly foresaw that at some future day, people of another -race would visit us, and although he has virtually given no consent to -the King’s marrying one of his people, he has, by writing the law in -this way, namely: ‘The King shall not marry one of his own people,’ made -it possible for him to marry one of his own race, if he so choses, -providing, of course, if such a woman comes to the land of On. Therefore -I, the high priest of the Land of On, do hereby declare that Onrai, the -King of On, has full and proper rights to marry the woman, Enola, who is -of another race, and that the men who have been sent to kill the -strangers, because of Onrai loving one of their women, are on an -unlawful mission, and must be recalled.’” - -As the man finished his reading, he turned to face those whom he and his -men had been sent to take and kill, and said: - -“I came to you with orders from the people to make you prisoners, and to -take you to a certain place and kill you. We had learned to respect you, -and it was hard for us to believe that you were guilty of that of which -you were accused. But all signs seemed to be against you, and we were -compelled at last to believe that you were guilty. But we have just -learned from the words of the high priest, that the King’s love was -sinless, and if there be no sin in his loving, Enola must be sinless. If -we have shaken your confidence in us, we know not how to regain it. All -we can do is to assure you that if we have doubted you and have proven -ourselves traitors to the confidence you have placed in us, we will now -strive all the harder to make your stay among us a happy sojourn. We -crave you to pardon us, and believe it was the respect to our laws, as -we knew them, which made us act as we did.” - -The man waited for a moment after he had finished speaking, as if -expecting a reply from one of the strangers, but none of them understood -the language well enough to make themselves understood as they would -wish. Onrai came forward, however, after telling him that they wished -him to express to his people that they freely forgave their mistaken -understanding of their mission to their country, and further intention -of killing them. Onrai turned and interpreted this to the men, who then -mounted their zebras and departed. - -The party again entered the sick chamber and looked at Enola. She had -awakened from the stupor or sleep into which she had fallen after taking -the powder, and as they entered she was looking wistfully at the great -open arch, which had framed the bandaged head of Gip the night before. -She looked up as the party came in and tried to smile, but the effort -was lost, the bandages covering her face so completely, that they hid -all expression. - -“Was I so badly wounded then?” she asked, as she half raised her head -and looked at them. - -“Yes, dear,” said Mrs. Graham, who had hardly yet got over the scare -which the recent event had given her. “But you are going to get well now -and we will be so happy.” - -“Yes, Enola,” said Onrai, as he stepped up and took the poor bruised -hand, “happiness has been unknown to us since you were wounded, but we -know now that you will get well, and our happiness has returned,” and he -raised her hand to his lips. - - - - - CHAPTER XXV. - “HE WILL MARRY YOU.” - - -One week had now passed and Enola had almost entirely recovered. Her -fever had lasted only a day or two and with Mr. Bruce’s prescriptions -and treatment, and Mrs. Graham’s and Nellie’s gentle care she mended -rapidly. Her wounds, too, had healed so quickly, the bandages had been -discontinued and altogether Enola was nearly in as good a condition as -before her fateful ride. - -“Why, Enola,” said Mr. Graham, “you look as bright and happy as ever, -this beautiful morning, and I prescribe a good long walk for you in the -garden.” - -“And I feel quite as well as usual, Uncle,” answered Enola. “My arms and -limbs are a little stiff yet, but outside of that I am all right and -will gladly accept your invitation. Ah, the morning is beautiful, -glorious,” she continued, as they stepped to the terrace. “Uncle, have -you noticed that the sun seems to be brighter, the air purer, that all -verdure is greener, that the waters of the lake and river bluer, that -the birds’ notes clearer and their plumage gayer, that all nature seems -brighter and happier here than in the civilized world?” - -“Ah, that is quite a speech, Enola,” answered Mr. Graham, smiling; “but -seriously, I have noticed all this many times, and I have long ago -ceased wondering at the happiness and contentment of the people, for -they could hardly be aught else with such environments.” - -“Yes, they are truly a happy lot,” said Enola, “yet how human. For -centuries, more than likely, their ancestors had never known such words -as fear and superstition and they themselves could hardly have defined -the meaning of these words, yet one little word set them wondering and -just a word more and a little act on the part of their King made them -slaves to superstitious fears.” - -“Yes, that is so,” said Mr. Graham, “I am very much afraid we are all -alike after all.” - -“No, not all alike,” said Enola, “for we, with our advanced notions on -such matters could never believe as did these people for a short time.” - -“May be not,” said Mr. Graham, “but we must take into consideration that -these people have always been led to believe that they were the only -people on earth, and have never been told of other people on other -planets, so our advent among them was a great surprise in the first -place and they looked on us with awe, mingled with fear; and Onrai’s -strange actions and the storm simply ‘capped the climax.’” - -“We had rather a narrow escape, don’t you think?” asked Enola. - -“Yes,” answered Mr. Graham, “too narrow for comfort; but I think we -stand on a better footing with these people since, and that for this -reason the occurrence should be looked upon as being a decidedly lucky -one for us.” - -“That is very true,” said Enola, “but look, Gip has seen us and is -coming to meet us.” - -Across the lawn strode the great monstrous beast, his limp nearly gone, -but his head still bandaged. This great elephant stood fully twenty feet -high and as he stalked under the trees his back touched the lower -boughs. He had been given the freedom of the garden from the first night -of his removal from the scene of the accident to the villa, and he had -taken up his position beneath the arch which opened into Enola’s -apartment, and here he had remained, only going to his stall for a few -moments’ rest; he knowing that if he lay down beneath the window, he -could not again rise. Such love for a mistress had never been displayed -before, according to Onrai, and his people could not understand it; but -it was clear enough to them that the elephant was attached to Enola, and -this was quite enough to let him have his own way. - -Quickly he passed over the smooth lawn until he had reached them, when -he affectionately stuck his great trunk into Enola’s face. Perhaps this -was not a very pleasant way of having him show his love, but it was the -only way he knew of, and Enola seemed to enjoy it. - -“Good Gip,” she said, “and could you not see me in my room? I saw you -poke your big head in the arch and pull it out again and look about. You -are a dear, good fellow, Gip, and you can come right along and walk with -us.” - -And he did. Back and forth on the lawn the three walked, the great -elephant keeping close to Enola’s side, occasionally thrusting his trunk -over her shoulder, giving out that little squeak, as if to let her know -that he was still with her. And his great moving hulk shook the ground -at every step, making Mr. Graham look around now and then with -apprehension. But Gip paid no attention to him, simply looking at Enola -and trying to make her look at him. - -The day before Onrai had gone to the city to attend to any matters which -might need his attention. He was to return to-day, and on the morrow -they were again going to take up the journey to the field of diamonds, -which had been so unexpectedly interrupted by the storm. Mr. Graham and -Enola had now walked to the edge of the garden, and were standing -looking down the beautiful roadway, when far away, where the perspective -came to a point, could be seen a small black spot. At first it looked -like a pedestrian, then like a zebra, and finally the form of zebra and -rider were made out. It was Onrai returning, and as impatient as on the -night when the message had reached him of Enola’s serious illness. Gip -pricked up his ears, and looking down the road, saw the rider -approaching; then kneeling, he placed his trunk for Enola to step on, as -of old. She divined his intention and placing her foot on his trunk, he -raised her to his back and started off down the avenue, she sitting -Turkish fashion on the silk covering which was always worn by the white -elephant. - -Onrai was now near enough to distinguish her form, and seeing her -approach he urged his zebra into a still faster gallop and in a moment -he and Enola had met, and Gip, turning, strode along beside the zebra. -Far above Onrai Enola sat, her face almost hidden by the huge figure of -the elephant, but Onrai was happy in the thought that he was near her. -That was enough for him at least. - -“You came to meet me, then?” asked he. - -“No, I think it was Gip, who came to meet you,” answered Enola, smiling, -“I simply accompanied him.” - -Onrai laughed as he said, “Well, you are here and that is enough. You -are looking entirely well this morning; are you feeling so?” - -“Perfectly so,” answered Enola, “and ready and waiting to again take up -the journey.” - -“We will start to-morrow, at break of day,” said Onrai, “and let us hope -that our journey will not again be broken by such an event as the -storm.” - -“Yes, it was fearful,” answered Enola, “but let us not talk of gloomy -things on this beautiful morning. The miserable past is gone and let us -forget it. I hope your people will not again mistrust us, for this hope -only will again insure us comfort and happiness.” - -They had now reached the villa and Gip, placing his trunk for Enola to -step on and kneeling for her, she was soon standing beside the King. - -“I thank you for having met me,” he said. - -“Don’t thank me,” said Enola. “Thank Gip.” Then she tripped lightly up -the terrace stairs. - -“She seems to have lost all seriousness since her recovery,” said Onrai -to himself, as he followed Enola into the villa, “but this may be -joyousness over that recovery. But she will have to be serious when the -time comes, for my people will demand it.” - -Enola had gone into her own apartment, where she found Nellie awaiting -her. - -“Has Onrai said anything to you yet?” asked Nellie. - -“About what?” asked Enola. - -“About his intended marriage,” said Nellie, and she tried to smile, but -could not, the whole matter seemed such a farce. - -“About his marriage? why he has not mentioned it to me,” said Enola. - -“It is strange he should not have spoken to you about it,” said Nellie, -“for it concerns you quite as much as himself.” - -“In what way?” asked Enola. “I cannot possibly see how I am concerned in -his marriage.” But as she spoke she remembered the conversation of the -night of the storm and of his accusation. For he had told her then that -a King was not allowed to marry, how was this then, that he was going to -break the law. - -“Tell me, Nellie,” said she. - -“I can hardly bring myself to do so,” said Nellie. “We told you that we -had trouble with the people when you were sick, which nearly ended in -our massacre, but we did not tell you all concerning that trouble. You -are strong enough now and can hear it. They accused you of bewitching -the King, when you knew he was forbidden by the laws to either love or -marry. They said that the storm had come to them as a warning, and was -God’s wrath on them for harboring us, and they were going to kill us. -But the high priest learned that the King could marry you if he so -desired, and so we were pardoned, and now it is the King’s intention and -the people’s desire that you should marry him. But I cannot understand -why he has not spoken to you about it. Oh, Enola, can you marry this -barbarous king?” - -“Don’t ask me, now, Nellie, I cannot answer—I cannot understand.” And -Enola drew her hand across her eyes as if to break the spell. - - - - - CHAPTER XXVI. - A STRANGE DISCOVERY. - - -The following morning opened bright and beautiful; all rose early, and -after a light breakfast again took up the journey. Gip had sufficiently -recovered to be allowed to go, and as it was intended that for the first -few days’ the marches were to be short in order not to fatigue Enola, it -was thought best for her to ride in the large howdah on Gip’s back, for -the motion would be less and the position more comfortable than it would -be on the back of a zebra. So Gip was happy in carrying the precious -burden, and strode out at the head of the large cavalcade as proud as -any of them, with scarcely any sign of lameness left. Onrai had also -mounted an elephant so as to be on a level with Enola, for the idea of -trying to keep up a conversation when he was riding some feet below her, -was entirely out of the question. - -Harry preferred his zebra, notwithstanding this left the field entirely -open to Onrai. Still, he thought it might as well be thus, for Enola -might look on his riding near her as an intrusion, and this would hurt -his cause far more than it would help it. - -Mrs. Graham and Nellie were both on elephants this morning, Mrs. Graham -being stretched out in a half reclining position, enjoying to the -fullest the comforts of the huge howdah and easy motion of the elephant. -Mr. Bruce, Mr. Graham and Harry rode well on ahead of the rest of the -party, and Sedai was directly in their rear. The story of his hard ride -from the city, when bringing the message from the high priest, he had -kept silent on for a long time, but Mr. Bruce finally prevailed upon him -to tell how he had been chosen as a courier. His story was substantially -this: - -“I was standing just before the terrace when I saw the body of men come -up. I heard them make the demand and knew that they would make trouble. -I heard one of the number say that it was because of Enola having made -the King sin by wishing to marry her, she knowing that the King could -not marry. I then remembered having heard one of the men, whom I had -talked with in the city, say that the law did not forbid the King -marrying a woman of another country. I heard Onrai tell them to wait -until morning. I then determined to ride to the city and look up the man -who had made this remark. After the men had withdrawn, I stole to the -stable, and jumping on my zebra started for the city. I rode hard and it -was still night when I reached there. I found the man after considerable -trouble and he told me that that was his opinion only, but that the -people had decided that the King could not marry, and he must believe -this as did they. He told me to go to the high priest. While on my way -to the Temple some of the populace saw me, and fearing that I had broken -away from those who had been sent to kill our party, they pursued and -overtook me at the base of the terrace steps which led to the Temple. I -fought hard but they overpowered me and bore me into the Temple. The -high priest came forward and asked me how it was that I was not with my -friends. I told him as well as I could, for I knew little of the -language, that there was a doubt regarding the law governing the King’s -marriage; that I had been sent to him with the request that he examine -carefully this law and give me his decision and let me bear it to the -King. The high priest left us for a few moments and then came back and -handing me a piece of parchment, commanded the people to leave me go, -and bade me ride with all speed to the King and my friends. - -“The priest was very much agitated as he said this to me, and kept -urging me to use all speed. I rushed down the steps and jumped on one of -the zebras of the natives, mine being winded, and never stopped until I -had reached the villa.” - -This was the story Sedai told in his quiet and unassuming way and he -never seemed to realize that he had, by his quick forethought, put into -immediate action, saved the lives of his friends. And Sedai had ever -since this held a new place in the hearts of the party and Onrai himself -seemed to look on the Abyssinian as one who had done him a personal act -of kindness which could never be repaid. He was a hero, was Sedai, and -it was decided by the party that although he might never again have an -opportunity to help them in a like way, still it was good always to have -him with them, and upon their telling him this he said that he would -never again leave them; not even for a day. And so he was one of the -party to-day, his sturdy figure riding the zebra like a native. - -The journey would occupy some ten days yet and it was decided to travel -early in the morning and in the cool of the evening; spending the warm -part of the day in one of the villas en route, as they had on previous -marches. The storm’s track could be seen very plainly from the avenue -and a large body of men were still employed cleaning away the debris. A -remarkable thing about the terrible storm was that it had not killed a -single human being. Some had been very badly injured, but these had all -recovered or were recovering, so that not one death could be laid to the -storm; many animals had been killed and it was expected that many of the -wild animals in the hunting reservation had also been killed, but this -had not yet been ascertained, as none had gotten as far as the -northwestern part of the country, where the storm was supposed to have -started. - -It would remain with Onrai and his party to ascertain this. - -All was life and happiness this beautiful morning and all thoughts of -the storm had been relegated to the past. On their right stretched the -lake, its clear waters stretching far to the north; on the left were the -farms and pastures, through which the storm had ploughed its way; on -ahead of them, as far as the eye could reach, stretched out the shaded -avenue; way off to the northwest could just be seen in the blue -distance, hardly perceptible, the faces of the cliffs, and at the base -of these cliffs was their destination, and there too were the points of -interest, which the party were to see before their return. - -“The journey for the next few days will be uneventful enough, will it -not?” said Mr. Graham, as he pulled up for a moment alongside of Onrai’s -elephant. - -“Yes, we will have little to break the monotony between here and the -field of brilliants, but the country is beautiful and I think you will -find it all interesting,” said Onrai. - -“It is all interesting to me,” said Mr. Graham, “but I wished to know if -there was anything of special interest, such as mines and quarries.” - -“No, nothing of that kind,” said Onrai, “but wait a minute; there is a -deserted mine or something, which has never been explored by any of my -people, since I can remember, and I cannot tell whether it be a mine or -well or natural hole in the ground. It is about the width of the avenue -and goes down, down, down, far below where the eyes can reach. I have -only looked down this dark hole when I have been passing and know -positively nothing about it, but if you would like to do so, we will -halt there to-morrow and go down with ropes and explore it as far as we -can. A villa stands near in which the ladies can wait for us.” - -“I should like to see what this curious place is,” said Mr. Graham. - -“Well, then, it is settled, we will explore it to-morrow,” said Onrai. - -Mr. Graham again rode up alongside of Mr. Bruce, and telling him of the -hole in the ground, had his interest aroused at once. All along the -track of the storm many men were at work, but for some time past none -had been seen. - -“It is strange, is it not?” asked Harry of Mr. Bruce. - -“Yes, decidedly so,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“But, look, what is that in the distance?” - -“It looks like a body of men,” answered Harry. - -“Perhaps they have congregated there for some special work.” - -No further comment was made about these men. They could now be plainly -seen standing in a circle. They were not working as far as could be -seen, but were standing with heads bowed as if contemplating something -on the ground before them. They now saw the King and his party -approaching, and one of their party hurried to the avenue and came -towards the travelers. - -“He seems to be excited over something,” said Mr. Graham. - -“Yes, he acts differently than most other men I have seen in this -country,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“May be they have made a discovery.” - -“Something agitates him,” said Harry, “that is sure.” - -The man now came near, and seeing that it was the King and his party he -stopped, and making a respectful bow, said: - -“I have come, oh, King, not knowing that you was of the party, to call -attention to a strange being which we have found in the field. We know -not whether it be human or not, and we would ask you to look at it and -tell us how to act with it.” - -“Go, we will follow,” said the King, and the party followed the man from -the avenue into the field to the left. - -The body of natives moved, upon seeing the King and party approaching, -to one side, disclosing the object which had so interested them. The -party looked and saw the body of an African negress with a child -strapped to her back. - -But how had it gotten here? - - - - - CHAPTER XXVII. - IN THE HOLE. - - -Yes, it was a negro mother and her babe. The body was that of a slight -woman, weighing not more than one hundred pounds, and perfectly black. -The babe was probably three months old, and was strapped to the back of -her mother. The features of the mother were flat and broad, and showed -but little intelligence. Both bodies were considerably mutilated; this -being caused, very likely, by the storm; not a rag of clothing covered -the bodies. Silently the native men and women stood gazing on the -strange figures; they could offer no explanation on this as to how these -bodies had come here or from whence they had come; they looked at the -bodies and then at the white strangers as if to trace some likeness, but -there was none, and this puzzled them all the more. Involuntarily they -glanced into the heavens, as if expecting to see a new planet looming up -in the midday sun from which these black bodies had fallen. That they -had come from the same world which they themselves inhabited—that world -which was theirs alone, they could not believe, of course. - -Onrai looked at one of the guests and then at another, as if expecting -some explanation from them, but they offered none; they being nearly as -much in the dark as was he. But finally Onrai, stepping up to Mr. Bruce, -said: - -“You know so much of the heavens and of the stars, can you not tell me -whence came this woman!” - -“I can only offer one explanation,” answered Mr. Bruce, “and that is -that the woman and child were caught up by the great storm and blown -from their own country into this.” - -“Ah,” said Onrai, “that explanation maybe truthful, and looking over his -people he called them all closely about him and told them what Mr. Bruce -had said. It seemed to satisfy them, but it raised their curiosity to a -greater extent, and they crowded more closely about the bodies. The hot -sun had poured down on these bodies until they were in a bad state of -decomposition and our friends soon moved away, leaving the find wholly -in possession of the natives. - -“What shall we do with these bodies?” asked Onrai of Mr. Graham. - -“I would order them burned,” said Mr. Graham. - -So Onrai told some of the men to throw together a pile of wood and lay -the bodies on it; this was soon done and the torch was then applied. As -the flames shot into the air, licking the reeking flesh off the bodies, -our friends again mounted and moved on. - -“What do you think of this, Mr. Bruce?” asked Mr. Graham. - -“I can only say what I have already said to Onrai,” answered Mr. Bruce. -“The force of the storm must have blown this woman and her child over -the cliff and thus far into the heart of the land.” - -“Do you not think that another explanation might be made of their -appearance?” asked Mr. Graham. - -“There may be many explanations made,” answered Mr. Bruce, “but if this -country is impregnable, how else could this woman and her child reach -here?” - -“I think myself that the storm has played a great part in this woman’s -appearance in this part of the country, but I cannot help but think that -she was this side of the cliffs before the storm,” answered Mr. Graham. - -“If that be so, then these people have lived in ignorance of this -tribe’s having taken up a residence in this country,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“Yes,” said Mr. Graham, “but these Onians very seldom visit the -northwestern part of this country, as Onrai has said, and this tribe -might have found an entrance and settled in a fertile part near the -cliffs, and may now be living there in total ignorance of their having -entered a country which has for ages been shut in from the rest of the -world?” - -“This may all be so,” said Mr. Bruce, “but I would rather cling to my -theory.” - -“I would gladly accept your explanation,” said Mr. Graham, “if it were -not for that part of it, which says that the woman was blown over the -cliffs. Now, if this storm had started on the western side of these -cliffs, the cliffs themselves would have broken the force, or destroyed -it entirely before it reached this side. Therefore, I claim that the -storm must have started from this side of the cliff.” - -“When put in that way,” said Mr. Bruce, “you almost convince me that I -have made a mistake. But whatever the way in which this woman reached -this country, I believe that we will hear more of it. It would be -strange indeed if we should find a race of negroes quietly villaged in -this country.” - -“Well, there is a possibility that we may,” said Mr. Graham. - -Off to the right, in a clump of trees, is now seen a villa and the party -made for it, it now being nearly midday. Once in the cool villa, and all -thought of the morning adventure was forgotten. Lunch was served and -then came the afternoon siesta. - -Late in the afternoon they again started, intending to ride until late -in the evening. The journeys in the cool of the evening were delightful. -There was always a breeze coming off the lake at this time and it was -very refreshing after the close, warm air of the day. Along toward -evening the villa, which they had occupied on the evening of the storm, -was passed. The storm had made great ravages here, tearing up immense -trees by the roots and piling them one above the other. The earth was -gouged out in places to a depth of twenty feet, and all along the track -of the storm were immense piles of debris. - -Thoughts of the storm had long since passed from the minds of our -friends; they were interested only in the far northwest toward which -they were headed, and which promised them so many surprises and -adventures. This northwest was almost unknown even to the natives; they -knew certain parts of it very well, such as the field of diamonds and -one or two other points, which had come under their notice for some -special reason. But taken as a whole very little was known of the -country, and for this reason Mr. Bruce and the others expected to make -some very interesting discoveries. The country had wonderful resources; -every known part of it producing certain products, which made it a -veritable Eldorado, and it might be expected that the northwest held -resources which would astonish all, even Onrai and his people. The field -of diamonds alone was enough to make this part of the country -interesting to the strangers, and for this alone they had started on -this journey. - -The following morning the party was up and off exceptionally early, long -before the sun had risen. They were only to make half a march that day, -for the shaft, which Onrai had spoken of on the previous day, was to be -explored. That is, men were to be lowered into it and if the bottom -could be reached and openings found leading from it, then all of the men -of the party were to go down and explore these. Such was the programme -laid out for the day and with this prospect of new diversions the men -started off with happy hearts. - -Each day now was bringing them nearer to the great northwest and the -cliffs were growing plainer as they advanced. The country began to -assume a wilder appearance; still there were well-kept fields and -numerous farm villas and many men at work in the fields. At another -point to-day they had passed a great herd of elephants, which had been -brought from the city to recuperate, the former hospital having been -almost entirely destroyed by the storm. These elephants, like many -others which they had passed, had followed them until driven back by the -attendant. - -The morning was getting pretty well-advanced and the hopes of reaching -the shaft shortly were making the men keep up a constant watch on both -sides of them for fear of passing it. It was partially hid in a piece of -woods which bordered the lake at this point for some distance. None of -the party knew the exact locality of the opening and so care had to be -taken in order not to pass it. - -“What do you think of this hole in the ground?” asked Mr. Graham of Mr. -Bruce. - -“I do not know what to think of it,” said Mr. Bruce, “but I do know that -it is a very strange thing that these people should be in ignorance of -its origin. It seems to me that such things would start the curiosity in -these people, but I have seen very little of this article in their -make-up. They did look a little bewildered yesterday when they saw the -negress and child, but I will wager you a shilling they have forgotten -all about it by this time. This very lack of curiosity in these people -almost puts me out of patience with them.” - -“It may be, though,” said Mr. Graham, smiling at Mr. Bruce’s impatience, -“that it is better that they have left to us the exploring of this -extinct mine or well, or whatever it is; anyway I would feel better -satisfied finding something, which is not already known by this people. -There goes one of the attendants now towards the trees; perhaps we have -reached the hole.” - -And they had, for the fellow, pulling aside some underbrush, disclosed a -large, dark opening running straight into the ground. The wind seemed to -be rushing into this hole with great force. He turned and motioned to -the party and they rode toward them. All dismounting, ropes were -procured and tied to the trunks of the trees, surrounding the hole. A -glance down the dark aperture would have been enough for most men, but -for those here assembled, the blackness but whetted their curiosity and -desire to investigate. A lighted torch was thrown down, but the fearful -wind which rushed down the hole extinguished this before it had fallen -far. - -“Let us all go down in a bunch and with our combined efforts we may be -able to keep our feet,” Harry said. - -And so it was decided; Mr. Bruce, Mr. Graham and Harry and Onrai were to -go down, well tied together, only allowing enough freedom for the limbs -to move easily. A small supply of food and a few skins of water were put -up and strapped to the back of each and several torches were also taken. -It was strange, but Onrai seemed to take quite as much interest in the -contemplated subterranean journey as did the other members of the -expedition, and he showed more enthusiasm than he had at any time since -the arrival of the strangers. This was the first opportunity though that -he had had to display any enthusiasm, for everything in this country had -been familiar to him since childhood and he could hardly be expected to -show any great interest in things. But now, though by the eagerness -displayed by his guests, he had also had his curiosity aroused and he -was really impatient to get started. - -“Are you ready, Onrai?” asked Harry. - -“I am,” answered Onrai, “and eager to start. If there is anything new in -my country, I want to know it.” - -“Well, I think you will be surprised by the things that you will see and -learn to-day,” said Mr. Bruce. “That is, if the passage-way and its gale -of wind are any criterion.” - -“’Tis well, let us start,” Onrai answered. - -All bade the ladies good-bye, Enola almost crying because Mr. Bruce -forbade her accompanying them. Sedai was left to look out for the -interest of the women folks. - -The four men were now tied together, and many sturdy hands grabbing the -strong rope, they were lowered over the side of the hole. Slowly they -descended, each moment nearing the passage. Suddenly, without any -warning, they were swung in, and the line giving way, they landed on the -floor of the cavern. They scrambled to their feet in the dark, for they -had not lit the torches in descending, and by keeping breast to back and -throwing themselves well against the wind by leaning as far back as -possible, they were enabled to keep their feet and advance. The angle -was reached and they turned; now the wind caught them full force again, -and it was hard to keep an upright position. They were in hopes of -reaching another passage though, through which the wind did not rush -with such force, and where they could keep their torches lit. If they -could not find such a one, they might as well return, for they could -explore or learn nothing in this Egyptian darkness. - -[Illustration: “Grinning at them with open mouths and sightless -eyes.”—_Page 209._] - -Slowly they proceeded, feeling their way every step, and keeping tight -against the right wall. Mr. Bruce, who was in the lead, suddenly felt an -opening on the right, and telling his companions to follow him, turned -into this new avenue. They were now comparatively out of the wind and, -stopping, they lit a torch. Looking about them they saw, grinning at -them with open mouths and sightless eyes, thousands of human faces. - - - - - CHAPTER XXVIII. - PRISONERS IN THE CAVERN OF THE DEAD. - - -Mr. Bruce, who held the torch, dropped it to the floor at the ghastly -sight which met his gaze. From all sides these horrible visages were -looking at them. There seemed to be thousands of them; in fact, the -number seemed unlimited and as the torch flickered away on the floor, -casting long shadows over these sombre surroundings, the scene was -enough to curdle the blood of the strongest. Mr. Bruce stooped and -picked up the torch again, he having recovered from the shock which the -scene first gave him. - -The hall was about fifty feet wide and ten feet high; the depth could -not be ascertained because it went beyond the vision. They had entered -the hall by a door about seven feet high from the corridor of winds. -This hall or chamber was like the corridor hewn out of the solid rock, -the ceiling, sides and floor being perfectly smooth. The party now began -to examine the bodies which were arranged in groups about the walls and -piled in heaps all over the chamber. These figures were small, being on -an average about five feet in length; but the bodies had been -well-proportioned in life more than likely, but now the skin was drawn -tightly over the bones; the lips having dried and drawn away from the -teeth, leaving the grinning, ghastly expression, which first struck such -horror to the hearts of the explorers. The bodies were nude, having no -covering whatever, but around each, just below the arms, was a band of -copper. There were no signs of embalming cloths at all about the chamber -and their bodies had seemingly been preserved by a process of injection -of some powerful fluid, whilst there was a natural means of some kind in -these underground passages which preserved them. The skin was almost -black and rather thin, having that dull color which death or age gives -to the skin; it shone like ebony. - -Mr. Bruce took hold of several of the bodies and removing them, found -their limbs and arms as pliable as in life. This, too, was against all -natural and scientific principles and could not be explained. - -“What do you think of all this?” asked Mr. Bruce of Mr. Graham. - -“I should say that these bodies had been here for some time, but how -long it would be impossible to say,” answered Mr. Graham. - -“Onrai,” said Mr. Bruce, “have you ever seen any such people in your -country?” - -“Never,” answered Onrai, and his face looked puzzled. “I cannot -understand this at all. Can it be that these people have always -inhabited these underground passages, here under our country? Can this -be the great death hole, to which the wicked are condemned?” and Onrai -turned to look about him. - -“No, no, Onrai, let not such thoughts come into your mind,” said Mr. -Bruce. “These are dead and they know no suffering. If they were, as you -suppose, they would be alive and undergoing great torture. You have been -kept in ignorance of the existence of these people for good reasons, or -it may be that the founder of your country knew nothing of this.” - -“But are there any of these now living, I wonder? This we must learn -before returning, so let us go on, taking good care not to lose our -way,” said Mr. Graham. - -They accordingly moved along through the death chamber, keeping straight -ahead. The chamber seemed unending and went on and on, with the dead -still piled in heaps and leaning against the walls. It must have taken -ages to accumulate these thousands of dead. - -“There seems no end to all this,” said Mr. Graham. “I would prefer that -we get out of this place and into another not so thickly populated with -the dead.” - -“It must end some place,” said Mr. Bruce, and he had hardly finished -speaking, when a wall loomed up ahead of him and the chamber was ended. - -“Well, we are a nice lot,” said Harry; “there is no opening here and we -will have to return.” - -But after looking around for some time, and by moving several of the -bodies, an opening was discovered in one corner. This was small, but -after crawling through it the party found themselves in another -corridor, resembling the one of the winds. The hideous sight of the dead -was now lost and they passed on down a smooth hallway quickly, nothing -obstructing their headway. On, on they went, the corridor leading in a -straight line, as near as they could calculate, in a southeasterly -direction. - -“I should much rather have followed the windy passage, if it had been -possible,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“And I,” said Mr. Graham. “But to fight against being blown away by that -strong current would soon have exhausted us. But we may strike it again -further on.” - -“Yes,” said Harry, “and this passage may be leading us to great -discoveries. I believe that if any of the strange race of people are yet -alive, they must use this passage, for it would be quite impossible for -them to get through the windy one.” - -“How long it must have taken to cut this hall from a solid rock,” said -Mr. Bruce, “and how many thousands of men it must have taken to -accomplish this immense work.” - -“It was not done in a day or a year, or in many years,” said Mr. Graham. -“Still the work looks as if it might have been done years or hundreds of -years ago.” - -“We have made a greater discovery than the one of On,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“That’s so,” answered Mr. Graham, “for this has the additional interest -of being underground.” - -“Is it possible?” said Onrai, “that my people have lived so long over -these strange inhabitants of the under world and have learned nothing of -them?” - -“Your people are not at all curious, Onrai, or they would have long ago -investigated these things,” said Mr. Bruce. “The desire for discoveries -is altogether lacking in your make-up, and your laws have had a great -deal to do with it. You believe that yours is the only race on this -earth and that all things are known to you, so you have never thought it -necessary to look beyond the things that be.” - -“There is much for us to learn here,” said Onrai, a puzzled look coming -into his face. - -“No,” answered Mr. Bruce, “you know enough to make your lives contented -and happy and anything beyond that would be folly. But that certain -things exist that you do not know of, there is no doubt; these, however, -are not necessary to your happiness or well-being, and for this reason -have been kept from you. I would not let the things which you are now -learning of for the first time, worry me in the least if I were you. -Whatever these underground passages may bring to light, they cannot in -the least effect you or yours; so it would be best not to give these any -serious thought yourself or ever mention them to your subjects.” - -“I believe you are right,” said Onrai, “for we are happy now and any -greater knowledge might make us discontented, giving us a desire to -reach out and learn more, thus making us restless. I can now realize how -this can be.” - -They were still following the smooth-floored corridor and throughout its -entire length it had kept up that uniform width and height. The angle -formed by the meeting of the floor and walls was sharp and perfectly cut -as could be, and the beautiful arched roof showed wonderful skill in -chiseling. They all walked along, after this conversation, each one -engrossed in his own thoughts, when Onrai, who was in the lead, stopped, -and stooping, picked up a peculiar-shaped spear; the handle was short -and made of the backbone of some kind of fish; the head was long and -narrow and made of a very flinty stone; this head was set into the -handle, a slot being cut into the latter for this purpose; a cement was -used to fasten this head firmly into the handle, it also being bound to -it by thongs in much the same manner as are all spearheads of the -African tribe. Examining it more closely, stains were seen on the head -and handle, and the handle was notched in several places. The spear -might have been left there a day before or a century before; it was in a -perfect state of preservation, but the substance of which it was made -was very nigh indestructible, so it might have laid there for ages. - -“This passage has never been used since that spear was left here,” said -Mr. Bruce. - -“Why do you think so?” asked Mr. Graham. - -“Because,” answered Mr. Bruce, “if it had been the spear would -undoubtedly have been picked up, as it is more than likely that these -are not so easily made as to be thrown away or left without being picked -up.” - -“If that be so,” said Mr. Graham, “it tells nothing that we may want to -know. We are only interested in the live portion of this race, if there -be any of them yet extant, and we want some clew that will lead us to -them.” - -“Well, I can say this much,” said Mr. Bruce, “that we will find them -ahead of us if we find any at all.” - -“Another indefinite declaration,” said Mr. Graham, “tell us how you know -this, Mr. Bruce?” - -“Why this spearhead was lying, turned in that direction in which we are -going and when it was dropped, it was but natural that its loser was -moving in the same direction, for in falling it would naturally fall -that way.” - -“There is considerable in that argument,” said Harry, “and I agree with -you, Mr. Bruce, that whoever dropped it was the last person through here -and was going in the direction in which we are now moving.” - -“Well, we shall see,” said Mr. Graham, “have you made out the stains on -the handle, Mr. Bruce?” - -“No, but they look very much like congealed blood and I suppose they are -nothing else. These people probably use the spear for killing fish.” - -“Why fish,” asked Onrai. - -“Well, that was only another supposition of mine,” said Mr. Bruce. “You -see it is hardly likely that these people have any land animals down -here. Such things have never been found yet or at least not in any -numbers. But fish in subterranean rivers and lakes are very prevalent; -in fact an underground river or lake is seldom found without these fish, -some of them, as is the case in the great Mammoth Cave of Kentucky, -being without eyes. Then, we know that these people find fish in some -part of their underground home, for we have the proof of it here,” and -Mr. Bruce held up the spear handle. - -“But do you know that that is fish bone?” asked Harry. - -“Well, from what I have learned on the subject, I should say that it -was,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“Yes, it looks like a bone in the fish we catch in the lake,” said -Onrai. - -“Well, it is decided that it is a fish bone and the stains are made by -the fish blood,” said Mr. Bruce. “Now, we know that somewhere in this -cave there is a river or lake and I would say that the passage, which we -are now traversing, is but the avenue leading to the death chamber. -These people probably realize that it is best to have the dead -well-removed from the living quarters, for the same reason, may be, that -we do this above. Therefore we are on the right road to the living -habitations of this people, if there be any of them now living. Listen,” -and as Mr. Bruce, ceased speaking, he stopped and the others following -his example, a low buzzing sound was heard like the hum of many voices. - -“What is it,” whispered Mr. Graham. - -“Hard to tell,” said Mr. Bruce, “but we will soon learn for it is -growing louder,” and raising his torch he blew it out, leaving them in -perfect darkness. - -“What shall we do?” asked Onrai. - -“It is hardly safe to look forward, and it looks decidedly cowardly to -retreat, and we will be an open mark if we stand still,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“Let us move a little further forward,” said Mr. Graham, “and we may -find a hiding place. If we find that these people are coming this way -and are in great numbers, we can keep ahead of them until we reach the -death chamber, when we can barricade the small entrance with the bodies -and in this way hold off an army.” - -They all agreed to this and moved a little further forward. The passage -at this point made a slight turn to the south and as our friends rounded -the corner they came in sight of a number of lights far down the -passage. These were being carried by a number of beings, who looked, at -this distance, to resemble the bodies in the death chamber. Our friends -stopped, not knowing whether to turn and go back or keep on for a short -distance. - -“Look well down on the left,” said Harry, “don’t you see that hole in -the wall?” They looked and all saw it, but it was fully half-way between -the torchbearers and themselves. It would be almost suicidal to try and -reach it, but Mr. Bruce, who was looked on as the ringleader of the -party, said: “Come, keep close to the left wall and walk sideways and -step as quickly as possible. I think we can reach the hole before they -see us. They seem to be engrossed in something else at present and not -expecting to find any strangers in this hole, which has never seen one -before probably. We may escape them.” - -And so saying, Mr. Bruce took the lead. They hurried forward, walking -with their backs to the wall. The natives were coming towards them -slowly and each moment brought them into better view. Their figures were -perfectly nude and of a bluish-white color; looking as if they might -have been black originally, but long absence from the light of day had -faded them to the present color. They were not over five feet in height -and their bodies were slender. They were chanting a strange dirge in a -peculiar tone and this did not make the strangers’ position any -brighter. - -Slowly our friends moved toward them and the hole. They were still hid -in the shadows, but they could not expect to be out of the light of the -torches much longer, for the natives were now getting very near them. -The hole was nearly reached when a shout went up from the natives, but -instead of hurrying forward they crowded back, apparently afraid to -encounter the strangers which they saw coming toward them. - -“Keep on to the hole,” said Mr. Bruce. - -They did so, and a moment later reached it and passed through. When they -were all inside the new chamber or hall, they stopped; it being -perfectly dark. The torchbearers, after running back for a short -distance, stopped, and again resuming their chant, started forward. Our -friends stood perfectly still, and threw themselves on the defensive. -They could see the light through the doorway growing brighter and -brighter, and could hear the voices growing louder. Had they seen them, -or was the shout caused by something else? It might have been a part of -the strange proceedings which they were now going through. - -“Do nothing until they attempt to enter the opening,” said Mr. Bruce, -“then use your weapons.” - -The procession outside came nearer and the chant grew louder, as if the -strange people would in this way strengthen their courage. What would it -be, fight, or run, or neither? Whatever it was to be they would soon -know, for now they were at the doorway and passing. They are safe. - -“No, look,” said Mr. Graham, “the door——” - -It was true. A huge stone was slowly moving into the open place, making -them prisoners. - - - - - CHAPTER XXIX. - THE DEATH-TRAP. - - -“Light a torch,” said Mr. Bruce, as he saw the stone door slowly slide -into place. - -One hideous head of a native stooped and looked under the lowering door, -and shaking a torch in his hand, dodged back as if afraid of being -charged upon by the prisoners. The door fell to its place and a torch -was lighted at Mr. Bruce’s command, and an inspection of their quarters -was made. This did not take long, for the chamber was only about twenty -feet square; the ceiling was about the height of that in the hall or -passage. Try as they would they could discover no other opening, nor any -opening now, for the stone fitted the doorway so perfectly, that not -even a crack was left to show where this had been. - -“We are in for it,” said Harry. - -“Yes,” said Mr. Bruce, “and it looks very much as if we were here for -good, for there is no opening that I can see at all, and all our energy -and strength would be wasted in trying to dig our way out.” - -“We must make an effort of some kind,” said Mr. Graham, “so let us -consider the matter for a moment.” - -They all stopped, and putting their wits to work, tried to devise some -means for escape. When they realized that they were not only entombed in -a room cut out of the solid rock, but this rock, hundreds of feet -beneath the surface, the thought was not very cheering; but they were -not the ones to give up without a struggle. They had stood for some -moments thinking over their unpleasant position, and trying to formulate -some plan of procedure, when Onrai, who was probably the most helpless -of the number, began sniffing the air as if he had detected some foreign -substance in it. - -“Can you not smell something strange?” said Onrai. - -They all drew in a deep breath. Yes, there was something; a nasty odor, -which they had not noticed before, and it was getting plainer each -moment. They looked about them, but could see nothing. - -“It may be the torch,” said Mr. Graham. - -“No, it is a different smell from that, but we must extinguish the torch -or the smoke will soon suffocate us, if this other smell does not,” and -saying this, Mr. Bruce blew out the torch. But that fearful smell, what -could it be? In a short time their eyes began to smart. - -“It is smoke of some kind,” said Harry, “and I am going to find out from -where it is coming.” - -He relighted the torch, and for a moment the men could hardly see, so -thick had the smoke become in those few minutes. - -“It is stifling,” said Mr. Bruce. “Can you see where it comes from?” - -Harry, who had the torch and who was looking for the source of this new -danger, examined every nook and corner, but could find no hole or -opening. The smoke was getting thicker each moment, and the men were -gasping for breath; it would only take a very few minutes of this to -kill them all; still there seemed to be no avenue of escape. These -natives had shown great cunning in thus allowing them to get into the -chamber, imprisoning them and choke them to death with smoke. - -Mr. Bruce took the torch from Harry and started inspecting himself. He -was staggering about the room half-blinded and choked by the smoke, when -the torch fell from his hands, and falling to the floor went out. He -stooped to pick it up again, when he felt a draft near the floor; he -hurriedly relit the torch and placed it near the floor; he had to get -down onto his knees and bend close to the floor before he could see, and -there, coming in a great broad stream, he saw the smoke coming through a -crack about an inch in width, and five feet in length. The crack ran -with the floor, and Mr. Bruce at once came to the conclusion that -another stone door must be at this point, and it had been lifted to -leave a space for the smoke’s entrance. - -“Come quickly,” he called to the others, not knowing but that they had -already succumbed to the fearful smoke, as he could not see them. They -had been leaning against the opposite wall, fighting off that fearful -suffocation, when they heard Mr. Bruce’s voice. - -“Hurry, pull yourselves together and help me, and we may escape. Who has -the spear? Bring it here.” - -Harry, who had been holding on to the spear, using it for support, -staggered towards Mr. Bruce, and handed it to him mechanically. - -“Brace up there, men,” he again called out, and they shuffled towards -him almost falling. “Now, get your fingers into that crack, and lift, -lift for your lives, for it is our only chance. I will work the spear -under and hold all you can get. Now.” - -The men seemed to realize that there was a chance to escape, no matter -how faint a one, so making a despairing effort to overcome the -suffocation, which was parching their throats and bursting their heads, -placed their fingers in the cracks, and lifted. They strained every -nerve, stretched every muscle, and look, it was raising. Yes, the huge -stone was moving; now it was an inch higher, and now two inches higher, -and then there was a space of a foot under the door, but the wider -became the space the more smoke poured in, and the men were almost ready -to drop the fearful weight and fall over unconscious. Mr. Bruce -realizing this, broke the handle of the spear, and placed this under the -stone just as the men fell exhausted. - -This act of his, if delayed one second longer, would have cost them -their lives, for he had barely gotten it under the huge stone when the -men dropped. The solid straight piece of bone held the stone, however, -but would he have strength to pull the three men through the opening; -and would there not be a body of their would-be murderers on the -opposite side to fight him back? He had no time to spend in conjectures, -however, so catching Harry by the feet he pulled him to the hole; he -rolled him through and then Mr. Graham, but when it came to Onrai, he -had to roll the man over and over, his body being too heavy to move in -any other way. And he was fast giving out himself, but he must not do so -before he got him and his friends on the other side of the hole. Getting -Onrai to the opening and pushing him through, and then crawling through -himself, he looked about him for the generator of this fearful smoke. -Groping his way about, he stumbled over a large stone brazier in which -was a powdered substance, and it was this which was smoldering and -making a dense smoke. Taking his water-skin from his back, he quickly -poured its contents over the smoldering coals and extinguished them. He -was nearly fainting and he felt that he must soon give up; his eyes were -nearly blinded, he was choking and his head was bursting; he was fast -losing his senses, but he staggered about the room, and finally found an -open archway. Through this he plunged, falling to the floor, but the air -was pure here and a cooling breeze was blowing through the apartment, -and it was this draught probably, which had forced the smoke through the -crack. Mr. Bruce lay still for a moment in the refreshing air, but -realizing that his three friends were still in the stifling smoke and -unable to help themselves, he again picked himself up, and by rolling -them over and over succeeded in getting them all in the outer chamber or -corridor. - -But where were the natives? Mr. Bruce had not seen or heard them since -leaving the death-trap, and he could not account for their absence. But -he felt very thankful for their not having interfered with him, for if -they had it would have been all over with him and his friends. He had -his companions in the pure air now, and unstrapping the water-bag from -Harry’s back, he bathed their faces and poured some down each parched -throat. He worked hard with them, and at last brought them all around; -but they were not able to do much walking for a while, so while they -were recruiting, Mr. Bruce took the torch and reconnoitered. They seemed -to be in another corridor, somewhat wider than the other, but about the -same height. - -Mr. Bruce, after following this for some distance, returned to his -companions and made his report. - -“What had we better do?” asked Mr. Graham. “Turn back or go on?” - -“I say, go on,” said Mr. Bruce, “but if you think the risk is too great -and wish to return, we will do so; what do you say, Onrai?” - -“I know not what to say,” said Onrai, “but if you would like to proceed, -I am willing. I am afraid, though, I should be nothing but a hindrance -to you.” - -“No, no, Onrai, you must not say that,” said Harry. “Such an ordeal as -we have just passed through is enough to make any man go under; any man -but Mr. Bruce, and he is a wonder. How did you do it, Mr. Bruce?” - -“By pure force of will,” said Mr. Bruce. “I felt like giving up several -times, I can tell you; but a man can do a good deal, I believe, when his -life and the lives of his friends depend on it. But don’t let us talk of -that now. The question is, shall we retreat or advance?” - -“Advance, I should say,” said Harry, “what do you say, father?” - -“I am willing; but before we run into a trap again, rather let us -retreat.” - -“Agreed,” said Mr. Bruce. - -They now rose, and stretching their legs and taking another drink of -water, they advanced cautiously down the corridor; not knowing what -moment their escape might be detected and the natives of this hellhole -be after them again. They had not long to remain in suspense, when -suddenly into the corridor rushed a mob of howling naked natives, making -straight for them. - - - - - CHAPTER XXX. - THE CAVE DWELLER’S FUNERAL. - - -The howling mob came hurrying toward them; their faces distorted with -horrible grimaces, their arms flying in the air, brandishing spears like -the one found in the corridor. They came on howling, yelling and -shouting in a blood-curdling way. - -“Fall back, slowly,” said Mr. Bruce, “but keep in this corridor.” - -They retreated slowly, keeping their faces on the approaching mob. - -“If they come too near discharge your pistols in their midst,” continued -Mr. Bruce. - -The natives were gaining on them fast, but they were not moving as -quickly as they might, showing that they were undecided as to whether it -would be best to attack the strangers or not. There seemed to be about -two hundred of them, each bearing a torch in one hand and a spear in the -other. - -As time went on and they saw the hostile movements on the part of the -strangers, they became bold and moved more rapidly. They were closing up -quickly when our friends heard a shout in the rear, and looking over -their shoulders saw another mob of the natives closing in on them from -that direction. - -“Which shall it be?” said Mr. Bruce, “advance or retreat.” - -“Advance,” said Harry, “and give those howling demons a taste of lead.” - -On all the excursions our friends had carried their small arms but had -never used them; but they had these with them now and it was well that -they had taken this precaution, for nothing else would have had as much -effect on this barbarous race of underground dwellers, as the noise and -explosion of the pistols would. Our friends were still standing waiting -for the men to advance. The natives, seeing that they now had their game -safe, became wilder in their demonstrations and bolder in their -movements. The body in the rear also hurried forward and in a very short -time the strangers in this horrible place found themselves very sorely -pressed. - -“Now,” said Mr. Bruce, “make a rush and fire as you go. Harry, you and I -will take the lead, for it is best to go in twos. When the chambers of -our revolvers are empty, we will drop behind and let Mr. Graham and -Onrai take the lead. If these beasts do not turn and run, charge right -into them, for it is our only chance. Now, forward, double quick.” - -The men started on a run, discharging their revolvers as they went. At -each discharge, one of the natives would fall, for they were so tightly -wedged in the narrow passage, there was no chance of missing them. As -our friends started and the fearful noise of the pistols, as they were -discharged, rung through the cavern, the natives stopped and watched the -advance with open-mouthed wonder. Then they saw their companions -dropping one at a time as the weapons were discharged, they began to -grow uneasy, and then to move slowly backward and then, at last, as the -full force of the panic struck them, they turned and fled down the -corridor, each trying to outrun the other and trampling those under foot -who were unlucky enough to fall. On, on they flew over the hard surface -of the cave, occasionally throwing frightened glances over their -shoulders as they ran; then, seeing those strangers still after them, -they strove still harder to place a greater distance between themselves -and their pursuers. - -Those in the rear of our friends had turned and ran in the opposite -direction from which they came, when they saw their companions retreat. -They saw too the work of those awful barking, smoke-belching weapons and -thinking that they might be turned on them in the same manner, probably -thought it best to get out of the way as quickly as possible. This took -a considerable load from off the minds of our friends, for they had -feared that these howling barbarians would attack them from the rear as -they ran. After the first three or four discharges of the pistols had -started their enemies, they had discontinued firing in order to save -their ammunition, but they kept up the pace and were close on the heels -of the devils. Suddenly the mob turned to the right and disappeared. As -our friends had thrown away the lighted torch, when first surprised by -the natives they were now left in total darkness again and when the -danger disappeared, they stopped to hold a consultation. Looking back -they saw that their former pursuers had also left the corridor and this -decided them to wait a few minutes for further developments. - -“We must be careful now,” said Mr. Bruce, “for these natives may lay in -ambush and attack us, as we advance or retreat. They are cunning, as -they have shown by their smoking process, and we must be on our guard.” - -“I think they are so badly scared they will not again bother us;” said -Harry. - -“Perhaps so,” said Mr. Bruce, “but if they have a means of attacking us -without running any risk of personal injury to themselves, you may -remain assured they will do so.” - -“They are a strange race of men,” said Onrai, “I thought, when I first -looked upon your people, that you were small in stature, but these are -very much smaller and are hideous. Do you think them human?” - -“Human, yes,” said Mr. Bruce, “but of a very low order of humanity. The -race has so long inhabited these underground dwellings that they have -become wild and barbarous.” - -“They must be,” said Onrai, “for they are so unlike your race. But do -you suppose that they have always lived here or have they come from -another world like yourselves? I cannot believe that they have been -here, right under our fair Land of On, for long, for if they had we -would have known it.” - -“But how would you have known it, Onrai?” asked Mr. Graham. “You nor -yours have ever investigated nor have you ever cared to, and you might -have gone down to your graves and countless generations of those who -follow you have done the same, without ever knowing that these strange -people lived beneath your land, in the very bowels of the earth. And, we -have said so frequently, Onrai, your people have no curiosity and take -no heed of things which do not directly concern them.” - -“It is better so, I think,” answered Onrai; “for surely you can find no -happiness in an undertaking like this, can you?” - -“Well, yes, we can,” answered Mr. Bruce, “for in the first place it is a -pleasure to us to see and learn of new and strange things. That is where -one’s curiosity comes in, you see; and then we enjoy, in a way, the -excitement which such adventures always bring. But at the same time I -would not recommend any such questionable pleasures to those who have -never had any desire for them. But we are in a strange place and -predicament now to be discussing this question. We must decide on which -way we are going and how we are going to proceed.” - -“What do you say, Mr. Graham?” asked Onrai. - -“Well,” said Mr. Graham, “we have kept in one direction so far and I see -no reason for returning now. Our friends will not worry about us if we -do not return for two or three days and there are many things here which -I would like to find out before going back. We have proceeded so far and -it will be no more difficult for us to get back from a short distance -beyond here than it would be from this point. So let us go ahead.” - -“Agreed,” said Harry, “and let us keep close together, for we may need -each other’s immediate help.” - -“Yes,” said Mr. Bruce, “we must move cautiously and silently if possible -and may be we will pass the point where the natives turned off.” - -With this they moved on, feeling their way by the walls of the corridor -and keeping close together. A braver lot of men it would have been hard -to find; in fact, not one of these men felt the least fear even after -their recent experience, unless it might have been Onrai, and it was not -a fear with him, but more that unexplained uncertainty. He had been led -to think, throughout his life, that his race was the only one inhabiting -this world and he had first been visited by a number of strange people, -even coming into his company in a strange way. He had accounted for -these by believing that they had come from another planet. This had not -worried him but only a few days before, while moving through his country -his men had found a woman and child, which had evidently belonged to -another race of people. This had set him to thinking and now, down here -in the bowels of the earth, living in caves hewn out of rock, he had -found still another race, a miserable half-dwarfed race, and Mr. Bruce -had assured him that these people had lived here for ages, probably -longer than had his people in the open country above. All these things -had upset the teachings and the beliefs of a lifetime and Onrai now was -in a doubt as to what to believe. But he felt no fear really, but only a -disgust, brought on by all this doubt. - -The party calculated that they had now reached the point where the -natives had disappeared and the precautions were doubled. The floor of -the cavern at this point was strewn with spears, which had been dropped -by the frightened natives and it was hard work to walk over these in the -dark without making some noise, but no signs of natives were seen, as it -was supposed that they had hid themselves in some remote part of the -cave. After passing this point, the explorers moved faster but did not -attempt to light a torch. - -“Do you think that we can be able to find the other corridor again, the -one by which we entered this place?” asked Onrai. - -“That’s so,” said Mr. Bruce. “I had forgotten that we were now in -another corridor.” - -“No,” said Harry, “and even if we look for it we would not know where to -find it. We may wander about here for weeks or months and never find our -way out.” - -“Now, these are disagreeable things which we must not think of if we -would enjoy this adventure to the fullest,” said Mr. Graham. “I can -understand that to be lost in this hole would be fearful, but we are not -lost yet, for if we are, we are not aware of the fact; so let us not -think of that. We must try, however, to keep in this corridor or one -which leads off from it and to know at all times just how many turns we -make.” - -“It would be well for us to notch these walls occasionally, or in some -other way leave marks by which we can find our way back,” said Mr. -Bruce. - -“That is a grand idea,” said Harry, “and I will commence right here by -scratching the wall.” - -The torch was lit and Harry, taking one of the spears, attempted to chip -the wall with this, but one stone was as hard as the other, seemingly, -and the spearhead would make no impression. - -“We will have to find some other means than this,” said Harry. And -stooping, he looked over the floor of the cave, in hopes of finding -something which would cut the hard stone. But he was not successful, so -the notching was given up. - -The corridor still stretched out straight ahead of them, and they -hurried along as fast as their tired limbs would allow their doing. - -“What time is it, Mr. Bruce?” asked Harry. - -“Why, it is nine o’clock,” answered Mr. Bruce; “and to tell the truth I -feel as though it were twelve. A little rest would not go amiss.” - -“But I do not think it advisable to sleep here,” said Mr. Graham, “we -are not far enough away from that bloodthirsty mob.” - -“No,” said Mr. Bruce, “we will hurry on for a while yet, and if no side -aisle leads off into which we can hide for a few hours, we will lie down -in this, leaving watchers.” - -For another hour they trudged along, until thoroughly exhausted and -ready to drop, they decided upon taking a short rest. The first watch -fell to Harry, and he took his stand against the wall, being afraid that -if he sat down he would go to sleep. The others stretched themselves out -upon the hard floor of the corridor, and in a moment were fast asleep. -Harry put out the torch for fear of its attracting attention to them, -should any of the natives happen in the corridor. - -The moments passed on leaden wings; his eyes grew heavy and he began -pacing the corridor to keep awake; his legs were too weary to longer -support his body and he squatted down upon the floor with his back -resting against the side wall. The scenes of the day passed through his -mind in a dreamy sort of way. In a short time he caught himself dozing; -then tired nature asserted itself and his eyes closed and refused to -open again; his head dropped to one side and he slept. How long he had -slept he did not know, but he was awakened by a humming noise, which -seemed far away and yet very close. Starting up and opening his eyes he -looked far up the corridor in the direction in which they were traveling -and there he saw a procession of torches coming toward him. He hastily -awakened his companions and telling them what was up they held a -consultation. - -It seemed folly to longer go ahead, for these bodies of natives might be -met continually and to have to chase them every few hours would be -nonsense. Harry had walked up the corridor a ways, while the others were -talking, feeling his way by the wall when his hand, which went out to -touch this wall failed to come in contact with it; he tried again with -the same result and then moved his body in that direction thinking that -he might have wandered away from the wall. But there was no wall at this -point and after moving in this direction for a short distance, he struck -a match; he could not see very closely, but he understood that he was in -a side corridor or room of some kind. He at once called to his -companions and they having joined him, they lit a torch; the natives -still being a great distance up the corridor. This room was considerably -larger than the one in which they had been imprisoned and was evidently -a living chamber; for in one corner was a raised slab, on which were -dead coals and some fish offal. The room had evidently been used very -recently from the looks of the fish remains. - -On the opposite side of the room was another door, leading into another -corridor, and upon examining this corridor it was found to extend only a -short distance and end against a solid rock. But if there was a secret -door in this rock, the explorers could not see and they had no time to -give it a thorough examination, because of having to extinguish the -torch, the natives now getting very close. - -“What shall we do now?” asked Harry. - -“I think,” said Mr. Bruce, “it will be well to hide behind the slab on -which are the coals and watch the procession as it passes. They cannot -certainly be after us, for they have not had time to get so far ahead of -us. It is probably another band on their way to this part of the cave -for some purpose or other.” - -They took up their positions behind the slab, lying on their sides with -their heads just above the stone, looking for the natives. They could be -heard coming, chanting a dismal dirge; the glare of the torches already -lighting up the hall outside. “I would not care to be made a prisoner -again,” said Harry. - -“They can’t catch us in the same way here,” said Mr. Bruce, “for these -arches have no sliding doors.” - -“This may be some holiday celebration,” said Mr. Graham. - -“It may be their Day of Resis,” said Onrai, “that is if they have a Day -of Resis.” - -“I doubt their having such a day, Onrai, although we do not know what -the ceremonies of your Day of Resis are, but look they are opposite.” - -The first one of the procession now came up and our friends lowered -their heads as they passed, but the natives were seemingly oblivious of -their presence, the explorers grew bolder and raising their heads well -above the slab watched the procession. First the men came, bearing -torches stuck on the ends of spears, then came a number of men bearing -spears alone; following these were a number of women each carrying a -peculiar-shaped fish—a sort of combination fish and lizard, as it had -four short legs and feet; there were a great number of these and it took -a long time for them to pass; after them came a great number of -children, ranging, as nearly as the explorers could guess, between the -ages of five and ten; each of these children bore a small piece of coal, -which brought to the minds of our friends thoughts of the great cave -which they had crossed in coming to the Land of On. Following the -children was another body of men and it was these men who were chanting. -The wailing tones of these men, as they came nearer, were fearful to -hear and our friends felt the cold chills running down their backs. -These men also carried torches, black torches, which looked as though -they were made of sharpened pieces of coal; they made a very bright -light and but little smoke. As the men came forward it could be seen -that they were bearing a very thin slab of stone on their shoulders and -on the slab lay the body of a native. It was a funeral procession. - - - - - CHAPTER XXXI. - LOST IN THE CAVERN. - - -They watched the funeral rites, and soon afterward discovered that they -were lost in the ground, and did not know their bearings. They thought -they must be several miles within, as the direction taken from the point -where they entered the cave was several days’ journey from the City of -On, and as they had traveled nearly due south, or as nearly as they -could calculate, they must now be a good many miles from the secret -door. They might take the same corridor which they had traversed in -coming to the lake, as this would take them directly to the hole near -which the rest of the excursionists were awaiting them; but this was -dangerous and it was quite possible that before they had gone far into -this, they would again fall into the hands of the natives. - -They were in a quandary as to what to do. If they traveled to the east -in quest of the hidden door, they might not find it, and before they -could again reach the long corridor they would be overcome by hunger, -thirst and fatigue. - -“What shall we do,” asked Harry. - -“I think,” said Mr. Bruce, “it would be well to strike straight for the -north wall and when this is reached we may find another opening which -will take us in a roundabout way to the hole leading to the surface. You -know we left the windy corridor and took one to the right. This windy -corridor may lead to this cavern also. If this were so it would come out -further to the east, or may be at a point directly south of where we are -now.” - -“Even if that should be so,” said Mr. Graham, “could we beat against -that wind for so many miles?” - -“I am afraid not,” said Mr. Bruce, “but other corridors may lead from -it, which would carry us into one or the other halls which we have -already traversed, but at a point beyond all danger.” - -“It is a chance, at least,” said Harry, “that is, if this corridor leads -into the cave.” - -“Are we beneath the Land of On, now?” asked Onrai, who had spoken but -seldom since coming into this strange place. - -“No, Onrai,” said Mr. Graham, “we are under the mountains or cliffs -which surround your country. These though may be said to belong to the -Land of On, or half of them at least, for they stand on the dividing -line.” - -“It is strange,” said Onrai, “that I should never have known of all this -or that my people had never learned of it before me.” - -For a second time Onrai had spoken thus and the events of the past few -hours seemed to have made a great impression on his mind; he could not -realize that all these things had existed for years and hundreds of -years. It all seemed so improbable to one who had been taught to believe -that his race was the only people and that his or their land above the -surface, was the only country. He had seen strange things in the past -few hours the only strange things he had ever seen in his life, with the -exception of our friends, if they may be classed under this category. - -“I will have strange tales to tell my people,” said Onrai. - -“You must not tell them of these things,” said Mr. Graham, “for it would -but make them discontented and long to see them also. It would be much -better never to mention these; you can easily evade the subject when -broached and our people will never say anything.” - -“Do you think they would care to investigate?” asked Onrai. “I would -never care to come here again and I cannot believe that they would ever -care to visit this place if I should explain to them the danger and -trouble attending the trip.” - -“Yes, it would be better, would it not?” said Mr. Bruce, “to obey the -laws which have governed you for centuries, and which forbids your -prying into anything which has not already been explained by these -laws.” - -“I begin to think as you do,” said Onrai, “but I doubt my ability to -keep from my people, should they ask me, the things which I have learned -here. We have never had secrets, as you have taught me to call these -things, and I have not learned the art of withholding things which I do -not wish to say.” - -“Nothing may be said to you about your journey, and then it would be -easy enough, would it not, to keep these things to yourself?” - -“It may be so,” said Onrai. - -They were traveling in a good easy walk, and were covering considerable -ground, but they were growing weary and it was decided to rest for a few -hours. This they proceeded to do, but before they stretched out on the -hard floor, they blew out the torches so that any of the natives, who -might be prowling about, would not see them and again be on them. The -journey had been long and they had had but little rest, so when they -finally lay down and stretched out their weary limbs, their eyes soon -closed and all was forgotten in a very few moments. The hard floor of -the cave, the memories of the recent events, the fear of not again -finding their way out of the dark hole, these things could not keep them -awake for they were worn out, mind and body, and once they had fallen -into a reclining position, they were soon oblivious to everything. - -They had been sleeping for hours, it seemed to Harry, when he was -awakened by a distant cry. It sounded to him like the yell of the -natives, when they had first discovered the strangers. He looked about -him half dreamily but could see nothing and turned over, thinking he -would sleep awhile longer as the others had not yet awakened. He was -just falling off again, when that cry broke out just a little shriller -than before. This time Harry jumped to his feet, certain now of its -being a human cry. He looked about him, he even took a few steps away -from his sleeping companions, and stopping again, listened. No, he could -hear nothing; still, he was sure that he had not been mistaken. All -sleep had now been knocked out of him, and feeling refreshed he knew -that he had been sleeping for some time. He walked over to his -companions and awakened them, but before he had time to interfere or -explain to them what it was that had awakened him, Mr. Bruce had lit a -match, and with this, the torch. Harry made a movement as if he would -extinguish this, and not having heard the sound after this second -awakening, he thought there might be just a possibility of his having -been mistaken. But he told his companions of the occurrence so that they -might not blame him if anything should come of it later. - -“I could not say that you were mistaken, Harry,” said Mr. Bruce, “but it -seems very probable that we would see some light if these natives were -again on our track.” - -“Yes,” said Harry, “I don’t suppose they have dark lanterns which would -give them light, but would still keep the light hid from us.” - -“They might have such lights,” said Mr. Graham, “but we would see the -reflection on the ground, at least.” - -They had now started again when Harry stopped, saying: - -“How do we know that we are moving in the right direction? We may have -turned completely in our moving about, and may now be making a bee line -for the lake.” - -The party stopped, looking at each other in a puzzled way. Mr. Bruce’s -face lighted up though as he asked: - -“Did you touch my torch, Harry?” - -“No,” answered Harry. - -“Well, and then we can depend on it, that we are moving in the same -direction that we were before, for I laid down the torch with the burnt -end looking in the direction we were going when I laid down, and when I -picked it up and lighted it again, after you had awakened us, I remember -I was standing facing the same way, and I did not turn again before we -started.” - -“But that tells nothing,” said Mr. Graham, “for we may be walking round -and round in a circle not a mile in circumference. We have nothing to -guide us, and it very often occurs, in cases of this kind, that the -travelers who think themselves miles away from their starting point -will, the next moment, bring up at the same spot.” - -The friends stood and looked at each other as Mr. Bruce said this; the -terrible truth flashing upon them. It was only too true; they were -helpless in this great dark cavern. They might wander until starved and -famished, and still be miles from the encircling wall, or may be but a -few feet from it. It would only be chance if they should come up to the -wall; not chance either, for even chance was barred in this Egyptian -darkness. It would be the hand of Providence which saved them if they -should ever now escape from this cave. If they had followed the lake -until the bridge had been reached, they could then have followed the old -path to the hidden door, and in that way have gotten out. But no, the -only thought they had in getting away from the scene of such carnage, -was to leave it far behind and to reach their friends as soon as -possible. - -They realized their mistake, but now it was too late. The thought -completely prostrated them as its full significance dawned upon them. - -“But we must not give up while there is strength left,” said Mr. Bruce; -“so let us go on in some way, even if we are bearing right away from our -goal. We may be right, you know. Anyway we will never find our way out -of this by standing still.” - -They again took up their way, but with a halfheartedness, which made -every step a task and every movement painful. It was strange how these -strong men, who had just gotten up from a refreshing sleep, well and -hearty, should so soon be changed to despondent beings; their faces -looking years older and their gait indicating feebleness. Such is the -change which the awful sense of complete helplessness had wrought in -these men. They had hit upon a possibility, even a probability, and all -else had been forgotten from that moment they had given themselves up -for lost, lost in this vast cavern, which had probably been the tomb of -many others. - -When these thoughts took possession of them, they could not be persuaded -that there was any possibility of escape, and it was no wonder they lost -hope so quickly, for here was a cave miles in extent, without a guiding -light or post to beckon them on. All was dark and still as the death -which would so soon claim them. For some strange reason, Onrai seemed to -be more affected than any of the others. He said but little, but his -face was painful to look at, so frightfully changed had it become. He -shuffled along, his shoulders bent and feet dragging over the ground -like a man of eighty. - -Occasionally he would mutter to himself: - -“I have missed my Day of Resis!” - -This seemed to be the thing which was worrying him. - -“Wait,” said Harry, and they all stopped suddenly, for this was the -first word which had been spoken by any of the party excepting Onrai. -“When wandering in the cave, as we came,” went on Harry, “I remember -seeing pieces of coal lying along the path. The thought has just -occurred to me that these marked the path, or else how could the natives -find their way. Now, if we could find these.” - -“But these would be as hard to find as the border wall,” said Mr. -Graham. - -“True,” said Harry, his face again falling, “but it is another chance -and this makes two.” - -This cheered them but little, however, and despair took possession of -them completely a few moments later. They ought to have reached the wall -hours before, yet there were no signs of it. Suddenly they were brought -to a stand by the same cry, which had awakened Harry. There was no -mistaking it now; it was human and right in front of them. - -Our friends stopped. There was no mistaking the cry now; it was human -and only a few feet ahead of them. They peered through the gloom but -could see nothing; the man, whoever he was, could not be far away, so -they moved forward and a moment later a dark mass was seen lying on the -floor of the cave just ahead of them. As they hurried up to this, -another cry went up from the heap. Our friends now came up to the object -and found it to be a native. As they approached and stood over him, he -raised his head and looked at them in a half-scared way and then tried -to crawl away from them. Seeing them following him he raised to his feet -and staggered along for a short distance but again fell. The party now -saw that his left side from knee to shoulder was badly lacerated, but -how had he come into this condition? Had he been wounded in a fight or -in a blast and brought to this fearful place to die? - -Although this man was probably one of their captors and would have -helped to kill them if they had not turned the tables on them, still the -man’s plight was so pitiful and his condition so helpless that their -sympathy went out to him at once and coming up close to where he had -fallen, Mr. Graham stooped and taking the bag of water from his back, -poured its contents over the raw wounds of the native. He writhed under -the momentary pain, but realizing that they wished to help him, he tried -to facilitate their good acts by turning his side to them, exposing the -wound. He kept looking at Onrai, as if the King had a fascination for -him, which he could not resist and at last he raised his hand and -motioned to Onrai to approach. Onrai came up to him and the native -looked at him for fully a moment, then addressed him in the language of -On. - -Onrai started back completely surprised by hearing his own language -spoken by this man. The native’s face fell, showing that he had built -much on this disclosure to the King and the result had bitterly -disappointed him. - -“Speak to him, Onrai,” said Mr. Bruce. - -Onrai again stepped up to the native and asked him how he had become -acquainted with his language. - -“The story is long and I am hurt,” answered the man, “but if you will -carry me to the lake, where my companions were killed, and let me there -wash my wounds, I will tell you all.” - -“The lake,” said Mr. Graham, “why, my good man, that is many miles -away.” - -“No,” answered the man, “it is only a short distance from here.” - -Our friends looked at each other with astonishment; they had seen the -lake upon their entrance; their fears then had been realized; they had -been describing a circle and were now but a few feet from the starting -point. But there was now hope and the men carefully lifted the native -and carried him in the direction indicated by him and in less than five -minutes they were again standing by an underground lake. The man was -laid on the floor of the cave and his wounds washed again with water. -Harry tore from his tunic a piece of the silk and this was bound about -the wound. - -“Do you know a way by which we can reach the death chamber without -traversing that part of the cave where your people live?” Onrai asked. - -“I do,” said the man, “but I could not explain so that you could -understand.” - -“But if we took you with us, could you guide us?” asked Onrai. - -“But am I strong enough to walk?” asked the man, and he tried to rise to -his feet. - -“You may be able to walk a part of the way and we will carry you the -remainder,” said Onrai. - -“I can guide you,” said the stranger, and his face lighted up with hope -as he thought that he might yet see that great outside world of which he -had heard. The more the native thought of this, the more probable it -seemed to him and with this great hope springing into life came renewed -energy, and after awhile, when Mr. Bruce had bandaged the wounds well -and he had been given something to eat he stood erect and declared that -he could walk as well as ever. But this he could not do, although with -help he got along very well for a time, and then Onrai picked him up in -his powerful arms and carried him as if he were a babe. - -Before leaving the lake they had caught some fish after the method of -the natives and had cooked them over a slow fire. This they hoped would -last them until they reached the upper world. They found the line of -coals and found it easy work to follow it. The way was long but not -tedious, still there was that desire to leave this place which made the -time long and the journey anything but pleasant. The native was doing -very well with the help of Onrai and would very frequently relate such -things concerning his people and country which would help to while away -the time. - -“We do not know,” said he, “when first our people came into this -underground world, nor do we know from whence they came; but we do know -from traditions handed down, that we have had this world many, many -ages. Then our old tunnels have been abandoned many ages, how many we -know not, nor do we know why these have been laid aside for new ones, -unless it be because new ones had to be built in order to keep down our -population.” - -“What do you mean by that?” inquired Mr. Bruce. - -“Why,” said the native, “our people increase very rapidly and we can -only keep them within bounds by constantly blasting these tunnels. Each -blast costs the life of one of our men.” - -“But what of the women,” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“The women and criminals are all fed to the water-monster,” said the -man. - -“But are none of these placed in the death chamber?” again asked Mr. -Bruce. - -“None,” answered the native. “The death chamber is only for the men. At -the end of these long tunnels, is the Tunnel of Wind, which keeps a -circulation of air in all of them. The wind flies through this tunnel, -making no sound and giving no warning, and when once in its awful clutch -you are lost.” - -“But how do you embalm the bodies of your men,” questioned Mr. Bruce. - -“With a preparation of coal and yellow stone, which we find in one part -of our country. These are pounded into a powder and are then mixed with -fish oil and rolled into small cakes and left to dry. These we burn -beneath the bodies and the smoke puts them in a state of preservation.” - -Our friends had now reached the wall and were about to enter the tunnel -indicated by the native when a body of natives jumped forth only a few -feet distant and rushed onto them. The explorers started back and seeing -that there was a great number of them, decided on retreating. They -accordingly followed the wall to the east, running as fast as they could -with the wounded native. The natives were following them closely, and -our friends, seeing another tunnel, opening out from the cave, turned -into it and hurried forward. The natives were hurrying after them. On -they rushed covering mile after mile, until breath and strength were -nearly exhausted. The natives had called out to them in their language -to drop the one of their number which Onrai was carrying. The man -interpreted this to Onrai but it only had the effect of making him hold -him all the tighter. But after a while the natives began to drop off one -by one and our friends were thinking of turning on them, when they saw -their tunnel ending in one running at right angles with it. Hurriedly -they pushed forward and were just on the edge of the cross-tunnel, when -the native called out: - -“Not in there, it is the Tunnel of Wind;” but it was too late. They were -launched into it and were even now in the power of the mighty wind. - - - - - CHAPTER XXXII. - THE TORTUOUS TRAMP. - - -Our friends might have turned and faced the natives but they were still -a great number of them following, and the capture of the strangers would -have been certain if they had tried to fight it out. Their treatment at -the hands of these natives had been such that they might expect nothing -else but death if they were again captured, so the thought of taking any -risk by fighting had not occurred to them until the last moment. There -was but one way to escape these beings and that was by flight and they -had been so intent on making their escape in this way, that they had -forgotten for the moment the windy corridor, their former experience in -this and the experience of the native of On, which their new companion -had so recently related. They had rushed madly forward, caring little -where the cross corridor led, so long as it enabled them to keep ahead -of their pursuers. And they had dashed into the windy corridor, not -giving it a thought and were now being blown through this at break neck -speed. - -It would be impossible for human being to stand alone in this gale, and -in an instant the men were thrown violently forward and were now rolling -over and over unable to stop themselves. Onrai, although he carried the -wounded native, was the first in the tunnel and was now some feet ahead -of his companions, but was being borne on just as fast as the others. -The native had fallen behind him and his wounded body was suffering -fearful tortures in this violent exercise; each time the wounded side -would strike the rock a cry of pain would escape him. Mr. Bruce was -right back of the native, and after a while managed to call to Onrai to -work himself toward the wall, if possible, and get head on to the wind -and thus offer less resistance to the awful gale. Onrai immediately -began edging his way toward the wall and would have succeeded in doing -this if the native had not struck him full force on the side, thus -starting him rolling again. But Onrai had caught the native and had -clung fast to him and they were not moved nearly so rapidly, being -together. As a consequence Mr. Bruce, Mr. Graham and Harry came bowling -along and bumped into them, and as they did this the men grabbed each -other, and held on, and in this way they were all joined and the wind -could no longer move them. - -“Now,” said Mr. Bruce, “let us get into position and try to regain our -feet, and in single file, as we did upon our first entering this -corridor, try to resist its awful power.” - -They worked around until one was immediately behind the other, and at a -given signal, first rose to one knee and then to both knees, and in this -way continued until they were standing on their feet. The poor native -asked them to leave him in the corridor to die, but they would not hear -of this, and Onrai again threw him over his shoulder, when they were -ready to move. They started, leaning well back so to offer greater -resistance to the wind, but it was hard work tramping along in this -darkness, frequently hitting up against the walls, and bruising their -already sore bodies. And then the uncertainty of where the tunnel would -finally land them, was making things all the more unpleasant. They could -not possibly guess where this would lead them; they had had some -experience in the tunnel before, and had heard more about it from the -native, but all this had told them nothing. They knew that this gale of -wind must have an outlet some place, but what sort of place was this? -Would it be a shaft leading to the surface as did the shaft which seemed -to be its source? Would it take them back to the great cavern, or to the -center of the earth, or where? The thought was maddening, but they could -do nothing but go with it, wherever it might lead them. - -They had gone on in this way for miles, they thought, and their bodies -were bruised and exhausted; still there was no way to stop and rest even -for a moment; they would have to keep up the awful rush until too -exhausted to longer keep their feet, they would drop and be blown—where? -To death, surely. Onrai, who was still carrying the native, tried hard -to keep up, but he was fast giving out, and our friends knew that when -he should do so, their mainstay was gone, and hope might be abandoned. -Onrai suddenly stumbled, and would have fallen had not Mr. Bruce, who -was next to him, held fast, thus saving him and may be the others. - -“What is wrong, Onrai,” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“It was something on the floor,” said Onrai. He had hardly said this -when he stumbled again, and this time Mr. Bruce lost his hold, and Onrai -went down bearing the native with him. The others threw themselves back, -and managed to save themselves from falling. - -“Can you get up, Onrai?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“I will try in a moment,” said Onrai. “But can you take the native?” - -The others now held on to Mr. Bruce, and he stooped and raised the -native. - -“Can you stand?” asked Mr. Bruce of the native. - -“Yes,” the man answered; but when Mr. Bruce lowered him to the ground, -the poor fellow’s legs gave way under him, and he would have fallen had -not Mr. Bruce held him. He then raised him again with the others’ help, -and threw the man over his shoulder. - -Onrai had risen and had again taken his place at the head of the column. -But they had noticed something; the wind was not blowing so violently in -this part of the tunnel. They could not account for this, neither did -they try to, but it made their progress much easier. And another thing -which was being forced on their notice, was the great number of loose -stones which covered the floor of the tunnel at this point; it must be -that the tunnel here had never been finished completely, or it might be -that the rock, being softer at this point, had crumbled and fallen from -the ceiling. They were suddenly brought up by Onrai striking violently -against a rock, which seemed to end the tunnel. For a moment they stood -still, Onrai having been shocked in being brought up so suddenly. - -“What is it, now?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“It is the end of the tunnel,” said Onrai, “or else we have suddenly -turned in our course and have struck the side wall.” - -“Move to your right, and see if there be an opening,” said Mr. Bruce. - -Onrai did so and then moved forward again. - -“It seemed to be a projection,” said Onrai. - -He kept his hand on the rock and followed its curves closely until they -were on the other side of it and at last they were out of the fearful -wind. - -“Have you a match?” asked Mr. Graham of Mr. Bruce. “If you have, light a -torch and let us see each other. Onrai move about and see what kind of a -place we are in.” - -Mr. Bruce fumbled about his tunic for a moment and then produced a -match; this flickered for a moment as he applied it to the torch and -then a bright light lit up the scene about them. They were surprised at -the strange scene, for they were no longer in the smooth walled and -floored tunnel, but in a natural cave, which looked very much like the -great cavern; but whether it was the same or not, they could not say. -The ceiling was high above their heads and could just be seen in the dim -rays of light. The wall to which belonged the projecting rock, behind -which they were now standing, was ribbed and seamed and was the only one -to be seen. The cavern had widened until they could not see across it. - -“If this be the large cave then we are safe, for all we have to do is to -look for the hidden door,” said Harry. - -“But I do not think it is the same,” said Mr. Bruce, “for the reason, -that never, in the large cavern, did we feel this draught or wind.” - -“That is so;” said Harry, “we must have struck another cave altogether, -and it is probably all the worse for us that we have.” - -“Why do you think so?” asked Onrai. - -“Why, because we knew how to get out of the other, but how to find an -opening to the outside world here, we have no idea.” - -“I believe, though,” said Mr. Bruce, “that if we can hold out longer, we -will come to a shaft leading up to the surface.” - -“There must be some great hole leading to the surface, which causes this -draught.” - -“It would be well for us to take some rest before trying it again,” said -Mr. Graham. - -“But what of the poor native?” asked Onrai. - -They had forgotten him in their surprise at finding themselves where -they did, and the poor fellow had laid on the floor of the cave almost -dead with pain and fatigue. They went to work on him, though, and used -very nearly all of the little water left, bathing his wounds. Then they -rearranged the bandages and fixed them as comfortable as possible, so -that he might rest; then they also laid down and were soon asleep. - -The native laid for a long time with his eyes closed, completely -exhausted; but he could not sleep, and after a while his eyes again -opened, and he looked about him. The torch had been left in a crevice in -the projecting rock, and it threw its fitful glare about them. The -ceiling arched far above them, the torchlight throwing long shadows -along its rugged crevices; the wall at his side he could follow with his -eyes for some distance, but it was then lost in the gloom. He tried to -penetrate this gloom and look far beyond and find there a ray of that -same light which he had heard his friends tell about. If he could only -see such a light, then he would know that these kind companions, who had -done so much for him, when they could have left him behind to die, he -would know then that they were safe, and that they would again reach -their friends. He cared little for himself, for his life had never known -any of that strange feeling which he had heard his present companions -speak of. He was nothing but a burden and retarded their progress. Oh, -if he could but die before they again awakened, it would be so much -better for both him and those who had so long kept him with them, even -when they would have been fully justified in leaving him behind. -Suddenly he starts and half rises. What was that he saw away off there -in the darkness? Was it a light? Yes, several of them. They were very -dim; in fact he could hardly say they were lights, but they surely -resembled the lights of torches in the distance, and they were growing -thicker. He could see great numbers of them moving about like -will-o’-the-wisps, or was it his fevered brain which was calling up -these phantom lights? He raised a little higher to look at the things -about him so as to assure himself that he was still in his right mind -and would then let his gaze penetrate the gloom, seeking the strange -lights. - -Yes, he could not be mistaken, they were torchlights; but did they -belong to his people or some other strange people, who inhabited this -part of the cave. He could not tell this, and as he was not certain that -there were others near them, he determined to awaken his companions. -Leaning over and touching Onrai, who was lying next to him, he wakened -him and then pointing into the darkness said, “Look, do you not see the -lights?” - -Onrai looked long and carefully before he spoke, then said, “Yes, they -must be,” and waking his other companions he bade them look also. - -It was soon decided by all that there were others in the cavern beside -themselves, but who these others were was the question, and could only -be answered by getting closer to them. Eating a small lunch of fish and -merely wetting the lips with the little water which they had, they again -started, Onrai carrying the native. They blew out the torch before -starting, thinking it best not to attract attention with it. - -The strong wind, too, which still blew from out the tunnel, would make -it almost impossible to keep the torch lit. So they stumbled along in -the darkness, feeling their way as best they could, but receiving -frequent bumps, which bruised their bodies and exhausted their patience; -but they kept the flickering lights in view. - -The air was, for some reason or other, getting much cooler, and the -explorers began to shudder, and hurry as they would, the exercise would -not keep them warm. Every moment now the wind blew colder, and seemed to -come from a direction to the right. The scant clothing, which had -covered their bodies at the start, had mostly been torn away in the -rough experiences which they had had, and their bodies were almost laid -bare to this merciless cold. And the poor native had nothing on -whatever, excepting a bandage, which bound his side. - -They were nearing the lights very rapidly, and now dark forms could be -seen moving about. But the cold had grown so intense, they doubted if -they would be able to hold out until they reached the strangers. When -these were reached what might they expect? Would they be antagonistic or -friendly; they could not be a body of the tribe which they had already -found, for the native now with them had never heard of such a cold -region as this, and had never seen one of his tribe wearing clothing, -and it would be an utter physical impossibility to remain here and not -wear clothing. - -But who were they then? It mattered little, for they must seek aid of -them. So stumbling and falling, their benumbed flesh freezing to the -bone, they hurried on as fast as they could. They had again clasped -hands for fear of getting lost one from the other, and in this way one -helped the other. - -A horrible rumbling sound now broke on their ears, and grew louder as -they advanced. They were getting closer and closer to the men, and far -beyond them they could now see one bright ray of daylight. This spurred -them on until completely exhausted, their bodies frozen and bleeding, -they fell at the feet of the surprised torchbearers. - -They had come to the cave of ice. - - - - - CHAPTER XXXIII. - AGAIN IN THE WORLD OF LIGHT. - - -The ice-cutters, for it were they, had never before in their lives been -surprised. They saw coming out of that inky blackness, from far up that -windy quarter, where none of their people had ever dared to go, a party -of half-clad human beings, who staggered on as if intoxicated and, at -last, falling at their feet. They hurriedly gathered about the fallen -fugitives and throwing restoratives in their faces, tried to make out -who they were and if they were any of their people, but these had been -rolled about the floor of the windy cavern so long, that what with -bruises and dirt, they were unrecognizable. Onrai, who still had enough -life left to whisper a few words, motioned for one of the men to stoop; -the man did so and started back with still greater surprise, as Onrai -said: - -“Hurry, get us out of here into the sun. Don’t you know me? I am Onrai.” - -The man could not speak for a moment, but then, regaining his senses, -said: - -“It is Onrai, the King, and his guests; hurry or they will perish.” - -In an instant those about them began to take from their bodies the warm -garments and place them about the half-frozen bodies of our friends. -Then, taking them in their strong arms, they hurried towards the -entrance of the cave. This was soon reached, and in the villa just -outside, the attendants were soon working hard with their benumbed and -bruised bodies. They were first plunged in a bath of warm water and then -rubbed down thoroughly; then their wounds were dressed, after which they -were placed on comfortable couches and made to rest. The poor -underground native was treated likewise, and a suit of the cool silk was -thrown about his body after his wound was dressed. He could not -understand why all this was being done to him, but he could appreciate -the delicate touches and the comfort which he was deriving from the -treatment. Everything was strange to him; the peculiar white light of -the sun, the green fields, the great shady trees, the high elephants, -which he could see from his apartment stalking about the garden, and -this grand house, to which he had been brought. And the food which they -had given him was so different from the fish, which had always been his -only diet; and the cooling honey wine, which they poured down his -throat. - -There was comfort in all this though and very shortly, his wound dressed -and pain gone, his weary body soothed by the bath and treatment which -the natives had given him, he fell asleep at last; his troubles ended, -with no care on his wearied mind. - -It had been early morning when our friends had emerged from the cave and -after being thoroughly revived, they fell asleep and it was late in the -evening before they awakened. - -“Onrai,” said Harry, “will you ask one of the attendants what day this -is?” - -Onrai did so, and turned to him and said: - -“We have been gone just six days, according to your method of measuring -time.” - -“Six days,” exclaimed they all in chorus, “impossible.” - -“But then,” continued Mr. Bruce, “when we consider how far we have -traveled, we can hardly expect that we have been gone less time than -that.” - -“Yes, it has been just six days,” said Onrai, “but remember where we -were when we started and see where we are now. Why, our friends are -three days march from us, that is, easy marches, but I think we can -overtake them in two days by not taking too long rests.” - -“But when shall we start?” asked Mr. Bruce, “our friends must be worried -about us.” - -“Just whenever you wish to,” answered Onrai, “to-night if you choose.” - -“Why not to-night?” asked Harry, “we still have some hours left and -going through the cool avenue at night would be grand.” - -“Well, so it shall be,” said Onrai, “we will travel with elephants so -that, if we get sleepy, we can rest in the howdahs.” - -“And can I go with you?” asked the stranger. - -“You can, my good man,” said Onrai. “Our friends would want to see and -thank the one who has saved us; for if you had not helped us out that -night, or day in the tunnel, we might have been wandering until now and -on until death relieved us, in that awful hole.” - -Elephants were brought and the party again took up their way. The -elephants had been kept in an easy gait and had covered many miles and -our friends hoped soon to reach the rest of the party. - -“When shall we take up the journey again to the fields of diamonds, -Onrai?” asked Mr. Bruce, as they rode along. - -“Just as soon as you are all ready to start,” answered Onrai. - -“And how far are we from the field,” asked Harry. - -“Fully two hundred miles, as you would compute it,” answered Onrai. - -“Then it will take us about ten days, will it not?” asked Harry. - -“Yes, unless we make longer marches,” said Onrai, “and that is hardly -necessary.” - -“Not at all necessary,” answered Mr. Bruce, “and we can, by taking easy -stages, better see the strange country through which we are passing.” - -“Yes,” said Onrai, “and the scenery will be wilder and different in some -respects.” - -“Ten days to go and fourteen days to return,” said Harry. “That will -take pretty near a month.” - -“Yes, it will be fully that long before we return,” said Onrai, “and -besides we will return by a different route, which will take us -considerably longer. The new route will be over the regular macadamized -roads, which, for many miles, are used very infrequently; but they are -always kept in first-class repair, so that we will experience no -discomforts for having left our onyx-floored avenue.” - -“It is surely delightful riding over this perfect avenue,” said Mr. -Graham, “everything though is delightful in this fair land. How -different from that fearful country far down below us.” - -“Probably only to us who know the difference,” said Onrai. “They may -have their pleasures and comforts and hopes and Day of Resis. We know -only what this man has taught us, and he has told us little.” - -Again Onrai had mentioned The Day of Resis. What did it mean? - - - - - CHAPTER XXXIV. - AGAIN WITH FRIENDS. - - -The day came to a close; the stars came out and the cavalcade came -nearer its destination. They had traveled now nearly twenty-four hours -constantly, and if it were not for meeting their friends, they might -wish that the journey would last as long again. It had been more than -pleasant and was so restful, after the long tramp underground, that they -appreciated it more for this reason. A little longer and they were in -sight of the hole through which they had gone into the underground -world. It was dark now and they could not see very far through the -fields, but near where they thought the hole ought to be, there were -lights flickering about. It seemed strange that there should be lights -here at this time in the evening, for there was nothing to call them -there. - -“What do you suppose brings these lights here?” asked Mr. Bruce of -Onrai. - -“I can’t tell,” said Onrai, “but we will ascertain.” - -He gave the leader of the caravan orders to turn into the field on the -left and make for the lights. As they came nearer they could see that a -number of men were standing about the hole, while others were lying -about in the grass as if resting. Near by stood a group of women -attendants and standing with them were Enola, Nellie, Mrs. Graham and -Sedai. The parade of elephants seemed to attract their attention and -they were now watching them closely and had even started to move toward -them. The cavalcade stopped, the elephants fell on their haunches and -our friends scrambled from their howdahs and ran towards the ladies. - -“Oh,” they cried, as they, too, hurried towards the travelers. - -Mrs. Graham threw herself into her husband’s arms, Nellie fell on -Harry’s shoulder, and Enola? Well, she seemed for a moment to be -puzzled, but then walked up very gracefully and placed both hands in -Onrai’s. Onrai, however, was not satisfied with this and pulling Enola -toward him, he threw his great arms about her and pressed her to his -heart. - -“Are you glad to see me back again, Enola?” said he. - -“Why, certainly, Onrai,” said Enola, as soon as she could extricate -herself from his arms, “more than glad, for we thought you were lost.” - -“We were,” answered Onrai, “and the thought of perishing without again -seeing you, nearly drove me mad.” - -“But did it not grieve you, too, to think that you would not again see -your own people?” asked Enola, trying to call the conversation from -herself. - -“Yes,” said Onrai, “but it was a different grief. My religion has taught -me to expect that I will meet my people again in the next world, and -this softened the pain caused by parting from them. But you,” and here -Onrai again clasped her in his arms, “I have just found you and learned -to love you, with all that love, which has been kept locked in my heart -for years waiting for you to come and break the locks which held it -captive. It seemed my life had only commenced when I met you, Enola, and -the thought that, at the very beginning of our happiness, I was to be -taken from you forever, was maddening; and you, Enola, did you not -grieve when you thought I was lost?” and Onrai asked this with all the -simplicity of a child. - -“Yes, Onrai,” answered Enola, “I grieved for all of you.” - -“We found a strange people, Enola,” said Mr. Bruce, “but their -attractiveness lay only in their strangeness.” - -“What did you say, Mr. Bruce?” asked Enola, “a strange people in the -bowels of the earth? It is hard for me to believe this. Are you not -jesting?” and Enola seemed incredulous. - -“No,” said Onrai, “we fell in with a strange race of people down there, -and it was they who detained us.” - -“Tell me all about them,” said Enola, and she was all attention at once. - -“Not now, Enola,” said Mr. Bruce, “wait until we have reached the villa, -and all are together, and we will give you a full account of our six -days’ jaunt in the Land, not of, but under On.” - -“I think,” said Mr. Graham, “this is the happiest moment of my life.” - -“Why, my dear,” said Mrs. Graham, “I have often heard you make the same -remark concerning the eventful time when you first met me.” - -“Why, certainly, wife,” answered her husband, “that was the happiest -moment which I had known even up to the present time, but now you see I -am happier for having been brought out of a position where I never -expected to see you again.” - -“And was it as bad as that, father?” asked Nellie. - -“Quite,” answered her father; “in fact, it was dollars to cents that we -would never again see daylight, but it all goes to show how little we -know of what will transpire in our little lives.” - -“Yes, things looked pretty dark in every way,” said Harry. “In fact, we -couldn’t see our hands before our eyes. And all chances for escape were -equally dark and obscure. Where do you suppose we were, mother?” - -“Why, somewhere down there in the bowels of the earth,” answered Mrs. -Graham. - -“Well, we were in the great cave, which so nearly cost us our lives.” - -“Where did you come out of this wonderful place?” asked Enola, “I have -not heard that yet; and here you have been back nearly twenty minutes.” - -“Why, we came out in the ice cave,” said Harry. - -“The ice cave,” exclaimed Enola, “and is this then a part of the great -cavern?” - -“All the same,” said Harry; “or no, not the same, but connected by a -tunnel. But if we don’t reach the villa shortly, Mr. Bruce will have -little to tell.” - -They had now reached the grounds surrounding the villa, and after a -short walk through these, they mounted the terrace, and taking seats, -Mr. Bruce told the strange story. - - - - - CHAPTER XXXV. - A BLACK SURPRISE. - - -The party rose early the morning following the story of Mr. Bruce. All -were happy now that they were together again and all were eager to take -up the journey. - -“What do you think about starting to-day?” said Mr. Bruce. - -“I am perfectly willing, if the others are,” answered Onrai. - -“We have been here now about eight days,” said Enola, “and the time has -seemed long without you all, and the place has become lonesome. Why not -start this morning?” - -“Well, we will, if that is the way you look at it,” said Onrai. - -“I would like to extend this journey much farther, if such a thing could -be possible,” said Mr. Bruce, as they rode along. - -“But why?” asked Onrai. - -“Well, because it has been so full of pleasant surprises and adventures. -It is these things which have made our stay in On a pleasant one, and we -have found many of them on this journey and elsewhere.” - -“It has been fruitful of these things,” said Onrai, “but even these -might grow monotonous in time.” - -“Yes, I suppose so, but I could not imagine so at this time,” said Mr. -Bruce. - -“To us, of course,” said Onrai, “none of the things in On are new; but -the adventures under this land were of a very startling nature, and I -would not care to have many like it.” - -“It is not at all likely that you will ever experience another such a -one,” said Mr. Graham. - -“I cannot tell,” said Onrai. “There is still a mystery to solve which -worries me considerably.” - -“And what is that?” asked Mr. Graham. - -“Have you forgotten the black woman and child which you found lying in -the track of the storm?” asked Onrai. - -“Oh,” exclaimed Mr. Graham, “I had forgotten it for the time.” - -“It has puzzled me not a little, and I do not know now whether it be -woman or beast, but if it be woman, where did she come from?” - -“The storm comes from the heavens,” said Mr. Bruce, “and could not the -woman have been brought with it from one of the distant worlds?” - -“Yes,” said Onrai, “but why should she come to us dead?” - -“The storm, in its great fury, killed her,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“I cannot understand why it should,” said Onrai, “for it killed none in -our world.” - -“No,” said Mr. Bruce, “but you forget that it nearly killed Enola.” - -“No, I can never forget that,” said Onrai, and he looked up quickly at -Enola, as if afraid now, that she might not be with him. - -“Hush, do not speak of unpleasant things to-day,” said Enola. “We can -put in our time to so much better advantage. See, is not the country -beautiful hereabouts?” - -“It grows wilder as we go farther and the scenes change very frequently. -We can just see the great cliffs on the western side of On and they do -not look so far away, do they? And we can hardly believe in looking at -them that it would take ten days to reach them. And look, there is a -column of smoke arising from them. What causes that?” - -The men looked at the strange sight, but could give no answer. There was -certainly a column of smoke ascending from what looked like the cliffs, -but this might have been at a point far this side of them. Still the -sight was very unusual, in fact, it was entirely unaccountable and it -puzzled all the natives as well as the strangers. - -“It could not be some of your people burning the debris left by the -storm,” said Mr. Bruce to Onrai. - -“No, that smoke comes from far away,” said Onrai, “but it would take a -tremendous fire to cause smoke which could be seen from here.” - -“I should say,” said Mr. Graham, “that the smoke rose from the cliff and -not from any point this side.” - -“Yes, but what would make such a smoke at the cliffs?” asked Onrai. - -“I cannot answer that,” said Mr. Graham, “But I think that you will find -that I am right. Have you ever had any active volcanoes in your -country?” - -“I do not understand you,” said Onrai. - -“You do not know the meaning of the word?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“No,” answered Onrai. - -“Well, volcanoes, in our world,” said Mr. Bruce, “are mountains, through -the sides of which great volumes of molten rocks and sand and earth come -rushing and pouring.” - -Onrai looked in astonishment at this, never having heard of such a thing -before. - -For the rest of the day nothing else was looked after or talked about -but the column of smoke in the far northwest. In the evening, after the -arrival at the villa in which the night was to be spent and after the -party had been somewhat separated into little groups, Mr. Bruce found -himself for the first time during the day, alone with Mr. Graham and -immediately the conversation reverted to the column of smoke. - -“What do you think of it, anyway?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“I think there can be but one answer to that question,” said Mr. Graham, -“and that is that the column of smoke belongs to a volcano, that the -volcano was the outcome of the earthquake and the first cause of the -terrible storm.” - -At this moment a song rose on the night air, which, for its brilliancy, -eclipsed anything yet heard by the strangers, and immediately after -Onrai came on to the terrace and stood with bowed head. Mr. Bruce and -Mr. Graham watched him for a moment and then going up to him Mr. Bruce -asked, “What is it, Onrai?” - -“It is the song of joy,” answered Onrai, “of those who will participate -in the chiefest ceremonies of the coming Day of Resis.” - -The party had now been out nine days on this last stage of the journey, -and to-morrow would bring them to the villa near the field of diamonds. -The column of smoke had grown in size, and was much blacker at this -point than when first seen. There was no longer any doubt about its -coming from the top of the cliffs, or else from a point directly back of -them, and there was scarcely any further doubt about its coming from a -volcano, for even at this distance, some thirty-five miles, as near as -Mr. Bruce could calculate, a regular storm of flying cinders began to -fall, covering them completely. - -They watched the great volume of smoke anxiously, and as they came -nearer to it, and as it grew larger and blacker, and as they could see -no real cause for it, they began to regard it with superstitious awe. -Nothing else could be talked about. The great belching cliff stood -directly in their pathway, and the black smoke rose some thousands of -feet above it. A great shower of ashes came rolling down on them, giving -them all a grayish coat. - -“If it is like this all the way it will be far from pleasant,” said -Enola. - -“Yes,” said Mr. Bruce, “but think of the field of diamonds at the end of -our journey; we could undergo much worse trials at home than this, to -get to a field of diamonds, and think nothing of it.” - -They were stumbling along now, almost blinded by the dust, and the -zebras were getting fractious. At times they would stop, refusing to go -further, and it would take all the persuasion the men could muster, to -get them started again. But they were nearing the villa where they were -to stop and still had hopes of reaching it. It lay very near to the -field of diamonds, and would also be near the volcano, which the men had -resolved to visit before returning. - -It was awful work, though, this blindly stumbling along, only the solid -pavement of the avenue letting them know that they had not lost their -way. But a light loomed up in the darkness at last, and they decided -this must be the villa, where some of the men working in this part of -the country had taken refuge. They made for it as fast as possible, but -as they came nearer to it the light grew brighter, until a flame shot up -and they knew that it did not come from the villa. Slowly they -approached it, having left the avenue and taken their way through the -fields. They came closer, but suddenly all pulled up their steeds as of -one accord. Ahead of them was a camp-fire, and about it, dancing and -throwing their arms in the air, were a hundred naked black Africans. - -The scene was a weird one, and the whole thing was such a complete -surprise to our friends, that they could do nothing but stare in -open-mouthed wonderment. The negroes were naked, with the exception of a -cloth about the loins. There were but few women among them and these -were seated about the fire, while the men clasped hands and danced in a -circle about them. The dance was wild and the yells, which broke from -the large mouths of the men, were terrible. Their black bodies had been -covered with oil of some kind and shone in the firelight like polished -ebony. They were of average height, probably five feet five or six -inches, and their bodies showed good feeding; they looked half -intelligent. - -Each one carried, slung over the back, a shield, made of some kind of -hardened hide, and a spear with a long arrow-point made of bone; another -strange instrument of war, or for the hunt, was a sort of stone hatchet -with spear-point. This hatchet had a stone head or blade, with one side -sharpened, and the butt end or side, running to a sharp point; the -handle, which was about eighteen inches long, passed through the head -and extended beyond this about six inches, ending in a point of bone as -sharp as the point of a stiletto; to the other end of this handle was -fastened a long piece of leather string, which was now wrapped around -the handle. - -All these things were taken in by our friends before the negroes seemed -to see them, for they had stopped well back among the trees, and the -negroes were making such a fearful noise with their hideous yells, they -could not hear the rather quiet approach of the cavalcade. But when they -caught sight of them at last, they stood as if paralyzed, and then moved -up a little nearer, as if to get a better look and satisfy themselves -that they were not mistaken. When they at last caught a good glimpse of -the huge elephants and great zebras, all beautifully trapped, and the -large men and women, they seemed suddenly overcome with fear, and -turning, ran off into the darkness. Our friends would have pursued them -but for Onrai, who said that such a move would be simply suicidal in -such dust-laden darkness. They accordingly started for the avenue again -and following this for a short distance further, saw another light, and -coming up to this, found that their dusty ride was at an end. - -The inside of the villa was a pleasant change to them after the -dust-filled air of the outside, and the bath was first sought by all, -and then the meal-table. There was no great mirth at this meal to-night, -though, for the different scenes of the day and night, had had their -effect, and all were thinking. The last adventure of all had clapped the -climax. What could it mean? Where had the negroes come from, and how had -they entered the Land of On? - -That night the party was attacked by the negroes, but they were on the -lookout and repelled them. About fifty of the negroes had been killed, -or mortally wounded by the forty Onians, as nearly as Mr. Bruce could -estimate, and there, were now about fifty of the black bodies fleeing -over the rock-covered plain. They had dropped their assagais and -hatchets in their fear, and their yells now was something pitiful. They -evidently supposed that they were being followed by a whole army of the -powerful men, which they had seen that evening. Fear lent them wings and -they actually flew over the hard flooring of the plain, and were -increasing the distance very perceptibly between themselves and their -pursuers. Still the Onians kept up the race determinedly, their feet now -being torn and bleeding with the tramp over the sharp pebbles of the -plain. The stone wall bordering the hunting ground was reached, and a -long hole was found in it, broken probably by the storm. The river was -crossed by a stone bridge at this point and still they hurried on. - -The light was getting brighter as they neared the volcano and the -negroes could easily be seen away ahead of them. They were nearing the -great cliffs and they could now be seen looming up far into the heavens. -A little while longer and the negroes had disappeared. Our friends -hurrying forward nearly fell into a great gulf which opened at their -feet. - - - - - CHAPTER XXXVI. - CLEFT BY THE EARTHQUAKE. - - -Our friends pulled up just in time, or they would have gone tumbling -into the black chasm. They moved back hurriedly, almost expecting to see -the hole open still further and engulf them as it had the negroes, for -they could make no other explanation of the negroes’ disappearance. The -light from the volcano made most objects discernable about this point, -and our friends could look into the great gulf for some distance, but -then the further view was lost in the darkness. - -“What shall we do now,” asked Onrai of Mr. Bruce. “We can no longer -follow the negroes.” - -“No, this hole has swallowed them up,” said Mr. Bruce, “but we cannot -tell whether they have dropped to eternity, or have followed a path into -its depth, of which they alone know. Has the chasm always been here?” - -“I can remember no such crevice,” said Onrai, “nor have I ever heard any -of my people speak of it. I think it is another of the mysteries which -seem to abound now,” said Onrai, and his face seemed in the half-light -to wear a very troubled look. - -“These mysteries as you call them, Onrai, are only such to the -uninitiated,” said Mr. Bruce. “They are all understood by those who are -acquainted with the great principles of nature. This crevice is -undoubtedly caused by the earthquake, as this very often occurs during a -disturbance of this kind.” - -“But these strange people,” said Onrai. “Can you explain their -presence?” - -“If you cannot understand it, Onrai,” said Mr. Bruce, “don’t worry -yourself in trying to, but look on those negroes as I have before told -you to, as wild beasts, and treat them as such if they should break down -a portion of the retaining wall and intrude upon your inhabited country. -These beings are human, of course, but they have never felt the quieting -hand of civilization, and they are but little removed from the wild -beasts which inhabit the forests.” - -“Then we shall kill them all as we did those last night,” asked Onrai. - -“Yes, as opportunity offers,” replied Mr. Bruce. “Listen; these people -must never be allowed to gain a footing in your land, or the result -might be your extermination. You must fight them from the first and -never allow them to rest for a moment in your domain. You may lose many -men in thus defending your country, but it is your only chance to retain -it. So, imbue in your men the necessity of fighting with all their -hearts, and souls, and might, and strength, for God and their country, -and impress them with the fact that only in so doing can they ever -expect to again enjoy those privileges and that great freedom which has -always been theirs.” - -“I will do this,” said Onrai, “but what shall we do now?” - -“We must wait here,” said Mr. Bruce, “until daylight and see what we can -make of the hole, and whether the negroes have been killed or have used -it as a means of escape. We will also investigate the volcano while -here. But you must send men back to the villa immediately, to bury those -dead negroes before the women see them; and tell this body of men to -inform the women that we will return in a day or two; that we started -early to look into the volcano or would have bade them good-bye. Don’t, -by any means, let them know of the fight of last night. Impress upon -your men the necessity of secrecy; it would only worry the women -unnecessarily if they knew that the negroes were making trouble.” - -The other men now laid down on the hard ground, making themselves as -comfortable as possible, to rest until morning, when they could explore -the hole and the volcano. They had tramped nearly twelve miles during -the night and were now well up against the cliffs. The black cloud of -smoke was still being blown to the north, however, and they were saved -the extra misery of the falling ashes. - -At last the east began to show signs of returning day, and long before -the sun had crept into the heavens, our friends were up and looking down -the great crevice. They were surprised to see the strange formation of -this hole in the ground. It had undoubtedly been made by the earthquake, -and was probably about ten feet broad at the top and narrowed in width -as it went down, until it had reached a depth of two hundred feet, where -it was only a narrow crack hardly six inches in width. But along one -side had been left a natural foot path, about eighteen inches in width. -This run up and down in a very irregular fashion and was narrower in -some places than in others, but there was enough space at any point of -it on which to walk, and it was this which had probably been followed by -the negroes. They had known of this then, or they could never have found -it in the darkness of night. Mr. Bruce and Mr. Graham followed the -crevice for some distance, and then had returned and taking the -footpath, had determined to follow it until they had learned what had -become of the negroes. - -They were accompanied by Harry and several of the Onians, Onrai -remaining behind with the others. The footpath would bring them very -near the surface at times, and again it would carry them so deep into -the crevice, they could almost touch the opposite side by stretching out -their hands. Taken on the whole, the chasm ascended with the foothills -of the cliffs, or in other words, it kept a mean depth throughout its -length until reaching the face of the cliff, where it ascended very -rapidly, and upon looking up, our friends were not surprised to see the -great cliff a thousand feet high, cleft as clean as if cut by a -monstrous knife. And this cut was at straight as a die, our friends -being able to see through it in a direct line a great distance. Still -the footpath continued as it had commenced, along one side of the -crevice. When once inside of the cliff the explorers could look up -through the cavern, far above their heads and see the stars, for the -crevice here was narrow and of such a depth, the light of the sun could -not penetrate it. - -“I think it would be better to return,” said Mr. Bruce, “we can only -follow this path through the mountain and that is too great a journey -for to-day, especially when we have had no breakfast.” - -“I think as you do,” said Mr. Graham. “These negroes must certainly have -escaped by this route, and it will be an easy matter to keep them from -again entering the Land of On, for ten men could guard this pass against -an army.” - -They turned and retraced their steps and were soon with their companions -again. They now turned their attention to the volcano. As the morning -advanced and the wind changed, the smoke was again driven over them, and -the ashes fell in great sheets about them. They had to cross the crevice -and tramp some distance to the north to reach the base of the cliff, -over which towered the cloud of smoke. The question as to how they -should cross the crevice was easily answered by their going to the end -of it; which was a mile distant from where they now were. The whole -party joined in this exploration tour, the attendants keeping their eyes -open for any small game which might be induced, by some cause or other, -to enter these bad lands. They were now in the Hunting Reserve, but the -land here was so barren, and of such great extent, these animals would -not come into it for any reason, unless it might be to cross it. Just at -this time, too, it was made worse by a thick covering of ashes which had -deluged everything. And the same shroud of ashes was now coming down in -a blinding sheet, and was worse than it had been the night before, -because of the heat which now went with them. - -They were very near the belching crater now, and when the wind would -change for a moment, blowing the cloud in a different direction, they -could see the great black mass of smoke coming from the cliff, and -bringing in its folds, very often, live coals of considerable size. The -wind did not change very often, however, and most of the time our -friends were engulfed in the awful dust and ashes, which at times were -so thick, they were even hid from each other. But by perseverance, they -reached the foot of the cliff right above which rose the volume of -smoke. They stood here for a moment gazing up at the towering wall of -rock, it being, at this point, fully two thousand feet high, and -perpendicular, and wondered how they were going to scale its great -height. They could not possibly do it; there was not even a foothold on -the face of that rock wall, and our friends turned away disheartened. - -They had hoped to find fissures or rents in the rock, caused by the -earthquake, which might allow them to reach the summit; but their hopes -in this direction were all shattered by that one glance up the palisade. -It was now beyond noon and they had had nothing to eat that morning, and -they were all beginning to feel desperately hungry. This, too, puzzled -them, for they could not expect to find anything to eat here or anything -to kill nearer than two miles, where the good lands began again. But -something must be had, so three of the attendants were sent to the -woods, two miles away, to procure, if possible, a deer or something -light, which they might carry back with them, and which would be so -palatable in their present condition of hunger. - -They took up a position just at the base of the cliff, at a point where -they were sheltered from the shower, and prepared to await the hunters. - -“What do you think of our chances for reaching the summit of the cliff?” -asked Mr. Graham of Mr. Bruce. - -“Well, I should say they were bad,” answered Mr. Bruce. - -“Bad,” said Harry, “well I should say so. There is no chance at all. -That cliff rising above us is duplicated throughout the entire -circumference of On.” - -“So Onrai says, and it is true,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“There is but little difference in the face of the cliffs,” said Onrai. -“Those about here are seamed to a greater degree than those at other -points, but one can just as easily scale those as any of the others.” - -“That is not very encouraging,” said Mr. Bruce, “but I do not think you -have taken into consideration the earthquake and the changes which it -might have made. We have already found one place where the earthquake -has split these mighty walls and I think we may find others. At any rate -I will not give up trying to find a place where I can reach the summit.” - -“I will follow the base of these cliffs for miles but what I find a -place,” said Mr. Graham. - -“You forget that the base of the cliffs lie, throughout their entire -length, in the Hunting Reserve,” said Onrai, “and I do not think that -they could be followed closely for ten miles, let alone their entire -length.” - -“True, I had forgotten that,” said Mr. Graham, and his face fell. - -“It is only here,” continued Onrai, “that we can follow them at all, for -the animals do not bother us here, and there is no underbrush to hamper -us.” - -The men talked on in this way until the hunters returned, two of them -with a small deer, and the third with a bear cub. Their burdens were -heavy and the trip had been quite long, but the prospect of the feast -which would be theirs when they again reached their friends, buoyed them -up and the party greeted them with cheers, and all fell to and cut the -choicest parts of the deer and bear to roast; but one important thing -had been forgotten. They were in a barren waste and not a sprig of wood -could be found with which to make a fire. They were looking at each -other in blank amazement, when a huge boulder flew through the air and -fell in their midst. - - - - - CHAPTER XXXVII. - IN THE CRATER. - - -They jumped back in affright, as the great rock rushed through the air -and half buried itself in the soft earth before them. They looked from -one to the other, as if seeking an explanation of this new surprise, but -none could answer. They could not suppose for a moment that the rock had -been broken from the great cliff, for the surface of these was so -smooth, nothing could come from this source. They looked above them, but -the air was so full of the ashes and dust, they could not penetrate it -over a hundred feet. They hurriedly moved away from such a dangerous -position, taking the bear and deer with them. - -“Where could this rock have come from?” asked Harry. - -It puzzled them to answer this question, and they kept their gaze -fastened on the cliff above, hoping to see the wind change for a moment, -and the cloud of smoke blown from them long enough to see the top. After -waiting for some time, the cloudy atmosphere did break for a moment, and -far up, so high that they looked like pigmies on top of the cliff, they -saw a number of negroes, their bodies half hanging over the edge. - -“Ah! the mystery is solved,” exclaimed Mr. Bruce. “They are probably the -same band which we drove from here last night.” - -“Yes, and now we can feel assured that there is a way to reach the -summit. Look out!” said Harry, as he saw the negroes start another large -stone from the summit. - -Down it came dangerously near to the party, and they decided to go back -to the old position of the morning, for there they would be out of the -way of these falling stones, and they could also drive back any of the -negroes if they again tried to return. Back they trudged, taking a part -of the deer and bear meat with them, and upon reaching the old stand, -and while looking around, they saw, not far away from them, a monstrous -tree, which had probably been blown from the summit of the cliffs by the -storm. A fire was soon built and the meat roasted and eaten, after which -they laid down for a night’s sleep, their day having profited them -little but experiences which might do them some good in the near future. -They had learned that there was a way to the summit of the cliff, and -the finding of this way was to be the work of the morrow. The night was -passed as comfortably as could be, on the fearfully hard bed of stone -and earth, and early in the morning they were astir again, and after a -meal of the roasted venison, they all started for the small pathway in -the crevice. - -They soon reached this, and falling into single file, with Mr. Bruce in -the lead, they kept up the march for a couple of hours, when they were -well into the heart of the cliff. No other footpath had yet been reached -by which they could gain the summit. - -“I think,” said Mr. Bruce to Mr. Graham, who was following him, “that we -will have to walk right through this mountain, and on to the end of the -crevice, when we can turn and climb the cliff from the back, which I -expect to find of easy ascent.” - -“I quite agree with you,” said Mr. Graham. “It is quite certain that -there could be no way of reaching the summit from this crevice; at -least, not at this point.” - -“It has taken a powerful stirring up of the internal fires to cause this -fearful crack,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“Yes,” said Mr. Graham, “and that volcano looks as if it might throw out -something more than dust and ashes very soon.” - -“That it will, and sooner than we will want it to,” replied Mr. Bruce. -“We are treading dangerous ground, and we cannot tell what moment we may -be overtaken by a flow of molten lava, or a greater shower of ashes, -such as buried Pompeii.” - -“But,” said Mr. Graham, “if we stop to think of such things, we will not -do a great deal of exploring.” - -“No,” said Mr. Bruce, “but it is always best to bear these things in -mind, and be ready at any moment to meet them as well as we can under -the circumstances. But I can scarcely see my way here. Were any torches -brought along?” - -“Yes, the attendants have torches,” said Mr. Graham. - -It was true; at this point the crevice was so deep one might think it -was night, so dark had it grown. The torch was lighted, and Mr. Bruce, -taking it, they all again took up the march. But from this point the -path began to widen and ascend, until they were not only again in the -sunlight but two could walk abreast, and a little further, and the path -had widened until four and five men could walk abreast. The path -ascended gradually, so gradually that it was not difficult to climb, and -in a short while it ran out even with the surface. - -This was a great and pleasant surprise to the explorers, for they had -expected to have to tramp much farther before getting out of the hole. -They looked about them and saw that they were on the side of a lofty -mountain, the cliff opposite being but a precipitous side of the same -mountain. This side was very fertile and wooded with great trees almost -to its summit. - -Below them lay a verdant valley stretching on and on as far as the eye -could reach. Onrai looked on in wonderment at this unexpected sight. He -had, and so had his people, been led to believe that the world ended at -the cliffs, that beyond these was naught but space. He could not have -told, had he been asked, how this land ended or how it must look to see -no land or water beyond, nothing but that infinite space. It had never -occurred to him to think of this himself, but if it had, he would have -immediately banished the thought as being perfectly absurd. He had been -told that the end was there, and that was enough; it couldn’t be -different, and as to how the end might look, that didn’t matter at all. -So this was a wonderful sight to him, all this land as far as he could -see, covered with verdure and with occasional streams of water running -through it. So much like his own fertile country, that he might have -supposed that he had turned in some magical way on his tramp through the -mountains, and was now looking upon that Land of On. If this picture, -which stretched out before him, was real and not a dream, as he was -almost led to believe, then what of those teachings which declared that -their land was the only land, and that their people were the only -people. The very foundation of this teaching was shaken when this idea -was exploded. He turned and looked at his companions, and then at the -great landscape which opened out before him. The attendants were no less -surprised at the strange scene, but none of them made any comments. - -Turning and looking far up the mountain or volcano, they could now see a -round cap at the summit, and out of this poured the fearful smoke. The -wind was favorable for the ascent, for it was blowing the smoke over the -Land of On, and they could climb without being hampered by the falling -ashes. - -“We are extremely lucky so far,” said Mr. Graham. - -“Yes, and the ascent looks easy enough,” rejoined Mr. Bruce. - -“It may prove otherwise before we reach the summit, though,” said Mr. -Graham. - -“Well,” said Mr. Bruce, “we must get at it, for we should get back to On -to-day, if possible.” - -“How different are the mountains on this side,” said Mr. Graham. - -“They are different, yes,” said Mr. Bruce. “One would hardly suppose -that beyond they are so precipitous. The whole Land of On must have been -the immense crater of some mighty volcano, at some prehistoric period.” - -“It is hard to tell,” said Mr. Graham. “In my estimation it has been at -some remote age a vast inland sea.” - -“Either explanation might fit,” said Mr. Bruce. “But let us start. We -are losing valuable time.” - -Turning toward Onrai they saw him still standing wrapped in deep -thought, with the attendants standing near, also looking at that great -expanse of field, forest, river and lake before them, with wondering -faces. - -“Come,” said Mr. Bruce, “we must start. From the summit you can get a -better view both of this and your own country. And now we must hasten to -reach that summit.” - -“You do not seem surprised at the great expanse of land beyond the -cliffs,” said Onrai to Mr. Bruce. - -“No, I am not surprised,” replied Mr. Bruce, “because I knew that it -existed before we ever came to you.” - -“And you did not tell me?” inquired Onrai. - -“And why should I tell you, Onrai,” asked Mr. Bruce. “Have you not a -beautiful country with everything that heart could wish for? Were you -not happy there in your belief, and could the knowledge of the fallacy -of the teachings which has helped to make you happy make you any -happier? You would not have thanked me for such information and I would -advise you now, as I have before, to try and forget that you have seen -these things.” - -“That I can never do,” said Onrai. “But they may never have any great -impression on me, further than in making me disbelieve that part of the -teachings which relates to the end of our world. I cannot believe that -any longer, of course.” - -“No,” said Mr. Bruce, “but you can refrain from speaking of it, and you -can make it a punishable offense for any of these attendants, who have -also witnessed these scenes, to ever speak of it; and in this way it -will soon be forgotten, and the next generation will go on in blissful -ignorance of the existence of the land beyond the cliff. It will be -better, will it not?” - -“I think so,” answered Onrai. - -They were now ascending the mountain, the ascent for a way being very -gradual, but as they proceeded further the ascent became steeper and -more rugged. No trace of negroes were seen, but our friends knew that -the negroes seen the day before on the summit, must be somewhere near. -They had probably ascended the mountain in order to get a sight, if -possible, of that land from which they had been driven, and in thus -doing they had spied those who had driven them from it, and had -immediately conceived the idea of hurling the great stones in their -midst, and may be, by so doing, kill all, thus giving them an open -sesame into the coveted country. They had villages near this point, -according to Sedai, and if our friends should fall in with any of these -tribes, there would very evidently be more bloodshed, for they were the -intruders now and the African negro considers this a sacrilege. Nothing -is so sacred to him as his country, and they will fight for this quicker -than they will for their wives. - -But nothing was seen of these, and no trace was found of a beaten path -which might indicate that they lived as high as this on the mountain, or -that they visited this altitude very frequently. The verdure grew -thinner as they ascended, and great hunks of lava were now cropping -through the surface soil. The cloud of smoke grew more ominous as they -neared it, and looked like a huge umbrella spread, and with the handle -resting on the summit of the mountain. The party were getting very close -to the summit now, and low rumblings could be heard far beneath the -surface; hissing noises were also heard, like that made by water -striking hot coals. - -At last, after considerable tortuous climbing, they stood at the base of -a rugged cliff, which was not more than a hundred feet in height; this -was seamed and rough as if it had been thrown up hundreds and may be -thousands of years before by an overflow of lava, which, upon cooling, -had left this wall about the crater. Following about the base of this -for some distance, a place was at last discerned where an ascent might -be made, and after hard work and much slipping backward, and three or -four narrow escapes from instant death by falling into one of the -crevices, the summit was reached. The sight which here met their gaze -was forboding, to say the least. They were standing on the top of a wall -not more than ten feet thick at this point, and as near as they could -guess about one and a half miles long, running about a deep hole or -crater, one hundred feet deep. Looking down into this they could see the -black smoke issuing from great crevices in the flooring. As it came from -these crevices, it was lurid with the glow of the hot fires which was -its cause. These crevices were numerous and in places our friends could -almost look into them, and into the bright fires burning far beneath. -After much discussion on the matter, it was determined to try and get -down to the floor of this fiery hole which might so soon be filled with -molten lava. A place was found where the descent could be made easily -and the party started. As they descended, the foul smoke would be blown -about them occasionally, almost choking them with its density, but the -bottom was reached and they started to cross it in order to get to the -opposite side, from which they could look into the Land of On. The -flooring was found to be warm and really hot in places, and so crumbling -beneath their feet that it was almost impossible to walk. Several of the -great crevices were approached, but the smoke would drive them back -before they could reach the edge and look into the depths. Most of these -crevices were narrow and ran from east to west, but when the centre of -the crater was reached a great hole was found, probably the true mouth -of the crater. The rumbling here was very distinct and the hissing very -plain. The party tried to reach the edge of this wall but was again -fought off by the dense smoke. They had passed this and were nearer to -the opposite side of the crater, when an unusual loud rumbling was heard -and a great crack suddenly opened before them, the shock throwing them -off their feet, prostrating them on the ground. Mr. Bruce fell so near -this new crevice that his head leaned far over the side, and for a -moment it looked as if he would roll into the fearful hole. But he soon -recovered himself, and rolling over and over he put a safe distance -between himself and the crevice before he ventured to rise to his feet. - -When they had all recovered from this surprise and fear and had again -regained their feet, they approached the crevice and peered into its -black depths. Down, down, down it seemed to open, into the very bowels -of the earth, and at the bottom they could see a molten mass, boiling, -and seething, and hissing, but just for a moment and then the scene was -hidden by the black smoke which came pouring up from it. - -“Come,” said Mr. Bruce, “we must get out of this.” - -The party then hurried as fast as they could to the opposite side of the -crater to where the wall was several hundred feet thick, ending on the -opposite side in the cliff. A long look was taken at the beautiful Land -of On and then the retreat was ordered. They now followed the top of the -wall of the crater until they had come to the place where they had -ascended this, and then, with but very little difficulty, reached the -sloping side and hurriedly descended. It was growing late and already -the sun was throwing long shadows over the mountain side. - -They had several miles of the strange footpath to cover yet through the -dark crevice. They began to feel anxious and hurried still faster as -they neared the bottom. The sun sank into the distant valley as they -reached the crevice. They were hurriedly following the side of this, -looking for a beginning of the footpath, when they heard a loud yell as -if from a hundred throats, and looking down they saw a great crowd of -black demons holding the end of the footpath. - - - - - CHAPTER XXXVIII. - KILLED IN THE CREVICE. - - -The fearful yell startled them, and they fell back out of sight of the -wild band. - -“They have watched us ascend the mountain,” said Mr. Bruce, “and have -held this vantage point awaiting our return, knowing well that they had -us here.” - -“Yes, but we can’t stay here,” said Mr. Graham. - -“I am afraid that we will have to,” said Mr. Bruce, “until these fellows -will kindly consent to go away.” - -“But can’t we beat them off?” said Harry. - -“No. I think not,” said Mr. Bruce. “We are about twenty-five, and they -must number fully one hundred.” - -“We ought to be good for that number, I should think,” said Mr. Graham. - -“I don’t know,” said Mr. Bruce, “they may fight better in daylight. They -were taken by surprise the other night, and had but little else to do -but run. I am in for giving them a chance to show their fighting -qualities at any rate. As you say, we can’t stay here; if we do, we may -be attacked by such a horde of these blacks that we could do nothing but -surrender.” - -“Then we had better get to fighting at once,” said Mr. Graham. “It will -be better, perhaps, for us three to head the column, for with our -fire-arms we may scare them away, leaving the road open to us.” - -“I think as you do in the matter,” said Mr. Bruce. - -Onrai was told then, to form his men into columns of threes and not to -make a rush, or use the daggers until they were attacked by the negroes. -The men formed, and Mr. Graham, Mr. Bruce and Harry heading the column, -they started for the crevice. Here they saw the negroes, still waiting -for them, their black faces grinning hideously in the semi-light. Slowly -our friends advanced with their revolvers in position, ready to start at -a given signal from Mr. Bruce. The negroes seemed to consider this a -matter of amusement, for they only grinned the broader, and yelled the -louder when they saw the queer column approaching them. - -The party advanced until only a few feet from the negroes, who were so -confident of capturing their enemies alive, they had not even brought -with them the ugly-looking hatchet. They took no concern at the -approaching column then, but looked on, as though the whole matter was a -huge joke. So when Mr. Bruce said deliberately: “Now make ready, fire,” -and the three leaden missiles went on their mission of death, the -negroes jumped backward, and several, losing their balance, fell into -the ravine. Again the pistols were raised, and three more shots were -fired. - -“We are disturbing them,” said Mr. Bruce. “Once more, and we will have -them on the run.” - -And again the pistols were fired, this time at very close range. - -The expression on the negroes’ faces had changed now, and they looked at -the slowly approaching party with eyes almost standing on their cheeks, -and mouths wide open, showing their white ivories. They stood still -after the first shots, paralyzed with fear, but when the last shots were -fired, and they saw three more of their companions topple over, their -fright induced them to seek safety in flight, and they turned and ran -down the footpath, crowding, shoving and jostling each other in their -frantic efforts to get farther away from these death-dealing missiles, -many of them being pushed off into the crevice in the wild rush. Our -friends fell into line with Mr. Bruce again in the lead, and followed -slowly after the negroes. - -It was now quite dark and as they descended further into the ravine, it -became so dark that they could no longer see the path, and a torch was -lit. The negroes had long since passed out of sight and hearing, and our -friends were giving them little heed, having enough to think about in -looking after themselves, for they were in a very dangerous position, -the pathway being so narrow at places, that a misstep would undoubtedly -hurl them into eternity. They kept close to the side of the crevice and -moved slowly, and the mountain was passed through without a mishap. - -The light from the volcano now lit up the scene somewhat, and our -friends began to congratulate each other on getting out of the several -difficulties so easily, when a shout was heard, and looking through the -semi-gloom they saw the negroes coming hastily toward them, and a band -of Onians following them along the top of the crevice hurling stones at -them. The party halted, and raising their arms fired, when the negroes -came within range. The negroes stopped and in a moment realized that -they were between two fires; but the pistols were too much for them, so -they again turned and ran toward the Land of On. The Onians, seeing them -do this, started for the end of the path to head them off. This they -did, and one of their number, a mighty fellow, jumped into the path and -with his dagger began plunging it into the backs of the unfortunate -negroes who had again turned toward their own land. As one would receive -his death-wound and would fall over the side of the crevice, this great -Onian would stab another, and he kept this up until his arm was red to -the shoulder with the blood of his victims. - -[Illustration: “As one would receive his death-wound and would fall over -the side of the crevice, this great Onian would stab another.”—_Page -293._] - -The head of the column now came up within range of the pistols again, -and they were shot down like sheep, the few who were not killed with the -knife of the Onian. The slaughter did not last long, for in a short time -the negroes were all killed and the bodies lay at the bottom of the -crevice. It had been a onesided fight, for the negroes had not raised a -hand to defend themselves. - -The party were finally out of the crevice and found quite a number of -Onians camped near the base of the cliff, and with them Enola. Their -surprise was great when they saw her with the party, and upon asking her -why she was here, she told them that she had gotten tired of remaining -at the villa and as she had come to this land to see all that there was -in it, she did not intend being cheated out of any part of it. - -“Your departure was so unexpected,” she continued, “and the attendants -had been so mysterious in their movements ever since, I began to fear -that all was not right and came to see for myself. Are you not all glad -to see me? But where have you been? Your faces and garments are as black -as the skin of the negroes which have just been killed.” - -It was true, they had been so long exposed to the smoke of the crater -that they had become perfectly black, and it might have been this which -made the negroes laugh so when they saw them approaching. They had seen -the white skins before and they must have thought that it was a ruse to -fool them, in thus blacking their faces. - -“But Enola, this has been a long, hard tramp for you,” said Mr. Graham. - -“Tramp, Uncle,” said Enola, “have you so soon forgotten the zebras and -elephants? I came on a zebra.” - -“Oh, that is so,” said Mr. Graham, “I had forgotten for the moment. You -look tired though, nevertheless, Enola.” - -“And I am tired,” said Enola. “It is quite a journey even on the back of -a zebra. But I see little chance for a comfortable night’s rest here.” - -“The only bed is this stony surface,” said Mr. Bruce, “but you surely -cannot expect to stay here over night.” - -“And why not, pray,” said Enola. “And am I better than are you? Did I -not withstand the hardships of the jungle? I want to remain here -to-night and to-morrow and see this crevice and more of these stony -surroundings.” - -“Very well,” said Mr. Graham, “I know there is no use in talking to you -when you once get a notion in your head; but you will find this the -hardest bed you ever slept upon.” - -“Don’t worry about me, Uncle, I will get along all right, but I brought -you all something to eat and you had better get at it.” - -“I will forgive you now for having come,” said Mr. Graham, “for I, as -well as the rest of us, am just about starved.” - -“I am glad that you look on my sin as pardonable,” laughed Enola, “but, -believe me, bringing food was a secondary thought. I came only to see -the strange things in this part of the world, and when about to start, -thought that, as I was coming here, I might as well bring this food with -me.” - -“I know you too well to believe any such story,” said Mr. Graham. - -The attendants had now gotten their meal ready and a hungry party it was -who sat down to it. They had eaten nothing since morning and their -fatigue of the day but added to their hunger. - -“What are we to do to-morrow,” asked Mr. Graham, as they all sat down on -rocks which had been placed for them, holding their platters of food in -their laps. - -“I know of no reason why we should remain here any longer,” said Mr. -Bruce. “I think the negroes are done for, for awhile at least. This -band, which has been entering the land of On, are wiped out; they cannot -return and there is hardly a chance now of other bands or tribes knowing -of the new passage-way through the cliff.” - -“But it is only a matter of time until they will know it,” said Mr. -Graham. - -“True,” said Mr. Bruce, “but before that time the crevice might be -filled and the Land of On made impregnable again.” - -They all looked up in astonishment at this. - -“Do you think this possible?” asked Onrai. - -“Possible, yes,” said Mr. Bruce. “It would be a stupendous work and -would take a long time to carry it out, but it can be done, and this -fair land will be forever free from intruders, unless of course some -such like occurrence as the one, which has made this fissure in the -rock, should cause a like one.” - -“Then you would commence on this work immediately?” asked Onrai. - -“Just as soon as possible,” said Mr. Bruce, “but the sooner you do it -the less chance there will be for invasion.” - -“It shall be done,” answered Onrai. - -The party, after the meal, stood up in groups and it was but natural -that Enola and Onrai should be together. They walked to a point well up -toward the cliff, and seating themselves on a large rock, Onrai again -told Enola of his great love and of his intention of making her his wife -on the Day of Resis. But when she asked him why he had chosen the Day of -Resis for their wedding day, he made her no answer. - -Onrai sent messengers throughout the country and to the city, for men to -build this wall across the crevice. He sent for all of the available men -in On, ordering all other branches of work to stop for the time being. - -“It will take a considerable body of men to do the work,” said Mr. -Bruce. “But more than a wall must be constructed. The crevice at the -face of the cliff must be at least three thousand feet deep, and this -has to be filled for considerable distance to get a safe foundation for -the wall. It will take many men and most of them will have to work from -the crater of the volcano, casting large rocks into the crevice from the -first, until it is filled up as high as the shelf or footpath, from -which point I think it would be well to commence the solid masonry.” - -“But if this work goes on and is finished before we leave, chances are -against us ever again reaching civilization,” said Mr. Graham. - -“That is true,” replied Mr. Bruce, “for we have seen enough of the -rock-bound country to know that the cliffs cannot be scaled. It would be -an utter impossibility to get out by that way, and we would have to -resort to a balloon.” - -“You have suggested a way which is always available,” said Mr. Graham. -“The silk of this country is especially adapted to this purpose, I -should say, and the other materials can be had easy enough. And these -people could raise no objections to our building such a conveyance, even -if they objected to our leaving them, and we would be up and away before -they could possibly know what we were about. So we need not worry about -the means of escape.” - -“The volcano is throwing off more rock and ashes than ever, to-day,” -said Mr. Bruce, as he glanced up at the ominous cloud of smoke. - -“Yes, and there seems to be a new element this morning,” said Mr. -Graham. “Look at that white vapor. Would you not say that that was -steam?” - -“It looks like it,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“If it is,” said Mr. Graham, “it will but hasten the coming eruption.” - -“The eruption is not far off, anyway,” said Mr. Bruce, “for the lava is -already near the surface, as was shown by its running through the crack -of the tunnel to-day.” - -“This alone will be well worth the trip,” said Mr. Graham; “but we must -be well out of the way before it takes place.” - -“I think we will be safe at the villa,” said Mr. Bruce. - -As he ceased speaking, the earth trembled beneath their feet, and, -looking at the volcano, they saw a huge mass of red-hot cinders and -smoke shoot high in the air. - - - - - CHAPTER XXXIX. - THE FIELD OF DIAMONDS. - - -The rumbling was heard fully five minutes before the shock came, and our -friends had stopped when it had first reached their ears, wondering what -could make such a noise. It was all explained, however, when the earth -trembled beneath them, nearly throwing them from their feet. Thoughts of -the volcano immediately rushed into their minds, and they turned just in -time to see a great mass of stone, rock and molten lava mixed with steam -and smoke, shoot into the air. It rose to a height of nearly a thousand -feet above the mountain, and then fell back into the yawning abyss from -which it sprang. Then came another shock and another discharge of rock -and ashes, and another and another in such rapid succession that our -friends were afraid to move for fear of being thrown flat on the ground. - -The air was black with ashes, and smoke, and dust, and a vapor seemed to -be rising from the ground, which, with the rest, nearly suffocated them. -From where our friends now were, they could not see the crevice in the -cliff, but they could see the summit of the mountains, and saw huge -rocks tumbling from the top and rolling over the edge, being lost to -view in the thick atmosphere as they descended. - -“We must get out of this,” said Mr. Bruce, “for that volcano may belch -forth a stream of lava which will take but a few moments to reach us.” - -“Do you think it would flow this way?” asked Mr. Graham. “The opposite -side of the mountain would give it a freer channel, I think.” - -“It is impossible to tell,” said Mr. Bruce. “The whole side of the cliff -might open up and let the lava flow into this slope, entirely -unobstructed. These volcanoes change their craters and channels so -frequently, there is no telling from what direction the lava will come, -or which way it will go.” - -“It is quieter now,” said Mr. Graham, “and as we cannot be far from the -villa, we had better try and reach it.” - -Everybody at this started again and were groping along in the -dust-filled atmosphere, when they saw, right ahead of them, the bridge. -It took them only a minute to cross this and to get through the break in -the wall, and to reach the villa and get into its cool and ash-free -atmosphere. It was certainly a great relief for these weary, hungry and -dust-besmeared travelers to enjoy once more the delights of a bath, and -the splendid cuisine of the villa. They were tired out, and had inhaled -the thick atmosphere so long, that their lungs had become almost raw, -while their eyes were nearly closed, being swollen and sore. But a bath -and several applications of sweet honey and wine had made them feel like -new persons, and after the evening meal was over, they all declared that -such delights as On could offer, were all the more welcome and could be -better appreciated after a few days separation from them. - -The evening was spent on the terrace, the wind having again shifted, -leaving the atmosphere free from the dust and ashes. The column of smoke -was very bright to-night, the fire seeming to be nearer the surface, -lighting up the great black mass as it poured forth from the crater. In -fact at this distance it cast its light, making objects at some -distance, quite perceptible. But our friends were surprised to see to -what depth the ground about the villa and all the barren waste had been -covered by the ashes and dust. Fully one foot of this lay over the -surface of the country for miles around. The beautiful lawn here was no -more, and the large fields adjoining the villa, which had been used as a -pasture for the zebras and cattle were now made useless by the volcano. -But this extended only a mile beyond the villa, so said the attendants -who had arrived that evening, bringing fresh provisions and ice. This -being so, the zebras, cattle and elephants, would be able to find -pasturage close at hand, and they were taken there immediately as they -were already suffering for food. - -But the depth of ashes destroyed the beauty of everything about here; -the green lawn, the beautiful trees, all bore the same dull, gray -appearance. There was but little enthusiasm then shown by the party on -this night, as they walked on to the terrace. The volcano attracted all -the attention with its lurid glare, mass of smoke and bright red rocks, -which were thrown into the air at times. - -“I am afraid we have forgotten our object in coming here,” said Enola to -Onrai, as they came on to the terrace. - -“No,” said Onrai, “I have not forgotten, but I am afraid the brilliants -have met the same fate as all else about here. They are buried beneath -the ashes of the volcano.” - -“What a pity!” said Enola. “We have thus lost one of the most beautiful -sights of On.” - -“I am afraid so,” continued Onrai. “But wait, let me think. The field of -brilliants extends far to the north, if I remember rightly, and we may -reach a point beyond this circle of ashes; but you are too tired to go -over there to-night, are you not, Enola?” - -“How far is it?” asked Enola. “I am tired, but if there be a chance of -seeing this beautiful sight, then we had better accept it, for a delay -may mean to lose this pleasure, for the possibilities of that volcano -are beyond reckoning.” - -“It is about three miles due north of here, as you would say,” said -Onrai, “and if you wish to go we will find elephants plenty to carry all -of us.” - -“But we will have no moonlight to enhance the beauty of the brilliants,” -said Enola. - -“No,” said Onrai, “but we have the light from the volcano, and this may -have a grander effect.” - -“That is true,” said Enola, “let us go immediately.” - -Onrai gave the order, and several elephants were soon standing in front -of the terrace, awaiting the pleasure of the party. The other ladies -also decided to go, not having been out of the villa since their -arrival, and the men jumped at the chance, surprised to think that there -might be a field of these diamonds still uncovered by the ashes. - -The elephants followed a road, or path rather, which led almost due -north for a distance of three or four miles. The easy motion of the -elephants had most of the tired party asleep before the point was -reached, and they were awakened from their sleep when the elephants -stopped. They were entirely unprepared for the beautiful sight which met -their gaze. As far as they could see to the north, the ground was strewn -with brilliant sparks of light, looking up from its black surface, like -bright eyes from a dusky face. The red glare of the volcano made the -scene all the more beautiful, in bringing out so many varied lights from -the diamonds. - -“How far are we from the volcano?” asked Mr. Graham. - -“Only about a mile farther from it than we are when at the villa, I -should judge,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“And is the land here as barren as it is at the villa,” asked Mrs. -Graham, of Onrai, as he came up. - -“Quite,” answered Onrai, “and the field which you see here is but a -continuation of the field directly back of the villa. We were just too -late, or we might have had this scene closer at hand.” - -“It is indeed too bad,” said Mr. Graham, “but it has lost none of its -beauty by having the volcano’s light thrown on it.” - -Mr. Bruce here stooped and picked up one of the twinkling stars; it was -about the size of a hen’s egg and almost the same shape; rough on all -sides but one, this being polished to a brightness which was hard to -account for. - -“Can you account for this smooth side,” asked Mr. Graham, as he walked -up to Mr. Bruce with another diamond very much like the one he had -picked up. - -“I have been trying to solve the riddle,” replied Mr. Bruce, “and can -only offer one solution of the mystery. These stones probably have been -thrown from the bowels of the earth by the last eruption of the volcano. -How many years, or thousands of years ago this has been, we cannot say, -but since that time a part of these diamonds have been exposed to the -storms and all kinds of weather. These have gradually polished the -stones until they have reached this state of smoothness. You will notice -that the polished side is somewhat flatter than the others, and as this -side is always turned upward, I think these things but emphasize my -theory.” - -“I can only interpose one objection to your theory,” said Mr. Graham, -“and that is, that diamonds are so hard that it is a question as to -whether the wear of the elements would affect them at all.” - -“The dropping of water for long has washed away great cliffs, has bored -holes in monstrous rocks, and why should diamonds alone be proof against -this influence?” argued Mr. Bruce. - -“I do not say that they are,” replied Mr. Graham, “and I am willing to -accept your explanation for the want of a better one.” - -“They are diamonds, I think, without a doubt,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“If they are not,” said Mr. Graham, “then we have discovered a jewel, -the brilliancy of which is superior to that of diamonds, and there lies -about us fortunes,—thousands of fortunes.” - -“But fortunes which will never benefit the civilized peoples,” said Mr. -Bruce. - -“Probably not,” said Mr. Graham, “unless it be ourselves, for I shall -surely not leave here without a generous supply of these beautiful -gems,” and he and Mr. Bruce proceeded to each gather a bag full of the -precious stones, the ladies doing likewise. - -At this point Onrai came up and Mr. Bruce asked: “Onrai, do you not use -these stones for aught else than for the sling-shots, and ornaments, and -decorations?” - -“Yes,” answered Onrai. “We find here a peculiar brilliant, which the -direct participants in the ceremonies of the Day of Resis wear as an -emblem,” and the King here remounted, and the remainder of the party -doing so, they started toward the villa in silence, our friends thinking -what fortunes they carried in the little bags at their waists, and what -immense sensations they would create when these stones were brought -before the world. - -Two weeks had now elapsed since the night of the visit to the field of -diamonds, and our friends were still at the villa near the volcano. This -had remained about as active as it had on the night in mention, and our -friends had stayed on to see the development of the eruption. - -At times the earth would tremble slightly, and at such times the volcano -would always become more active. The fall of ashes had become much less -in this part of the surrounding country, but this was due to the wind -which had blown steadily from the northeast, carrying the cloud of smoke -over the country beyond the cliff. - -Onrai was daily expecting the arrival of his army of subjects to perform -his bidding. - -At the end of two weeks, after an exciting day hunting the jungles of -this strange new land, the party one day approached the villa, and saw -encamped about it thousands of men, elephants and zebras. - - - - - CHAPTER XL. - THE CAMP OF THE ONIANS. - - -Yes, there were thousands of these. The great field on the opposite side -of the avenue was completely filled with them and their animals. Tents -of beautiful colors spread over the plain, their peculiar shape -suggesting scenes of the Orient. These tents were large and roomy, one -side being half turned back so as to admit plenty of air; the floor was -covered with soft, skin rugs, and in the centre was a small, round table -of wood, on which was resting a lamp. - -As our friends approached, the scene was so strange and novel, they -thought they had never before seen anything quite so interesting. The -glare of the volcano half lighted the level plain giving a reddish glow -to everything within its rays, and the lights inside the tents throwing -out the varied colors of the beautiful cloth, made these tents look like -huge, Japanese lanterns. The ashes had been removed from the floor of -each tent and piled up at one side, thus giving a clean floor for the -rugs and small mattresses which were used for sleeping on. - -As our party came up the whole body of men, who had been informed of the -King’s approach, drew up in front of the camp in a line along the -avenue, and waited for him to say something to them. - -“My men,” said the King, “you are called here on a mission which had -never before fallen to the lot of Onians. A great storm has visited On -and has left as a legacy of its mighty strength, a great crack in the -wall which surrounds our world. This must not remain so, for it is meant -that we should be guarded by the wall, and consequently we must close up -the trench. It will be a mighty undertaking, the great wall about the -hunting reserve being nothing in comparison to it. It will require a -great length of time to do this work and you who have come to do this, -will have to remain here at the same work until it is finished, as it -will be impossible to go from here each day and take up other duties. We -are a great distance from the city, and it will not be possible for you -to return frequently, but this you shall do as often as you decide upon -among yourselves. To-morrow we will move to the pit where the great work -is to be done, and after finishing all preliminary arrangements we will -commence at once. - -“This is to protect our good country and I know the work will be done -well and quickly. Until to-morrow, then, I will bid you farewell.” - -The men bowed in their stately way and the King and his party moved on -to the villa. - -The volcano seemed to be especially active to-night, the smoke not being -as black, but more steam seemed to be mixed with it. The fires, too, -seemed to be very active, for the glare would be very bright at times -and illuminate the entire heavens, and then dying until scarcely a ray -of light could be seen. And several times during the evening a low -rumbling was heard, and the earth trembled slightly; then the volcano -would throw forth an immense shower of hot ashes, rocks and stones and -make the hissing noise, reaching over this great distance to the party -at the villa, who were on the terrace watching the scene which was ever -changing and ever interesting. - -“It is more fitful to-night than ever,” said Mr. Bruce, to Mr. Graham. - -“Yes,” said Mr. Graham, “and I think we are foolish in staying so close -to this seething mass of lava, rock and ashes which may overflow its -bounds and engulf us at any moment.” - -“But we are far enough away to escape if we should be threatened,” said -Mr. Bruce. - -“So the Pompeiians and even those of Herculaneum thought, as they -laughed and jested on, while old Vesuvius was preparing to bury them,” -said Mr. Graham. - -“Then you think we had better leave this place?” asked Mr. Bruce, -convinced himself that they were playing with fire by remaining here. - -“I do most assuredly,” replied Mr. Graham, “but I hate to do so, for -this sight is grand and one which we may never see again.” - -“Would it not be well to conduct the ladies to some villa at a safe -distance and then return and see the thing out. I confess it has a -strange fascination for me, and I would like to see the grand climax,” -said Mr. Bruce. - -“That may be a long time coming,” said Mr. Graham, “for these things are -very uncertain.” - -“That is true,” said Mr. Bruce, “but I have a strange premonition or -something, whatever you might call it, that this grand finale will come -very soon.” - -“If it does,” said Mr. Graham, “and catches us here we are doomed.” - -Onrai and Enola then came up and turning to the King, Mr. Bruce said: -“Aren’t you a little hasty in sending your men to work on that dreadful -volcano?” - -“I may be,” said Onrai, “but I have taken your advice in the matter.” - -“I did give you such advice,” said Mr. Bruce, “but I did not think at -the time that the volcano would assume such a lively attitude. You may -be interested in knowing, Onrai, that that great seething mass of ashes -and melted rock, may overflow its confines at any time and destroy every -man in this party, if he were near enough to it.” - -As Mr. Bruce finished speaking, an unusually severe shock was felt, and -great showers of red-hot coals were driven high into the air, and then, -falling back into the crater, all was dark for a moment, after which the -volcano assumed the same appearance as it had ever in its quieter -moments, for the last twenty-four hours. - -“I do not think it is advisable to send the men to the mountain just -yet,” said Mr. Bruce. “We will want them.” - -The party remained on the terrace until far into the night, witnessing -the weird sight. The volcano might be said to be in a state of eruption -now, but not a violent state of eruption. - -“It is certainly throwing off enough matter to be considered in a state -of eruption,” said Mr. Graham, as he and Mr. Bruce were about to retire -for the night. “But if it grows no worse than this, we are safe.” - -“But it will get worse,” said Mr. Bruce. - -But, notwithstanding this prediction, on the following morning when the -party arose and looked at the volcano, the first thing that had been -their wont to do ever since being here, they were surprised to see only -a thin column of smoke rising from the volcano. The black cloud had -entirely disappeared and a vaporous volume now rising might be taken for -that coming from a camp fire, so small and insignificant was it. Mr. -Graham and Mr. Bruce looked in astonishment at this new freak in the -rather prolific volcano, and were unable to offer any explanations. - -“It is beyond explaining, I think,” said Mr. Graham, after the two had -stood for a long time contemplating the now almost lifeless volcano. - -“It is more than I expected, at any rate,” said Mr. Bruce, a little -slowly, as he remembered his last words of the night before. - -“You were not alone in your belief of yesterday,” said Mr. Graham, “for -we all expected to see a mighty eruption.” - -“It is better as it is, probably,” said Mr. Bruce, “but I am -disappointed. If it remains as tranquil as this another twenty-four -hours, I shall make another visit to its crater and see if it is really -as quiet as it looks.” - -“And I will go with you,” said Mr. Graham. - -So the day wore on and night came and went and another day broke fresh, -beautiful and sunshiny, and the volcano was as quiet as on the morning -previous. - -“What do you think of the volcano, to-day?” asked Onrai of Mr. Bruce. -“Will it be advisable for me to start the men to work?” - -“I think you can send them to the volcano to-day with perfect safety,” -said Mr. Bruce. “The danger is past, I think, for the present, but may -not be for good, for the volcano, now that it has again broken out, may -become active frequently.” - -“Enough,” said Onrai, “I will get the men in readiness, for they can -work but a week at this time, as they will have to return to the city to -celebrate the Day of Resis. All are required to be there on that day. -During this week they can get well started, and upon their return they -can begin where they left off. Would you like to accompany me?” - -“With pleasure,” added they all in chorus, and together they started for -the camp on the other side of the avenue. - -The men had been up for sometime, the morning meal had been eaten and -the remains cleared away, and they were now awaiting orders from the -King. The party crossed the avenue and immediately upon the word being -sent around the camp that the King was with them, all were attention and -awaiting orders. One of the men, who seemed to have command, came -forward and received orders from the King to get in readiness at once, -and proceed to the cliff to begin operations. It took but a moment for -the word to be sent flying around the camp, and in an instant, almost, -the tents were lowered, rolled up and placed upon the backs of the -zebras and elephants, and the men in line to start. - -“If these men are as practical in their fighting as they are in this -kind of work, what an army they would make,” said Harry, who had spent -five years in one of the crack regiments of the O. N. G., and thought he -understood the art of breaking camp. - -“These men could be made regular fighting machines,” said Mr. Bruce. -“Did you see how they fought on the nights when the negroes tried to -make the attack on the villa? They stood like statues until the hot -breath of the negroes were in their faces, and then their arms rose and -fell like automatons, and each stroke killed its man. I never saw a -cooler piece of business in my life.” - -“Their great ability in this direction is to be wasted though, if such -an ability can be wasted,” said Harry; “for with the crevice closed -again, they will never have a chance to try their powers in this -direction against invaders.” - -“No,” said Mr. Bruce, “but it is far better as it is.” - -The men had now fallen into line, none of them riding, for only the pack -animals were to be taken. In a column of tens they started on their -march over the bad lands toward the crevice. There were fully five -thousand of these, and they made a most imposing sight as they marched -in perfect order, each man having slung over his shoulder, his -cross-bow, and in his belt, his dagger and ax. These equipments had been -brought along for two reasons; they might have to fight off the negroes, -and then they had to make hunting tours to get meat for the camp. In -perfect step, this army of giants moved toward the cliffs. They had gone -several miles, when, looming up before them, they saw an immense body of -negroes, speared and hatcheted, and ready for the fray. - - - - - CHAPTER XLI. - THE SLAUGHTER. - - -The leader of the large body stopped short and those in the rear craned -their necks to see what had caused the sudden halt; but they could see -nothing, for it was only the leaders, who had just reached the top of a -slight eminence, who could see the large body of negroes, standing with -shields in place and spears in hand as if expecting the Onians. The men -looked again and could hardly believe their eyes. No, they could not be -mistaken; there they were; an array of black, grinning devils, -brandishing their spears, or pounding their shields with them. - -Onrai and his friends, who had been riding in the rear, hurried forward -when the column stopped, to see what was the matter. It took them -sometime to do this, but when they arrived at the head of the column and -saw from their high position on the elephants’ backs, the great body of -negroes facing them and only half a mile distant, their surprise knew no -bounds. The Onians looked at the King and his white companions, as if -wondering if they had been led to this point by a lie, to fight these -black animals, for none of them realized that these black, shiny-skinned -and nude beings were human. But why should the King lie to them? They -were perfectly willing to come here on any mission for the King, and it -was not necessary to get them here by a ruse. - -Again that superstitious fear of the whites took possession of them, and -their faces began to assume that startled look as if afraid that some -unknown calamity was about to overtake them. They kept their eyes on the -whites as they advanced and consulted with the King. Why were they -talking in such low tones? Why did they not address the men and explain -this new mystery? Not a word had passed between the Onians, but the same -fear seemed to take possession of them at the same time, and they looked -from one to the other and knew that the same thoughts had come to all. - -Mr. Bruce looked over the men and noticed that hunted look in their -faces, and he knew that immediate action must be taken or they would be -lost; that these men, crazed for the moment by a superstitious fear, -might turn on them first and, getting them out of the way, turn and flee -from the strange enemy. - -“Onrai,” said Mr. Bruce, as he rode up hastily beside the King, “Quick, -don’t lose a moment, but order the pack animals to the rear. The men are -becoming demoralized and need immediate action or all is lost. The old -suspicion in regard to us has again taken possession of them and they -may turn on us at any moment. It matters little about us, but the -negroes must be driven back. Give your orders.” - -Onrai turned to the men and he too, saw that dread look on their faces. - -“Men,” said he, almost beside himself with fear of the consequences if -he should lose control of them; “men, yonder horde of black demons are -here to take your country, to take your lives, but worse, to take your -wives, mothers, brothers and sisters. They are here to destroy our land, -to devastate our fields of grain and fruit, to steal and kill our -animals, to destroy our beautiful city and the many villas throughout -our land. They know no law, they have no religion, they care nothing for -the lives of others. They will kill us or drive us from our own land, -into a distant world where we will starve and die. Will you not fight -for country, home, loved ones and for the right? These demons have come -through the crevice which we were this day to commence closing, and they -must be driven back. If we do not drive them back, killing as many as is -in our power in doing so, then will they force us to travel that path -which leads from our old Land of On, and which, when once followed, can -never be retraced. Come, Onians, quickly; shall it be those black beasts -who shall leave On, or ourselves?” - -The men looked at each other in astonishment. They could not realize at -first that such a state of affairs could possibly exist, as there being -the remotest possibility of their being driven from this land, which was -theirs by right of inheritage and possession. The truth began to dawn on -them, though, as Onrai continued speaking, and when he had finished, a -low rumbling sound was heard, like the first faint sound of the -approaching earthquake, but like this it grew in volume, until it broke -in a mighty shout, and the men were Onrai’s, to do with as he wished. -Only let them drive from the beautiful land of On the hated beasts which -faced them, waiting the end of the parley. - -Onrai understood that shout, although he had never heard it before as a -shout of consent, he had heard it frequently as one of approbation, when -he or others of the land would perform some particularly hard feat in -athletics, or show great heroism in the hunt. It simply meant that they -were pleased with what he said, and they were anxious to get at the -fray. - -“I will give you orders at first,” said Onrai, “but you must obey those -of my companions when they give them. They have had invaders in their -land and have learned to repulse them, and drive them back. Do as they -command you and we will be victorious. Are you ready?” - -Again that shout. - -“Then get the pack animals to the rear quickly.” - -Without a word the elephants were driven to the rear, and the men -awaited further orders. - -“Mr. Bruce,” said Mr. Graham, “we think you are better capable of -handling these men and we will act as your subordinates.” - -“I accept the commission,” replied Mr. Bruce, “not because I feel myself -superior to yourself or Harry, but because some one must act at once. We -will divide our men into three battalions and march in line of battle. -Harry, you will take the right. Mr. Graham, you will take the left and I -will take the centre. If the negroes, as I expect them to do, charge -straight for the centre, you will each close in on their flanks; but if -you see the centre giving way, rush for that point at once for we must -hold the position. Now we will divide our men.” - -They divided the men into three battalions and formed them into the line -of battle, explaining to them, in the meantime, that they must hold fast -together, and not allow the negroes to break their line. The men went -about the different manœuvres like old soldiers, when they once saw -through them. - -The line now drew up and Mr. Graham, Mr. Bruce and Harry, each in front -of his battalion, mounted on elephants, with Onrai riding next to Mr. -Bruce in the centre, they marched slowly toward the negroes. Every man -had his cross-bow in position and arrows ready for use. The formidable -hatchet and daggers were in the belts handy, and where they could be -gotten at the most easily. The negroes’ faces had lost the grin, and the -yells had ceased for the moment as they saw the array of giants -advancing. They had never before, in all their many wars, stood before -such a formidable body of men, and their courage was failing them. But -they had a chief, a wild, barbarous fellow, who knew not what fear was, -and seeing that cowardly look stealing over the faces of his men, he -jumped before them and racing up and down in front of the line, halloed -and yelled, pounding his spear on the shield, and in this way worked the -men into such a state of bravery, which was only equaled by his own. - -Then again facing the army, which was moving silently toward them, he -gave a few words of command, and with a yell and a rush, they came -tearing toward the Onians. - -“Halt!” thundered Mr. Bruce. “Stand fast and do not let them force your -line.” - -And the black demons came, never stopping until within range, when Mr. -Bruce, giving command, a volley of arrows poured into the negroes and -nearly the entire front line of these fell. This checked the negroes but -rallying in a moment they again charged, and before the Onians could -raise their bows, the negroes had raised their spears and hurled them at -their enemy. The volley made most frightful havoc with the front rank, -and the Onians fell back for a moment, for the first time in their lives -seeing a body of their men killed in this way. They looked at the dead -and wounded, not knowing what to think of this fearful slaughter, and -again the strange fear began to creep over them. - -“On, men, do not stop!” commanded Onrai, seeing them falter, “or they -will kill you all. Don’t you see they have killed your comrades? Avenge -them!” - -And the men, looking up, and seeing the black demons on them, and -fearing the same fate which had met their companions, made a rush, and -with the daggers uplifted, on they went at the blacks, meeting them with -a crash as they came forward, and hurling them back by their superior -weight. Then began a most fearful slaughter. The Onians, remembering the -death of their companions, became as Bruce had said they would, regular -fighting machines. Even he and his subordinates were swept on by the -irresistible ranks from the rear as they pushed their companions -forward. Perfect order was kept, however, and those in the front ranks -wielded the dagger with fearful force and alacrity. The negroes, -overpowered, and almost crazed with fear at the slaughter going on among -their people, forgot all about fighting or even defending themselves. - -The one great desire to escape these fearful daggers took complete -possession of them; they turned on their countrymen who were crowding -them forward, and using their hatchets, fists or feet, they walked, ran, -rolled or crowded over these, trying to get out of reach of those -muscular arms which were now as bloody as the knives they wielded, but -stained with the blood of the negroes. At last they broke into a run and -started for the crevice, which was a good four or five miles distant. -The Onians needed no orders now, but rushed wildly after the fleeing -negroes. The negroes being light of limb, however, and probably used to -such rough fields as this, gained on the Onians and were some distance -ahead, when, looking ahead of them they saw another band marching toward -them. This proved to be a reinforcement, and the chief of the routed -band, after haranguing his tribe for a moment, prevailed on them to -turn, and with the reinforcement again give the giants battle. - -The flying Onians were again brought to a halt by Mr. Bruce, and formed -in regular line of battle. The remaining negroes also formed in line of -battle and advanced, as nearly as could be judged, almost in equal -numbers to the Onians. Their chief was again running up and down in -front of the line crying, and soon had the men worked up into another -fiendish frenzy. Mr. Bruce halted his men, determined to wait for the -negroes. The negroes came tearing forward until within a few feet of the -Onians, when the latter again raised their cross-bows and sent a volley -of arrows into the front ranks of the negroes. But the negroes were -expecting them now, and turned the arrows aside with their shields, -scarcely a dozen having fallen. They did not stop, but kept up the mad -rush until within twenty-five feet of the Onians, when they stopped -suddenly and their right arms shooting out quickly the fearful, sharp, -spear-pointed hatchets, flew toward the Onians, and striking the -unprotected bodies of the giants, passed clear through them. Then, with -a sudden jerk of the wrist, the hatchet was wrenched from the gaping -wound, and pulled back to the negro by the leather string which was -attached to the handle of the hatchet. Then again would the deadly -weapon be hurled, and again buried in the breast of a fresh victim; and -again and again, the whole fearful thing being done so quickly that the -weapon could scarcely be seen flying through the air. The slaughter was -worse than had been that of the negroes by the knives of the Onians. The -horribly lacerated bodies were being piled up high on the ground, but -the brave Onians still stood perfectly helpless in front of those -merciless hatchets. - -Mr. Bruce was nonplussed for a moment. This style of warfare was so new -to him and so horrible, he could but look and wonder at the horrible -ingenuity of the weapons. - -“Send a volley of arrows into them,” cried the King, who seemed to come -to his senses first. - -The men mechanically raised their bows, but before they could spring -them, the deadly hatchets struck them full in the chests or bodies, and -torn and bleeding, with a hole clean through them, in which an arm could -have been shoved, they fell headlong over the bodies of their -companions, who had met the same miserable fate. The situation was -becoming desperate. Men who had shown such bravery, and who could on -equal terms annihilate the army before them, were beginning to quail -before that fearful onslaught, and were unconsciously probably, falling -back. Still that fearful, never-ceasing charge of flying hatchets. -Slowly the men fell back, but the movement was becoming quicker each -moment. In a few minutes more they would be in a run, and all would be -lost. - -Mr. Bruce was growing desperate, as he saw this grand army being -demoralized by one which was so inferior in every respect. Riding down -the line with the huge elephant, which was pierced by the hatchets as he -passed before them, he called to the men to take courage and rally once -more. Onrai, too, rode before them, and by every word he knew, tried to -imbue them with new courage. But he understood how these poor men, who -had been kept in ignorance their whole lives, of the existence of other -races, and the art of fighting, could not understand why this awful -slaughter should be, or who these demons could be who were mowing them -down by hundreds. The horrible dread was taking possession of them -again, and Onrai and his companions saw this. - -“Men of On,” said Onrai, in despair, “these devils will not only kill -you and your companions, but they will kill your wives, sisters and -brothers; they will throw down your houses, they will destroy the land. -Brave men of On, who turn not from the lion, tiger or elephant, do not -let these black beasts show themselves the greater. Turn on them, cut -them, chop them, beat them, hammer their foul bodies into the earth, -slash them until not a piece large enough is left to feed a jackal. On -to them.” - -Mr. Bruce had given Harry and Mr. Graham orders to close in with their -battalions, as soon as Onrai could again encourage the men to advance, -and show no mercy; to ride into the black ranks with the elephants, and -crush them beneath their feet. Accordingly, when Onrai had ceased -speaking, and had turned and had himself led the way into the black -ranks, the men went with a rush, notwithstanding that hundreds of them -dropped in the advance. Harry and Mr. Graham closed in on their flanks, -and were slowly surrounding the now emboldened blacks. - -Still they plied the frightful weapons, and scores of the Onians were -dropping. It was a fearful advance, but the men were sticking to it -bravely; but there were great chances against their ever overcoming this -hellish tribe, with their fiendish weapons. The Onians were again losing -ground, they could not withstand that awful massacre. - -But what is this coming up in the rear? The earth trembles as with -another earthquake, but there is no rumbling with it now. The men looked -back. Ah, yes, it is Sedai mounted on Gip, and with a hundred immense -elephants back of him, all being hurried on by their riders. Quickly the -elephants come forward, their swinging gait turning their bodies from -side to side, the earth trembling with each fall of their huge feet. -Straight for the blacks they made the ranks of the Onians breaking away -to allow them to pass. The blacks look and see the awful enemy coming -straight for them, on which their murderous hatchets could have no -effect. They hurled once more the hatchets at the Onians, and pulling -these back, dropped them at their sides, and tried by flight to escape -the crushing feet of the elephants. But the elephants rushed into their -midst, not only killing with their fearful feet but using their trunks -and tusks as well, slaying and crushing as they went. Now the Onians -made a charge, and clutching their daggers in one hand and the hatchets -in the other, done as Onrai had told them to do, and hacked and chopped, -and cut and beat and pounded the enemy, their faces and arms being -covered with the blood, but still showing no mercy; they were for the -time merciless brutes. They had fallen on to the flanks of the negroes, -and such was their fearful onslaught, and so fast were these hacked and -mutilated bodies piled up, that it looked as if the awful carnage would -not cease, until every black carcass was heaped up in one fearful mass -of reeking and quivering flesh. - -But a low, rumbling sound is heard, which grows louder and louder, and -comes nearer and nearer. It is another earthquake. The Onians stop for a -moment in their awful massacre, and in this one moment the remainder of -the black horde turn and make for the crevice. The earth was shaking -fearfully though and the men could hardly keep their feet. On they -staggered, until the Onians, finally realizing that the blacks were -escaping them, made a rush after them. But the earth still trembled and -it was suddenly growing dark. What was wrong with the volcano? A huge -mass of stones and smoke came forth in a rush in a greater volume than -it had at any time before, and great showers of rock and ashes were -pouring from its hellish mouth. On the negroes ran, and on the Onians -sped after them. The negroes had now reached the crevice, and were -fighting for a foothold on the ledge. Some of them were successful, but -most of them were forced over the side, falling into the yawning abyss -below. The Onians were about to dash after them, when a fearful, -deafening report was heard, and looking up to the volcano, they saw a -mighty mass of molten lava thrown far into the heavens, and then -dropping back into the crater, overflow the wall of this, and fall in a -great stream into the crevice. Our friends, spellbound, watched the -sight, while the immense flow of lava rolled over the sides of the -mountain, and into the crevice, filling up that great hole. It was -running in a monstrous flow, easily five hundred feet wide, and twenty -feet deep, as near as our friends could calculate. It came pouring -through the crevice, well up toward the party, and they started back, in -alarm; but it gained on them, and to make it worse, a terrible shower of -hot ashes and water was pouring down on them. They were blinded and -gasping for breath, turned toward the villa. They were being burned and -scalded, their feet becoming blistered; they could not see, they could -not breathe. - - - - - CHAPTER XLII. - BURIED ALIVE. - - -And so they stumbled blindly on, blindly, for they could not open their -eyes because of the fearful dust and ashes. The thick cloud of dust and -ashes came forth in a mighty avalanche, burying the land and filling the -air with its death-dealing particles; making such a darkness as could be -felt; a close, suffocating darkness more like the blackness of an -unventilated dungeon than the open darkness of night; a darkness which -was penetrated only by the mighty light of the belching volcano, the -light varying with every phase of the eruption; now a lurid glare which -gave the dust-covered earth the appearance of a blood-stained floor; -again it would change to a blue which would almost equal the soft rays -of the moon; then it would die away to a faint green, casting a -death-like glow over all. - -And the fearful rumbling continued and far down in the bowels of the -earth, could be heard that great lake or river of molten rock and ore, -rushing to the outlet which would free it; and the earth would tremble -with the fearful fight of the mass as it surged and burned and crushed -its way through its underground channels. Then again could be heard the -hissing and blowing off of the steam as it escaped from the crevice in -the crater. - -About the fleeing army fell the hot ashes and steam. They had made a -wild rush toward the villa when the first shower had struck them, and -they were still hurrying as fast as their bleeding feet could carry -them. They had covered miles, and this was wonderful when it was -considered, that the ashes had fallen almost to the depth of a foot; and -each step that they took they would sink into the hot, ragged substance -which would burn and blister their feet, protected only by sandals. And -their progress would be suddenly checked now and then, by great -fragments of rock, having been hurled by the awful power of the volcano, -falling directly in their path, perhaps crushing one of the poor Onians -beneath its weight. Then in their blindness they would rush into each -other, knocking each other down, and burnt and bleeding, and almost -smothered by the fearful dust, they could hardly regain their feet. But -hurry as they would their progress was growing slower each moment and -they were not getting out of the fearful shower of dust and ashes. This -seemed to grow worse as they advanced, and the survivors, who were still -left to suffer on, were fast giving out. - -It looked as if they could not possibly survive the terrible struggle, -this unequal fight with the forces of the earth’s interior. The -atmosphere would clear for a moment, and the lurid glare of the volcano -would again light up the scene, giving a momentary hope which would be -killed again by a heavier downpour of ashes and dust. Then the struggle -would recommence; a silent struggle, for no sound was made by these -helpless creatures, as they fought on, gasping for breath, reeling in -their weakness, falling now; but putting forth another great effort and -standing erect once more they would stumble ahead again and so on, -until, strength exhausted, they would fall for the last time, the shower -of ashes and dust soon choking their last breath, and burying the burned -and bleeding bodies beneath their awful folds. But these Onians were -more than ordinary men, they had more vital life in their bodies, they -were strong to the last muscle; their every sinew was developed and -health and exercise made them powerful, and so they kept up the struggle -longer than would our friends had they been on foot. But they had been -mounted on great elephants during the battle. They at first mounted them -upon leaving the camp in the morning, expecting only to accompany the -men to their scene of labor when they would return. So when the negroes -were met, and they saw that a battle was inevitable, they remained -mounted so as to better conduct the fight. - -At first it had been suggested that they should ride zebras, but it was -decided to take the elephants, as they would stand the hard journey over -the bad lands better. And it had been a lucky decision on their part, -for now they were saved the fearful fight with that hot shower of ashes, -which not only filled the air, making it almost impossible to breathe, -but which also made a bed which was nearly impossible to walk over or -through, as the bed had grown to such a depth, that it was nothing more -than wading, Sedai had been foremost, in the charge of the elephants -into the negro band, and had gotten far ahead of his friends, reaching -the volcano even before some of the negroes had. When he saw that awful -sea of lava pouring over the side of the crevice, he had turned and -motioned his comrades to follow, and had made Gip understand that he -must travel as he had never traveled before. The intelligent animal -seemed to understand, and hurried on, too, by the heat and burning ashes -as they fell on his back, he started on a run which would have soon -brought them safely to the villa, if the air and road had not been -obstructed by the miserable ashes. - -But the elephants, all of which had followed Gip, were, too, -experiencing the torture of the awful cloud and shower, and they had -stumbled many times, over the rocks and in the soft bed which was -getting deeper each moment. The elephants had kept close together -though, and had in this way, kept trodden a very good path. Our friends -could see, during the few intervals when the cloudy atmosphere would -break and the light of the volcano penetrate this, the poor Onians -stumbling along in the darkness and scorching cinders. They had called -to them to keep up courage, but it was needless advice to these men, for -they would not give up until the last moment. - -They had tried to get the elephants to kneel, and take on their backs, -as many as they could carry; but the animals, crazed by pain and fear, -dashed on, often crushing beneath their feet, those whom their riders -would save. And so the elephants rushed on and as the light would break -through the awful blackness, the riders could see that the number of -poor pedestrians was growing less and less, until at last, none were -seen. They had all succumbed to the overpowering cloud of ashes, and -their bodies now strewed the ground, which but a few hours before they -had passed over, strong in healthful life; and of the five thousand who -had started on the march that morning not one was left; all, all had met -their fate. Some by the deadly hatchets of the negroes, others by the -fearful downpour of hot cinders. - -The Land of On had met its first great catastrophe; it had for the first -time in his history, experienced some of those adversities, which had so -frequently befallen the other countries of the world. But our friends -were still alive. Onrai, Mr. Graham, Mr. Bruce, Harry and Sedai, were -being borne through the blackness by the elephants. Their throats were -parched, even their lungs seemed burning up with the great heated shower -of ashes, which they had been compelled to breathe so long. Their eyes -were almost swollen shut, their faces and bodies were covered with -blisters where the cruel, hot cinders had struck them. Even they, who -had not been exposed wholly to the storm, and who had been spared the -awful struggle of limping through the hot bed of cinders, even they -began to despair of ever getting out of this radius of dust and ashes. - -And the elephants were now beginning to stumble and sway from side to -side, growing weaker and weaker with the terrible exertion, their -strength being sapped by the plungings into the ash-bed, which was now -beyond their knees. They would rock from side to side striking each -other, but, again bracing up, try it once more. The position of our -friends was becoming unsafe, as the elephants were liable to fall at any -moment and crush them beneath their huge bodies; but it meant sure death -to leave their backs, so expecting death to overtake them each moment, -either from the burning air which was scorching their very lungs, or -beneath the prostrate animals which were now struggling so bravely to -save them. They were hurrying on, but where? Only to death. Again there -was a fearful rumbling, the very bowels of the earth seeming to be -disjointed and ground to fragments. It grew louder and louder; it almost -deafened the sounds of hissing steam and ashes which fell around the -little group, and the sucking sound caused by the sinking in and pulling -out of the feet of the fast-failing animals. - -Finally the earth began to shake and the exhausted elephants, unable to -withstand this new enemy, fell to their knees and then flat on their -sides. The men had strength enough left to jump and save themselves from -being crushed, but they were forced nearly to the hips into the ashes, -and they could not extricate themselves. Then this was the last, this -was the end of the happy sojourn in the Land of On. No, it could not be, -they must not die here in this miserable way and be buried by the -never-ceasing shower; they must struggle on. - -“Up,” said Mr. Bruce to his elephant, as the rumbling ceased and the -earth again became steady. “Once more, now,” he halloed out as he -reached forward and struck the poor beast across the ear with his hook. -But the elephant, after making several ineffectual struggles, gave a -plaintive cry and let its head drop into the relentless ashes. As in a -quicksand, the five men stood perfectly helpless, and their lives fast -going out. The elephants had, one by one, given up the struggle, and -were now panting and gasping and waiting for the end. They seemed to -realize that they were doomed and the plaintive cry would break from -their gasping throats, as if asking aid of those whom they had tried to -save, but all were powerless. Hope was fast failing them. They could not -possibly last much longer, but what mattered it whether they went now, -or lived to suffer for a few moments longer. There was no power on earth -that could save them now, and they must look death square in the face. -It seemed hard surely, to die so near to friends, and life and sunshine, -for they knew that this death-dealing shower could not extend many miles -unless it be worse than was that other. - -They knew that the dear ones were safe in the villa, for, though they -were in the radius of the shower, they were sheltered from this, and the -flow of lava had not run toward the villa, or they would have seen it. -It was some consolation then to know, that if they must die, these dear -ones at least were safe. But what will become of them alone in this -strange land? They would have to entrust themselves wholly to the -people, who had once looked upon them with superstitious fear, and who -might again, after this dreadful catastrophe, turn on them, and having -no longer any one to protect them, or having no defense to offer as they -had before, destroy them. It was not pleasant to think thus as the awful -ashes continued to pile up around them, burying them alive. - -The pain which this thought gave them of possible danger to their loved -ones, was worse than the physical tortures which they were now -suffering, and they turned and wrenched their bodies in their living -graves, in very agony of mind. And Onrai, too, seemed to be suffering -more than bodily pain. If his thoughts could have been read, they -probably would have told the story of baffled hopes, and of the death of -aspirations which the love for Enola had kindled in him. It was harder -for him to die thus than for any of the others, for he had been so -strong and mighty, and his life was full of such bright hopes, and he -had so much to live for, but it was ended. All, all was lost. - -But may be not, thought Mr. Bruce, for Gip, who had laid for a moment -perfectly quiet, had now begun to again exert his awful strength and was -twisting and plunging about, as if to make a place on which he could -stand. He accomplished this finally and rose to his feet. He had had a -short rest from the fearful struggles of the flight, and he could again -commence the fight. Sedai, who was near him, caught the howdah as he -rose and was lifted out of the ashes. He then made Gip understand that -he was to help the others, and one by one the great elephant, lifted by -his trunk, raised them to his back. Then starting in the direction, -which they had kept since starting on the awful ride, the great beast -fought on; they had been moving thus for several moments, when he -suddenly stopped and refused to move further. Just then the sky became -light for the moment, and a zebra was seen lying in their path, and -lying beneath it, the body of Enola. - - - - - CHAPTER XLIII. - LOST. - - -But what of those who had been left behind? What had been their fate, -and how had they spent those dreadful hours, when they could but -reasonably expect that their companions, who had left them only that -morning alive with hope and health, had met the most miserable death? -The morning had been beautiful, and all had gone to see the striking of -the tents and breaking of camp, and they had followed the marching army -for some distance over the bad lands; but at the earnest request of the -men they had at last turned and gone back to the villa. They had noticed -the continued inactivity of the volcano and had hoped, woman fashion, -that the worst might be over, and their spirits had been, accordingly, -bright. - -But the long morning hours grew tiresome, and the women became restless, -and could find no way to pass the weary time. They spent a while on the -terrace, but the garden had lost all its beauty by the shower of ashes. -They ate their luncheon mechanically at midday and then tried to sleep -awhile, but made a sad failure of this, and at last, not knowing what -else to do, they had ordered their zebras and started for a ride down -the avenue. It was not long before they were well beyond the radius of -falling ashes, and it was a great relief to them to see green fields and -shady trees again, and the beautiful smooth pavement of the avenue. They -rode for a long distance, forgetting, in their pleasure, that they were -getting a long way from the villa. But the sun was so bright here, and -everything so fresh and green, and the air so pure, they dreaded -returning to the rather doubtful atmosphere of the villa. - -But they must turn now, for the sun was getting well down toward the -west, and what is that? The question was easily answered, for they had -become quite accustomed to the rumbling sound of the earthquakes. Still -it startled them, and they urged their beasts forward. The sound grew -nearer, and then the earth began to shake so violently the zebras -tottered and almost fell. And then another awful shock came, and the -zebras became frightened, and, taking the soft bit between their teeth, -they tore down the avenue. Then the awful explosion came like the report -of a thousand cannons, and the riders saw the awful spout of dust, -ashes, steam, smoke, pouring from the volcano, and almost immediately -afterward they were engulfed in that fearful black atmosphere which -choked and blinded them. - -The zebras stopped so suddenly that their riders almost lost their -seats, but by kind words, and by gently patting them, they were -persuaded to proceed carefully. Here the avenue was plain to see, and -there was little fear of losing the way, but the ashes were falling with -such force and such volume, the roadway was fast becoming blocked. Still -the zebras were light-footed, and their riders had hopes of their being -able to reach the villa. But the borders of the avenue continued in that -unbroken line of trees, and the surrounding country was so much alike, -it was hard to tell just where to turn off to the villa. The thought had -occurred to Enola that they might be carried by this, and on and on -until the beasts, overcome, would sink to the ground, leaving the riders -to their fate. It was impossible to see anything, excepting now and -then, when the light of the volcano would break through the awful gloom -for a moment. Even then the air was so thick with the cinders and dust, -they could not penetrate it more than a few feet. - -And so they plodded along, each moment the gloom becoming more dense and -the avenue pavement harder for the zebras to traverse. They must -certainly have reached the villa by this time, but for all they could -see, they might still be ten miles from it. They could not place any -dependence on the zebras, for they were too badly scared to act -rationally; besides their senses of smell and sight were entirely lost -in this stifling atmosphere. - -The situation was becoming desperate, but there was positively nothing -to do but ride on with the forlorn hope of riding beyond the circle of -the shower. But if they could not reach the villa, why not turn and ride -back to the green fields and open country again? Aye, why not. The -thought had occurred to Enola, and the more she thought of it, the more -feasible the idea seemed to be, and at last it occurred to her that this -might be their only chance of escape. Waiting until the volcano’s light -broke through the gloom for a moment, she motioned to her friends to -follow her, and after a moment she managed to turn her zebra’s head, and -when this was done, and they had gotten started in the opposite -direction, they seemed to have the wind at their backs and they could -ride with a little more comfort. But the darkness was intense now, for -night had closed in, and if possible, had added to the Egyptian -blackness. The riders could only see each other at very infrequent -intervals when the volcano’s light would, for a moment, melt the gloom -and give the almost exhausted women a moment’s respite. - -They were moving very slowly, the ashes getting so thick over the avenue -pavements, that the zebras found it almost impossible to further beat -their way through it. But one of the infrequent light spells now allowed -them to look about again, and Enola saw that they had left the avenue. -On an ordinary dark night this could have been easily detected by the -sound of the zebras’ hoofs, but now the grass sod and the hard onyx -pavement were the same; they were both lost beneath the carpet of ashes. -This new aspect of things did not please our friends. They were being -overcome very rapidly by the thick atmosphere; it was killing them by -inches. They could scarcely breathe any longer; every breath was like -the stab of a stiletto, the sharp particles of the ashes had penetrated -and cut the soft membranes of the throat and lungs, and then that steamy -air, upon touching the raw flesh would cause the most acute pain. Their -hands and faces were blistered, and their eyes seemed to be burning out -of their heads. - -Enola and Nellie stood it better than Mrs. Graham. She had almost fallen -from her zebra several times, and Nellie and Enola were now trying to -ride on either side of her, to save her from falling, if possible. But -it was growing worse each moment, and hope was nearly dead. They were -staggering along in the darkness, the zebras every now and then -stumbling up against a tree, and nearly rubbing their riders from their -backs. They felt satisfied that they had lost their way, and if this was -so, and they could not again reach the avenue, then, indeed, might all -hope be abandoned. Black as Erebus, the air was not only laden with the -death-dealing ashes, but was so hot and humid, that no living thing -could withstand it for any length of time. - -It seemed an age since that first awful rumbling of the earth, and this -fearful darkness overtook them; it seemed that night ought to have given -way to day and the day to night again. So acute was their pain, so -fearful the darkness, so quiet all else but the rumbling of the earth -and the hissing of the steam in the volcano, that time itself seemed to -stand still waiting for the hellish scene to pass. In such a moment one -could imagine that a lifetime had been passed, and if youthful features -should be changed to those of old age in such a night of suffering, it -would not seem strange, for in those few short hours more suffering is -crowded than in many years of ordinary life, and when it is all over -with, one cannot realize that this could be in such a short space of -time. Then these women were fast losing consciousness; their brains were -in a whirl; they could no longer think; they had almost grown insensible -to their pain; their eyes no longer tried to penetrate the darkness -about them; they no longer tried to guide the zebras as they had done -heretofore, notwithstanding that the zebras were more likely to know the -right path than themselves. They still clung to the mane and rein and -tried hard to retain their seats on the backs of the zebras, but they -did this mechanically and not because they were guided by any spirit of -self-protection. - -They had now became separated too, and each of the zebra was trying to -pick out a path for itself. But it was dreadful, for the zebras were now -also wandering on from a mere sense of habit, and not because they had -any longer any hope of escaping. Their heads dropped until their noses -almost touched the ash-covered ground. Their eyelids seemed frozen in a -cramped position over the eyes and the balls of their eyes looked out -like pieces of glass which had been rubbed with sand paper. There was no -longer any sight in those eyes; there could not be after being exposed -to the beating ashes and dust as long as they had. The legs of the poor -beasts were raw to the knees, but still they plodded through the ashes -which must have set them crazy with pain, if they too had not lost all -sense of pain. - -Such dreadful sufferings could not help but make one helplessly mad. It -was a hell, an awful, reason-destroying hell, but a merciful hell in a -way, for although it lacerated the poor, tortured bodies of its victims, -it at the same time destroyed all consciousness of their suffering. So -like poor, undying spirits in a helpless state of painless suffering, if -such a thing could be, the zebras wandered on, bearing the almost -lifeless bodies of the women. - -Suddenly Enola half roused herself and opened her swollen eyes. Only for -a moment, however, for they soon closed again and she lapsed into that -comatose state, and then had dropped to the zebra’s neck as before. But -again the eyes half opened and this time she showed signs of returning -consciousness. - -But the eyes closed again for a moment and then she starts as if having -been struck; no, she had not been mistaken, there it was, a light -burning through the darkness. Could she call for help? Her throat was -dry and parched; she had not tried to make a sound in hours, days it -seemed to her, but she must try now; so opening the baked lips she made -an effort, but it was useless. She could not articulate. But the zebras -were moving slowly toward the light and they might see her yet. It must -be the villa and they were safe at last. She turned to point the light -out to her companions, but they are gone. She looked again, for just at -that moment, the flash of light broke through the gloom. But no, her -companions were no longer with her. Had they found their way to a place -of safety and had she been lost in the darkness, or had they been lost? -She tried to remember when she last saw them, but she could not. She had -a faint recollection of their having all been together sometime during -this awful night, or, was it night? She could not say. It might have -been years ago, so indefinite had grown the flight of time. She again -turned toward the light; yes, it was still there, and then she tried to -turn the head of her zebra towards the spot. Her arm was stiff and she -could hardly move, but she managed to slap the zebra on the side of the -neck, but he did not turn. He still wandered on in that aimless way, -seeming to heed nothing. - -Oh, this was fearful. She tried again and again but the only response -the poor beast made, was to drop dead in his tracks. She felt him giving -way under her and made a last effort to save herself, but too late; the -beast caught her limbs as he fell and half burying her in the soft -ashes, held her fast. She tried hard and wrenched the tender limbs until -torn and bleeding, but to no purpose; she was held as secure as if tied -to the side of the beast. She was too exhausted to make much of an -effort, and the little she had made, had caused her to lose -consciousness for the moment. - -The moments flew by but all unknown to the poor, insensible girl and -death seemed inevitable. There was no hope now, there could be none, -unless it came from where that mocking light still gleamed through the -darkness. But it would have been as helpful to the dying woman had it -been ten miles away. It was better then, that the poor wanderer should -never again wake to consciousness, for she would be saved the helpless -suffering caused by knowing that she was near help and yet was beyond -it. - -The ashes still fell in torrents, the humid air was growing more -intolerable each moment with the hot steam and dust, and the blackness -had grown more intense. Yes, it could be felt, and here in the midst of -all its hellish night, lay Enola dying. - -But no, what is that huge mass which has almost tramped on her, but -which stops just in time? It is Gip. - -[Illustration: She tried hard and wrenched her limbs until torn and -bleeding, but to no purpose.—_Page 338._] - - - - - CHAPTER XLIV. - OUT OF THE ASHES. - - -Yes it was Gip. Great, strong and faithful Gip. The only surviving -animal of all that vast number which had started on that fateful morning -for the cliffs. His great strength had enabled him to overcome all -dangers and obstacles thus far, and on his back he bore the few whom he -had saved. And his almost human intelligence, coupled with his animal -sagacity, had enabled him to direct his course straight for the villa, -through the almost impenetrable atmosphere and fearful darkness. - -Each moment the riders had expected to see him overcome by these -obstacles, but he stumbled on, going down on his knees at times, when he -would become too exhausted to move another step; but after resting for a -moment, he would struggle to his feet again and make another effort. He -was almost blind; he must be for he had been exposed for so many hours -to this cyclone of ashes. But he could still see a little, or else he -would not have stopped when he was about to crush out the little -remaining life left in Enola. Or, was it that animal instinct that made -him realize that he was about to tread on a human being? But the light -from the volcano which now half lit up the weird scene, must have -enabled him to see the prostrate zebra and Enola, for he had only stood -for a moment, when he lowered his monstrous trunk and catching the zebra -firmly about the neck, lifted him completely from off Enola and laid it -at one side. Then he caught up Enola as tenderly as a mother would lift -her babe, and raised her to his back, where Onrai, who seemed to be the -only one who had retained consciousness, took her in his arms, and after -patting the noble beast gently on the end of his trunk to make him -understand that he appreciated this last noble deed of his, he settled -back in the crowded howdah and also lost consciousness. - -Gip stood for a moment longer and looked about him. Yes, he must have -seen, for his head turned until it was in range with the light seen by -Enola, and then he starts towards it. The light grew larger as he drew -nearer to it, and he was finally stopped by the terrace of the villa. He -had only hesitated for a moment, however, and then had mounted the few -steps and crossed the terrace to the high arched doorway of the villa. -Over this had been drawn a silk covering, to keep out, as much as -possible, the ashes and dust. Gip did not stop for this, however, but -pushed right through it. Two or three frightened attendants saw the -great beast enter with its burden of unconscious human beings, and -hurrying up to it they stood for a moment, while Gip kneeled for those -whom he had so bravely rescued, to step from his back. He was weak and -almost exhausted; his great body heaved with a short quick respiration, -which the heated air and over-exertion had caused. His back was covered -with a thick coating of the ashes, and those who were lying or sitting -in the howdah were almost buried in this awful death-dealing substance. - -But Gip could no longer keep the tiring position, and giving a last -short pant, he fell over on his side. - -Those in the howdah were thrown upon the hard stone flooring and laid -there in a heap. The attendants now recognizing the King and his white -companions, hastened to their assistance, and in a very short time they -were laid upon couches and after the scorched garments had been removed -from the bodies, they were deluged with cool water and oil. No part of -their bodies had escaped the tortures of the hot ashes and steam, and -they were almost raw. The limbs of the men who had been buried for some -time in the bed of cinders, were horribly burned and blistered, and even -Enola, who, having laid under the dead zebra for quite a while, had -escaped with hardly less injury. Gently the attendants worked on the -bleeding bodies, not knowing whether life had left them or not. It -matters little, they thought, for it was but a question of a little -while longer until all would be buried beneath the shower of death, -which was slowly but surely burying them. - -But their love for the King and their regard for his guests still -dominated over all other feelings, and they worked hard and faithfully -on the survivors. Enola was the first to recover consciousness, and when -she had fully recovered, and she remembered the awful ride and that Mrs. -Graham and Nellie had been her companions, she tried hard to make the -attendants understand that she wanted to know something of her friends. -But the poor, bewildered women could not comprehend her meaning and -sadly shook their heads. But Enola did not despair, and kept at them, -until, in their desire to help her, they sent for one of the men who -managed to grasp her meaning, and going out made inquiries about her -companions. - -They had not returned with the others who had been saved, and he now -gave this information to Enola. She almost became frantic and made such -pitiful signs for the attendant to go and search for her friends, that, -notwithstanding his awful fear of the dust-laden atmosphere outside, -which had killed so many of his companions, he went for Enola, promising -to make a search for Mrs. Graham and Nellie. And he did. He persuaded -two of his companions to accompany him, and with them he managed to -reach the stables, where the only three remaining elephants had been -left before the eruption. It took considerable time to persuade the -beasts to leave their comfortable quarters and go into the darkness -outside. But the darkness cleared in a short time, and the lurid light -from the volcano made things as light as day. The shower of ashes -ceased, and the atmosphere became comparatively clear, and the elephants -strode forth into the deep covering of ashes. - -The attendant had been able to get but little information from Enola, as -to what direction they had come from when they turned their zebras back. -She could give them positively no information and could not even make -them understand that her zebra had wandered from the avenue, some -distance, she thought from the villa; for she could not articulate a -word, and the men were not accustomed to reading signs. - -But the men started, each taking a different course from the front of -the villa, hoping in this way to find the lost women. One of the -attendants stumbled over the body of Enola’s zebra the first thing, but -after examining this and learning that neither of the women were with -it, he again took up the tramp and had gone but a little distance -further, when his elephant stopped. The man looked about him but could -see nothing. He tried to urge the elephant forward, but he would not -move. He then slid from its back and was half buried in the soft ashes. -But his foot had struck something which was soft and giving, and -stooping down, just above the surface he saw a woman’s head. It was Mrs. -Graham. He gently pushed the ashes away from her body, and speaking to -the elephant, it kneeled, and the man, after much trouble, managed to -crawl into the howdah with his lifeless burden. He continued a short -distance further, when, not finding the body of Nellie, he returned to -the villa. - -Mrs. Graham was carried carefully into one of the apartments and given -the same treatment as had been the others. It was only a few moments -later when one of the other men brought in Nellie. He had found her in -much the same position as had been found her mother, but nearly a mile -distant from her. It was thought for a long time by those who were -working on them, that they were surely dead, but after very hard rubbing -and frequent applications of native restoratives, they began to show -signs of life, and after a little they opened their eyes and looked -about them. That these women had withstood the dreadful experiences of -the past few hours, could scarcely be believed, but so they had, and had -regained consciousness long before the men. - -They too, though, had been brought back to life and their first -inquiries had been of the women. The attendants had told them that the -ladies were safe but had been somewhat overcome by the close atmosphere, -and were slightly indisposed as a consequence. But Onrai knew that he -had seen Enola and had assisted her in some way, but how he could not -tell, for the whole fearful experience seemed, in some way, like a -horrible nightmare. He could not yet fully realize that the events of -the day had really occurred. They seemed too horrible to be real. He -shuddered as he thought of the massacre of his men and later, the -horrible slaughter of the negroes, and then the last occurrence, when -the remainder of his men had perished. Then the fearful ride for life, -the last hope, when the elephants gave out, and then the terrible fear -that Gip would give out after he had once more renewed hope in them. - -Then he saw Enola lying there nearly buried beneath the dead zebra; he -had seen Gip raise her with his trunk, then he had clasped her in his -arms; but all was a blank from here on, until he had wakened and found -the attendants standing about him, and had felt himself bandaged from -head to foot. Yes, it must be, the whole fearful story must be real; -else why this terrible weakness and soreness and all these bandages. He -was convinced at last, that it was no dream, but a terrible reality. But -he marveled that he and his companions yet lived. The whole thing now -passed before the mind’s eye and as he remembered the flying assagais -and the formidable spear-pointed hatchets, and later, the death-dealing -shower of ashes; when he thought of how men and beasts had dropped about -him like sheep, he could but wonder that they, of all the others, should -survive. - -But that brought him to Gip, and he wondered what had become of the -noble beast. He signed to his attendant that he wished to know of the -elephant which had brought them back. The man left the apartment for a -moment, and then returning, said that the elephant had borne them -directly into the large hall of the villa, and had dropped dead a moment -later. But this did not please Onrai, and he gave orders to see that the -elephant had restoratives given him, and to be sure that he was dead -before they gave him up. The man had taken several of his companions, -and they had gone to work on the great beast. He was turned on his back -with great difficulty, and buckets full of stimulants were poured down -his throat. His head was deluged with water, and everything was done to -restore the brave animal to which the survivors owed their lives. And -their work was rewarded at last by the animal showing signs of life, and -a little later, by his again turning on his side and attempting to rise. -This he finally did, and staggering about for a while, he then laid down -in one corner of the hall and was now resting quietly. - -So all the survivors were doing as well as could be expected after the -dreadful experiences through which they had passed. But what of the -eruption? - -Shortly after Gip had burst into the villa with his precious load, the -shower had ceased, as if the volcano had known that now there were no -more victims for it to destroy, and it was useless for it to further -keep up the terrible strain which had shook the earth and covered a -great part of the surrounding country with a layer of ashes. But the -internal fires were still raging, for the great, lurid light flashed -into the dark heavens above, and made all bright within the radius of -several miles. There were no more shocks, and the violent eruption -seemed to have spent its greatest force. From the cliff to a point some -three miles beyond the villa, in which lay our friends, the ground was -covered with a layer of ashes well mixed with a sort of loam, which -would probably make a fertile soil in time. Some large rocks of a lava -formation lay here and there, having been hurled by the mighty internal -fires to this distance. - -The lava flow had ceased, too, as far as could be seen, for none of the -red stream was now visible coming over the side of the cliff. - -It had been very fortunate for the survivors that the flow of lava had -confined itself to certain channels, for if it had taken the old course, -which was shown plainly by the bad lands, there would be no hope of -their escaping. It had run over the sides of the great crevice when our -friends stood looking at it, and it, together with the falling ashes, -had been fast filling the awful crevice. But would the great eruption -end here? Truly it had done damage enough, but would the internal fires -be satisfied with this temporary vent? It seemed hardly possible that -they would, and if they did burst forth again, what would be the further -outcome? But now it was quiet. The hot bed of steam and ashes were fast -cooling into an almost solid mass, and there would be no more plunging -and falling when walking over its surface, hereafter. It would be as the -surface had been before, only a few feet higher. - -A few days longer, and if the party had convalesced sufficiently to -allow them to travel, they would start on their return to the city, for -Onrai had said that all must be in the city on the Day of Resis. Then, -after the ceremonies of the day, after its mysteries had been learned, -on the evening of that day, Enola was to become the bride of the King. - - - - - CHAPTER XLV. - SEARCHING FOR BODIES. - - -One week had passed away since the fearful eruption, and our friends had -convalesced rapidly under the care of the attendants, until now all were -entirely recovered. The sun had shown brightly for a week, its light -unobstructed by any further shower of ashes. The fire and smoke from the -volcano had subsided, until now but a faint blue line was seen slowly -ascending into the heavens from the summit of the mountain. All about -the villa, as far as could be seen, was a bed of ashes, or not so much a -bed of ashes now as it was a cinder soil. But the trees had been -stripped of their verdure and no green thing was seen. If it were not so -excessively hot, our friends could have easily believed that they were -in some temperate zone and winter was on them. - -But the cooling of the thick mass had made the air hot and humid, almost -suffocating; still, notwithstanding this, the air had not seemed -unhealthful, for our friends declared that they had never felt better in -their lives, with the exception of the stiffness and the soreness, which -was the direct outcome of the bruises and the burns. But if the eruption -had lasted but a few hours, its consequences had been fearful. - -The slaughter of human beings and beasts had been terrible. On that -fateful morning, five thousand men, one hundred elephants and nearly as -many zebras, had left the villa, strong in perfect health and vigor; but -a few hours later, and but one elephant and five men were left to tell -the fearful tale. Those who had not been killed in battle, had been -slaughtered or had been buried beneath the hot shower of cinders and -steam. And fully as many of the negroes had perished also, in all making -a fearful total. - -It had had an awful effect on the King for a few days. He had wandered -about the villa like one demented, and had spoken to no one, keeping -well to himself, his head bowed and face pale, and eyes sunken. One -could hardly imagine that this was the great and powerful King of On. -But Enola had been persevering in her efforts to draw his mind away from -the saddening events, and he could not long remain insensible to her -pleadings, to try and forget. She would tell him pleasing stories of the -life in her own world; would relate strange tales of adventure and -daring, which, for the time, would blot out the thought of his fearful -loss. And when he would turn to Enola with words of love, she would no -longer turn from him, but would encourage him in this. She had wanted to -make him forget, knowing that if his mind brooded on these events, he -would surely go mad, and then what would become of her and her friends? - -Such fears had already taken possession of them, for they knew that such -an occurrence as this would impress the Onians fearfully, and this -impression might be as it had once been before, namely: that they were -in some way the cause of the fearful event. If such a belief should -become fully established in their minds, nothing could save them they -knew, unless it would be the interference of the King, whose desires -they held in high regard. - -So Enola, although now determined never to marry the great King, would, -to save her friends and herself, humor him in the belief that she loved -him. It was a deception which was loathsome to her, but so much depended -on it that she could not help herself. - -It was one week ago to-day that the volcano had belched forth, and the -few survivors were sitting at their morning meal. - -“Well, shall we venture to the volcano, to-day?” said Mr. Bruce. - -“Yes, we must go to-day, or give it up altogether,” replied the King, -“for our provisions are fast giving out and we must get back to the -country that has not been devastated by the eruption.” - -“Yes, let us leave this horrible place as soon as possible,” added Mrs. -Graham. - -“I confess that I, myself, am desirous of leaving the place which has so -nearly been the scene of our deaths,” rejoined Mr. Graham. “But Mr. -Bruce thinks that we ought to look over the ground where so many of the -Onians have fallen.” - -“I will find no pleasure in thus going,” said Mr. Bruce, “but we should -know the exact state of things here before returning to the city. The -relatives and friends of all these buried thousands, will want to know -if it will be possible to recover their bodies. And then it would be -well to see the crevice. I think Onrai still holds the idea that this -should be closed.” - -“Yes, it will be one of my first duties, now,” said Onrai. “But what a -task it will be for the men who do the work. The first unpleasant task -they have ever had to perform.” - -“The hole may have been closed somewhat by the stream of lava which -poured into it,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“Yes, I feel quite sure that it has,” said Mr. Graham, “for it poured -into it in such a volume it could hardly be otherwise.” - -“Yet there will be much to do,” said Mr. Bruce, “and it will mean a -great deal of hard work before the break is made impassable.” - -“Let us start,” said Onrai, “so as to be able to investigate as much as -possible and return before nightfall. To-morrow we must start for the -city in order to be there for the Day of Resis. It will be a sad -return;” and again the King fell into that melancholy condition out of -which Enola had tried so hard to draw him. - -“True, Onrai,” said Enola, “but the only sadness which has ever darkened -your life. It will cast a gloom over your life for awhile, but as time -goes by and you see those about you again happy, and your life falls -into the old routine, then will you also grow contented and happy once -more. In our world we have so much sadness that we at last become -accustomed to it, and expect it. But here you hardly know the meaning of -the word. This experience has been fearful, I know, but it is better -that you lose a few of your mighty men, than that all should lose -country and, may be, life too, and even be sold into slavery. That must -certainly have been the fate of your people, if they had fallen into the -hands of the negroes. But that time has forever passed and out of this -sad experience, which will cause so much grief, comes this grand -assurance. The men who have been thus slain might have been spared until -they had the wall on the way, and while in the country beyond the cliff, -for they would have had to be there some of the time, they might have -been overpowered by the natives, and the land been overspread with these -hated negroes, before the majority of your people could have learned of -their presence. In such a case your country would have been destroyed -with all its villas and its beautiful city. But such a thing can never -occur now. God has simply taken the work out of your hands, and in his -own way has avenged your people and has also, by turning the lava into -the crevice, helped to close to the outside world, the only means of -ingress into your country. The present generation will die, and as it is -forbidden your people to ever mention or talk of such things to those -who will live beyond your reign, the thing will die from memory, the -same as has all of the previous events of your history. This fearful -occurrence has been ordained to come during your reign, but it casts no -reflection upon you or your people, for it has been wholly the work of -God. - -“If He has chosen to take the men before their time, He has had a good -purpose in it and I think that purpose has been shown. So don’t give up -to despair in this moment, but be the brave, noble King which we have -all learned to love. Be superior to the events which would crush most -other men. Be strong, and set such an example before your people. They -will look to you for strength and comfort, and you must be able to give -them both.” - -The King had listened quietly to the words of Enola, and seemed much -impressed by her strong, clear-cut remarks and the sound advice which -she had given. For the first time he realized that it would not do for -him to give way to his feelings, in this hour of trial, for, as Enola -had said, his people would look to him for comfort and strength, and he -must be able to give them both. Somehow or other he felt better after -Enola had talked to him in this way, and he felt that he could meet the -inquisitive looks of his people and answer their mute questions without -flinching. - -“But come, we must be off,” said Onrai. - -So the men-folk went to the terrace, where the only four elephants, -which had been left, were awaiting them. Gip had entirely recovered, and -was now with the three which had been left in the stable on that fateful -morning. The five men mounted, and were soon making good time over the -smooth surface of the bad lands. This new covering was of better soil -than the old, and would some day become very productive. The elephants, -heavy as they were, hardly made an impression in this, so solid had it -become. They jogged along for nearly an hour, when they came on the body -of an elephant lying on its side, nearly covered with the new soil. -Digging away some of the dirt from his back the body of an Onian was -disclosed to view. He had been one of three who had leaped to the -elephant’s back when the eruption first broke forth. Further on they -came across all of the one hundred elephants and a few of the zebras. -Only one or two Onians were found with any part of their bodies above -the soil. They were buried almost completely. It was thought at first -that they would take these bodies back to the villa, and cremate them as -was the custom this land, but Mr. Bruce had dissuaded Onrai from this, -saying that as all of their companions were lying here in one common -grave, there also might better be they. The King declared his intention -of exhuming all of the many bodies which filled the immense graveyard, -but his companions also made him change his mind in regard to this, -saying that such an undertaking would take a great amount of time, and -would be next to an impossibility. - -At last the crevice was reached, but little of it remained. The hole in -the ground was not even ten feet deep. It had been filled by the flowing -lava up to that height. The party followed the crevice to the cliff, -where a most unexpected scene met their astonished eyes. The crevice in -the cliff was entirely filled, for the lava had run into the crevice -until on a level with the surrounding country, after which it had still -dropped its flinty substance into the hole and gradually cooled until -the chasm had been entirely filled, when it had turned its stream into -the country beyond, leaving the face of the cliff as straight and -impregnable as it had been before the earthquake. - -“It is more than I expected,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“Yes, it is the handiwork of God,” answered Onrai. - -“You need have no further fears about your country being again invaded, -Onrai,” said Mr. Graham. - -“It is as Enola has said,” replied the King. “A blessed assurance that -we are safe from those who would molest us.” - -“Come, let us move on up to the cliff,” said Mr. Bruce. “I would like to -see where the stream of lava has ended in the cavern.” - -“I wonder how it has affected that part of the Hunting Reserve which the -storm has covered,” said Mr. Graham. - -“It must have driven the animals farther back into the jungle,” said -Onrai. “But there is plenty of room for them all. A few miles, as you -would call it, cut off of this great tract, amounts to but little.” - -“But the whole tract will again be fertilized now, I think,” said Mr. -Graham. “Those ashes have a great deal of good loam mixed with them, and -it will be very productive, I think.” - -“Yes, the animals will find as good grazing here as in any other part of -the Reserve, at some future day,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“Look,” said Mr. Graham, “what is that black object away there in the -distance? It is moving, is it not?” - -They all looked and came to the conclusion that it must be some sort of -animal, but what, they could not say. As they proceeded the black spot -grew larger and larger, but they could now see that the animals, or -whatever they might be, were not moving but standing still. They had now -come to the hole in the side of the mountain and concluded to enter this -first, and investigate the black spot later. Accordingly they entered -the hole and lighting a torch turned to the right and moved toward the -upper end of the cave. From where they were, they could see no change in -the crevice, but there might be nearer the crater, for it was from this -that the stream of lava was running. They hurried on for they had much -to look after before returning, and already half of the day had passed. -The end wall was at last reached and they turned to follow this until -they had reached the small tunnel, through which had run the lava. -Arriving at this they were not surprised to find it considerable wider -than it had been before the lava had found its way through it. The lava -had raised the floor of it to quite a height, but this new flooring was -cool now and they decided to follow up the tunnel for some distance, and -see what had taken place in the farther end. - -As they advanced up the tunnel the air got somewhat warmer, but still -not excessively so: The lava bed also grew thicker as they advanced -until the floor had become so raised, they could extend their hands and -touch the ceiling. They at last reached the end of the tunnel and were -surprised to see that the crack had widened until it was nearly five -feet broad. - -“Shall we enter?” asked Mr. Bruce, as they all stood looking at the -crack rather hesitatingly. - -“Most assuredly, if there is no danger,” replied Mr. Graham. - -“I cannot answer for the safety of it,” said Mr. Bruce, “but I can say -that it would be interesting to look into it a ways.” - -“Let us proceed then,” said the King, who was fast becoming as curious -as his white companions. - -The party then, headed by Mr. Bruce, stepped rather gingerly into the -passage-way, and moved along slowly. The side-walls were still very hot -and very soon the soles of their feet became almost burned with the hot -flooring, for the hot lava had passed through there so recently, that it -could hardly be expected to be very cool yet. They had gone some -distance into the crack when Mr. Bruce suddenly stopped and said: - -“Look ahead, can’t you see a ray of daylight?” - -All heads were immediately screwed to one side and a glance thrown -ahead. - -“Yes, that is surely daylight,” said Mr. Graham, “but how in the world, -or in this hole, does it get there?” - -“Shall we go on and see?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“Yes, by all means,” answered the King. - -So the party again pushed on, now at a little livelier gait, for they -could no longer be mistaken that that was the light of day penetrating -this dark crevice. Hurriedly now they advanced, so anxious had they -grown to see what sort of hole it was that admitted the sunlight; and -after a short walk further they burst out into the bright open light of -day. They looked above them and there, sure enough, was the bright, blue -sky. - -“What do you make of it, Mr. Graham?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“Well,” replied Mr. Graham, “I should say that we are looking up out of -one of the crevices which opened into the crater of the volcano.” - -“That’s so,” replied Mr. Bruce, “I did not think of that. But I supposed -these cracks must have opened far into the bowels of the earth, and were -vents for the steam, ashes and lava.” - -“Some of them undoubtedly are,” said Mr. Graham, “but this is surely -not. This may have been caused by one of the earthquakes, and was later -widened by the excessive heat. Whatever the cause, it is here at any -rate.” - -The tunnel at this point was very wide and fully two thousand feet deep. - -“Can you notice any peculiarities in this crevice?” asked Mr. Bruce of -Mr. Graham. - -“None,” replied Mr. Graham, “unless it be its crookedness, but they are -all crooked. But why do you ask?” - -“I was just thinking,” said Mr. Bruce, “that we might have occasion to -use this crevice some day.” - -“I hope not,” replied Mr. Graham, “for if we had to trust to scaling -these perpendicular walls, I am afraid we would perish here at the -bottom.” - -“Yes,” said Mr. Bruce, “but it is well to have several strings to your -bow.” - -“It might be possible,” said Mr. Graham, “to lower one’s self into this -cavern, but I don’t believe it would be possible to hoist one’s self out -of it.” - -“We may have occasion some day to lower ourselves into it,” said Mr. -Bruce. “At any rate, we have found another way to enter the Land of On.” - -“But one never to be used as long as the other is open,” said Mr. -Graham. - -“As you like,” said Mr. Bruce. “Shall we return, Onrai?” - -“If you are ready,” answered the King. - -They accordingly turned and retraced their steps until again in the -cavern. Instead of turning to the left and following the wall as they -had done previously, they followed the lava bed which had gradually -spread over a very wide area in the cavern, in one place being fully a -mile wide. They followed this until opposite the hole, when they moved -over to this and left the cavern. - -The large black group again attracted their attention, and they -determined to see what it was before returning to the villa. The sun was -getting well down toward the western horizon, and they had a good -fifteen miles to make, but they must see what it was that could make -such a mark in the heart of this ash-covered plain. From as near as they -could make out the animals were nearly two miles away. They hurried on, -wishing to reach home before it grew very dark. When within a mile of -the dark object, they saw that it was a herd of elephants, lying down. -They drew up to these cautiously, so as not to be molested, if possible, -but they saw that the elephants were undoubtedly very much exhausted, or -else dead, for they paid but little or no attention to the approaching -riders. - -But just before they came up to them, one of the animals half raised his -head, but that was all, they made no further sign. The riders now came -up to them and saw their predicament. These animals had undoubtedly been -overcome by the shower of ashes, and sinking down had been too weak to -again rise, and now, after a week of suffering and fasting, they were -nearly dead. There were fully a hundred of them and they had been -perfectly wild, but were now as docile as so many lambs. - -“If we can save them,” said Onrai, “they will take the place of the -hundred we lost.” - - - - - CHAPTER XLVI. - “WE DIE TOGETHER.” - - -The elephants were sadly emaciated, for they had now been seven days -without food or water. Their great bodies looked gaunt, and their little -eyes were sunken well into the head. Their bodies were nearly half -covered with the ashes, and together with this and the fact that they -were so weak they could only move their heads, turning them from side to -side, showing that there was still life in their huge bodies. - -“Yes, if we could get these elephants to the villa,” said Onrai, “they -could well take the place of those which were killed.” - -“But even if you were to get them there, they would, with returning -strength, grow as wild as ever, would they not?” said Mr. Bruce. - -“No,” said Onrai, “hunger always tames an elephant, and if he is taken -while hungry, and given food and placed with tame elephants, he is -generally as docile and manageable as any of those which have been in -captivity all their lives.” - -“This is strange,” said Mr. Graham. - -“Yes,” replied the King, “it is, but nevertheless true. Elephants do not -seem to have the fear of human beings that many other animals have, but -seem rather to like the association of man. I have seen wild elephants -follow us from out of the jungle, right down to the gate of the Hunting -Reserve, as gentle and seemingly as tame as the ones we were riding, and -I have no doubt that if we had let them through the gate, they would -have followed us to the city, and would have been just as happy and -contented with their tame companions as they had been running wild in -the jungle.” - -“It seems a pity, then, that we have to leave them here,” said Mr. -Bruce, “when with help they might be gotten to where they could be -nursed back to life.” - -“It would take considerable time and trouble, though, to do so,” said -Onrai. “Still, if we had men with us they could bring them food and -water and in this way put life enough into them to get them to the -villa. But come, the sun is nearly hidden behind the cliffs, and we have -a long ride before us.” - -As if the dying elephants knew that their would-be rescuers were leaving -them, they turned their heads and watched them as they rode away, the -most pitiful expression coming into their little black eyes. There were -easily a hundred of them, and they made a great black spot on the plain -with their bodies, which were only half covered. - -Our friends now hurried toward the villa, and after a ride of two hours, -again pulled up in front of the terrace. They had entered the villa, and -were just about to seat themselves to the evening meal, when the -tramping of many zebras’ hoofs were heard, and our friends, going to the -front entrance, looked toward the now covered avenue, and there saw in -the half light, a band of not less than two hundred mounted men. When -they saw the lights of the villa they turned and came toward it. -Silently they picked their way between the trees and up to the terrace, -where, recognizing the King, they gave a loud shout and then began a -chant, which Onrai explained to his companions, was a chant of praise. -After the chant was finished, the King stood on the terrace steps and -said: - -“Onians, my countrymen, the sight of your faces, coming so unexpectedly, -pleases me greatly and draws from my heart some of the sadness which the -events of the past short while have caused. Your presence makes me feel -that if some of our dearly beloved men have gone, there yet remains -their sons and brothers and fathers, who will make this fair Land of On -yet the same as we knew it before the fearful eruption. We have met with -a terrible loss, but our men died in a good cause, and died bravely.” - -“We do not understand you, oh King,” said one of the foremost. - -“Ah, I forgot,” said Onrai, “but enough to-night. Find quarters for -yourselves and beasts, and on the morrow I will explain further. Prepare -yourselves, however, for sad news, for such you will hear.” - -The men turned from the terrace and the King and his guests again went -into the villa. Onrai seemed much depressed, for how was he going to -tell these men that their fathers, sons and brothers had perished by the -hands of a band of negroes, and the terrible shower of ashes. They would -not understand either unless they could realize that this new covering -of ashes had overtaken their friends unexpectedly, and had buried them. -But then it would be hard to make them understand the eruption and what -caused it. They were too far away at the time to see or know anything of -the awful overflow, unless it be a black cloud which they could possibly -see. They may have felt the shocks of earthquake, but even this they -might not have experienced. Then they could know nothing of how their -friends had met death, nor could they understand the means by which they -had fallen. - -So the King had a hard task before him in the morning and it worried him -fearfully. Enola had seen his downcast countenance, and guessing the -cause, had followed him out on the terrace. Taking hold of his arm, as -he paced up and down, she said: - -“Onrai, do not give up at the outstart. This is a sad task which you -have to perform. But it is only the first one of a number like ones -which will come later, when the mothers and sisters and wives of the -unfortunates will come to gain information from you, when you will be in -the city. So if you give up now what will you do after awhile? Be strong -and make these men understand as well as possible, the real condition of -things. Try and impress them with the greatness of the deed which made -such heroes of their dead comrades, and of the fearful consequences if -they had failed to act so nobly and bravely. Say not too much about the -eruption, but leave the impression that it buried and burned the hated -negroes who had invaded this country, and had slaughtered so many of -their countrymen. Impress them with the fact that all of these brave -Onians were killed in defence of their country and their loved ones, and -then, if you can make them understand why these negroes were here, and -how they entered the country, they will better appreciate the great -sacrifice of life which has been made for them. Let them still retain -their old belief that theirs is the only world on this sphere, letting -them think that the negroes came from another world far away. They can -better understand the latter for they have seen us and believe that we -came from another planet, and this too, would leave the old belief -unshaken, and would insure less unhappiness, than if their life-long -teachings were destroyed.” - -“You are right,” said Onrai, “as you always are, and I will act upon -your advice. But Enola, have you thought of the time when we will be -married? We are about to return to the city and the word has gone forth -that on the Day of Resis you will marry me.” - -“The day has then been fixed?” questioned Enola. “I had not learned -this.” - -“Yes, it has been decided upon,” said the King. “On that great day when -so many of my countrymen will meet, with joy and loud songs of praise, -on the evening of that day, after the ceremonies have been performed, -you will become my wife.” - -Enola had expected that Onrai would make some such announcement soon, -but she had no idea that he would name such an early day, for, as she -understood it, the Day of Resis, was but a short time away. - -“When is the Day of Resis?” asked Enola. - -“Four weeks from to-day, according to your calendar,” said Onrai. - -“Is not that very soon, Onrai?” asked Enola. - -“Too soon?” exclaimed Onrai; “how can you ask such a question, Enola? If -you love me as I do you, you would wish, as do I, that the day was -to-morrow. The time to me seems a long way off. Our days will not be too -many after our marriage, and it is well we should add to these as many -as possible. And again, my people have so decreed that we should be -married on that day.” - -“What are the ceremonies of the great Day of Resis?” again questioned -Enola. - -“Hush, Enola, you must not ask me. The secret of the day is never -divulged, or even spoken of among those who know its secrets. But once -seen, the secret is then yours, and you will then know the meaning of -the Day of Resis. It is a glorious day, a day of great rejoicing and -happiness. Not one on that great day but feels a wonderful happiness, -even those who are not direct participants in its great ceremonies. It -falls to the lot of all, though, to be principal participants in the -proceedings of the day, one day of his life, and this is the greatest -day of all his or her days. Their joy is supreme, and their happiness -knows no bounds.” - -“It must, indeed, be a great day,” said Enola, “and the people have -chosen this day to be my wedding day. How they must love their King!” - -“Yes, the King and the fair stranger whom he is to marry,” said Onrai. - -“I doubt the latter,” said Enola, “for they were too ready to kill both -her and her friends when they thought that she had been the cause of the -storm.” - -“Don’t, don’t, Enola, mention that fearful time. I would blot it from my -mind. It was the one time in my life that I lost confidence in my -people, and the one time when I would have turned against them. I feel, -though, that they have now bitterly regretted their action, for they -have seen the folly of it.” - -“Will we be married in the Temple?” asked Enola, wishing to take Onrai’s -mind from such a painful subject as the one she had mentioned. - -“Yes,” said Onrai; “in the Temple, surrounded by my people, and the -ceremony will be grand in the extreme. I am, I suppose, the first King -who has ever been married, but this, of course, I cannot say positively, -for we know nothing of the reign or history of past Kings. Still, the -high priest has said as much. Our marriage ceremonies are mostly of a -religious nature, and are accompanied by much song and music. Our -marriage garments are made of pure cloth of gold, and those who will be -with us, will be robed much in the same way.” - -“Shall we live in the Temple?” again asked Enola. - -“Yes,” said Onrai; “but in apartments which you have never seen; -apartments grand beyond description. These apartments were made by the -builder of the Temple, for the King in whose reign an unusual event -would occur. So says the high priest; and he further says that my -marriage is an event never before heard of, and that it must have been -this which the founder of the country foresaw when he had these chambers -planned and held for this purpose. None but the high priest has ever -entered them, but they must be sublime from what he has told me of -them.” - -“And what will be my life as the King’s wife?” questioned Enola. - -“Your life will be much the same as it is now, but you will be called -upon to take a part in all duties which belong to the King. In the -ceremonies of the Day of Resis, for instance, you will stand near me and -perform the same duties which alone belong to myself, and in this way, -sharing the duties of my office, we go down to our death, happy, knowing -no sorrows or troubles and assured of that great happiness in the -eternity beyond.” - -“And do we then go together?” asked Enola, as she remembered the mode of -death of some of the women of India. - -“Yes; it is so decreed,” said Onrai. - -The horror of this made Enola faint for a moment, and she made a resolve -to leave this land as soon as possible. Until beyond the rocky cliffs -again, all happiness for her had flown. - - - - - CHAPTER XLVII. - IN THE CITY AGAIN. - - -On the following morning the men were up early and at the terrace, -awaiting their King and the strange, sad tale which they must hear. -Onrai came on to the terrace with his friends and told the sad story of -the battle and the eruption. The Onians stood drinking in every word, -their eyes changing from curiosity to pain, and then to horror, their -faces depicting the same emotions. Onrai related all of the fearful -tale, of how the men had stood up before the negroes even when they were -being mowed down like wheat before the scythe, and then of how the -elephants had rushed on to them, thus turning the tide of battle, and -then of the mad rush for the crevice, and the awful eruption which had -killed and burned the survivors. - -For some time after the King had finished speaking the men stood with -that look of horror overcasting their faces, their very bodies having -assumed an attitude which showed the greatest dejection. Onrai then -continued: “We will start for the city again to-day and will make as -long marches as possible, as we wish to reach there in time to rest, -before the ceremonies of the Day of Resis takes place. On the plain, -some few miles from here, will be found a herd of nearly a hundred -elephants. They were driven, on this desperate night, into the worst -part of the downfall of ashes, and half buried and nearly starving, are -dying there now, on the plain. I wish one hundred of you to go, and if -possible, revive these elephants and bring them to a place where they -can receive proper care. The remainder of you will accompany us to the -city. We start immediately,” and saying this, he again turned to his -friends and told them to make immediate preparations. - -This they did and it was only a short while until they were mounted, and -on their way from the spot which had become most hateful and loathsome -to them. To the avenue, which could only be told now by the bordering -trees, they went, and following its course they headed for the city. -Hope was rejuvenated as they left the scene of so much pain and death, -and life seemed again to be putting on a garment of happiness which had -long since been cast aside. The cavalcade of the witnesses of the recent -fearful scene, left the place without a regret and without one glance -backward to either volcano, bad lands or villa. - -Their thoughts turned to things more pleasant, of the green fields and -shady trees; even the lake with its memories of night horrors seemed -less repulsive than the place they were leaving. But the thought of the -city and its quiet pleasures were more pleasing than all others. In a -half hour they could see ahead of them the green fields and trees, which -they had so longed for. The layer of ashes gradually thinned until there -was no longer any trace of it, and the hard, onyx-paved avenue again -stretched before them in all its beauty. An hour later and they could -see no traces of the eruption at all, and the long track of the cyclone -had been cleared, until it presented very much the same appearance as -did the rest of the surrounding country. - -The country became more cultivated as they proceeded, and men were now -seen frequently working in the fields. None of them approached the -cavalcade, and none were made acquainted with the sad story of the -battle and eruption. And so day after day passed in much the same way as -they had on the journey out, the marches being somewhat longer only, and -the midday rests somewhat shorter. But the evenings were spent in the -cool villas, the nights of prayer being observed now as usual, for with -the last body of men who had come to meet them, before leaving the villa -near the volcano, had been another priest and attendants, and these were -now with the party. - -The lake had been reached and its banks followed. All former plans of -taking another route back to the city had been abandoned on account of -the eruption, and the party was not sorry for this, for the avenue, with -its magnificent shade trees and its beautiful surroundings made it an -enviable route. The days had passed and with them many miles of the long -journey, until on the evening of the ninth day after leaving the villa -in the bad lands they were at the point where they had embarked for the -island, on the memorable night of the sea-fight. Here they put up for -the night at the same villa which had held them once before. - -“To-morrow,” said Mr. Bruce, after the evening meal had been disposed of -and all had gathered on the terrace for their regular chat before -retiring, “to-morrow, if nothing happens, will be our last day’s -journey. We will reach the city before noon if we start very early in -the morning.” - -“I am not sorry that this excursion is so near an end,” said Mr. Graham; -“but it has been loaded with adventures and that is what we were looking -for when coming here.” - -“Yes, but the adventures of the past month or so have none of them been -agreeable ones,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“I do not agree with you, Mr. Bruce,” said Harry. “I think the last -horrible experience has cast a gloom over all of the others, and if it -were not for the fearful slaughter of the Onians and our own narrow -escape, we would have considered the other adventures as being at least, -excitable, if not altogether enjoyable.” - -“This land has not seemed the same to me since that fearful day,” said -Mr. Bruce. - -“I have noticed the change in you,” said Nellie. - -“It has made this fair land almost hateful to me and I long to get away -from it,” and Mr. Bruce spoke in such a bitter tone, that all looked at -him in surprise. - -“We have now seen most of the people and their country,” said Mr. -Graham, “and it would be well for us to leave as soon as possible, -especially as the King has decided that Enola shall marry him on the Day -of Resis. By the way, Enola, have you learned anything of Onrai, in -regard to this red-letter day?” - -“Nothing,” answered Enola, “excepting that it is a day of great joy to -all of the participants in its ceremonies.” - -“But do not all participate?” questioned Mr. Graham. - -“It seems not,” answered Enola. “That is, they do not all participate on -the same day; but a day comes to each one when he or she participates. -It has a strange meaning, this Day of Resis.” - -“Yes, and one which will never be learned until the day comes,” said -Harry, “for Onrai told me himself that none of his people were allowed -to mention the secrets of the day, but all understood them.” - -“And when is this day, which is to make you the wife of the King?” asked -Mr. Graham. - -“It is barely a week distant,” answered Enola. - -“And do you think that you could be happy as the wife of Onrai?” asked -Mr. Graham. - -“I have never given the subject much thought,” answered Enola, “until -the evening preceding our departure from the villa in the bad lands, -then he spoke of our marriage and told of our apartments in the Temple, -and of our marriage gowns, and another thing, which makes the very -thought of marrying Onrai repulsive. He then told me that if he should -die first that I would be sacrificed on his bier, and the King and wife -would be buried together.” - -“That is certainly fearful to contemplate,” said Mr. Graham, “and it but -adds to the necessity of our getting out of this country before this -eventful day.” - -“What do you suppose, though, will be the outcome if we should leave the -country before you become the wife of the King?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“It is hard to tell,” answered Enola, “but these people might object -seriously to our doing so. It is certain that the King has fully decided -on marrying me, and that his people have not only sanctioned the -marriage, but it was they who fixed the Day of Resis as the one on which -we should be married. They are a strange people. They have gone through -life following certain laws and rules and have never been crossed in -anything, and it might be a very serious matter to try and balk them in -this, probably the most important event which has ever taken place in -their history.” - -“Yes, but if you do not wish to marry Onrai,” said Mr. Graham, “and you -have just said that you would not, we must get away from here before -this Day of Resis, in some way or other, whether they object or not.” - -“Yes,” said Mr. Bruce, “and as the time is so short it would be well for -us to feel around and see just how the land lays.” - -Onrai, who had been overseeing some work in another part of the villa, -came strolling carelessly on to the terrace, his very carriage lending a -gracefulness to his majestic figure, which was charming, to say the -least, and Enola thought how easy it could be to love this giant under -any other circumstances. - -“Onrai,” said Mr. Bruce, “we have been your guests for many weeks now -and we feel that to remain with you much longer would be a breach of -etiquette, to say the least, and as the affairs in our own country need -our almost immediate attention, we feel that we should leave your -hospitable country, and return to our own.” - -Onrai looked surprised at the very mention of such a thing and made no -answer for some time; at last, however, he said: - -“Your words grieve me; I had never thought of such a thing as your ever -returning to your own country. I have always supposed that you would -remain with us for the remainder of your lives. Why should you want to -leave us? Have we not been kind to you, and is ours not a good land to -live in? You have told me that you have much care, worry, trouble and -unhappiness in your world; you have found none of those disturbing -influences here; that is, until the awful fight and eruption came, but -even that is over now, and your lives will soon drop into the old groove -which you have said was the most delightful existence which one could -desire. My people love you for yourselves alone, and if they forgot -themselves for once, they must not be blamed, for you can readily see -how superstition could spring to life in such uneventful lives as -theirs. But they have forgotten those fears, and are now as much your -friends as is their King. Then why should you wish to leave us? We love -you; and as Enola is to marry me, and is to remain with us, it will be -pleasant for both her and you to be together. Don’t ever again mention -leaving us, let alone ever putting such a suggestion into action. Why, -we look upon you no longer as strangers, but as part of us.” - -“We thank you for those kind words,” said Mr. Bruce, “but you must -understand us, Onrai, we have many personal interests in our world which -would take us there, and we have brothers and sisters and friends who -would grieve greatly if we should never return. If such were not the -case, it would be an easy matter for us to take up our life residence -with you.” - -“I have, as I had said before,” said Onrai, “never thought of your -leaving us, and I cannot now say how such a thing would affect my people -or myself. I can only say that we have always thought that you would -remain with us, and we cannot think of anything else just now.” And -saying this, the King took hold of Enola’s arm gently, and drawing it -through his, as she had taught him to, they started to promenade the -terrace. After they had gotten out of hearing, Mr. Bruce turned to Mr. -Graham, and said: - -“Rather non-committal, is he not?” - -“I should say so,” said Mr. Graham. “And if I am not mistaken, we will -have trouble in getting away from here.” - -“One thing sure,” said Mr. Bruce, “he has no intention of letting Enola -leave the country.” - -“He is a strange man, this Onrai,” said Mr. Graham, “and, in fact, the -people are a queer anomaly and hard to make out. They have no secrets, -seemingly, their lives are like open books, and they have no reason for -being otherwise; but they can be as mum as oysters, as they say in -America, when they wish to keep anything from you, and as evasive as a -man paying taxes, when they take such a notion. For a race who has never -had occasion to use any deception, they are certainly without a peer.” - -The talk now turned onto other subjects, and after a short time, all -retired to their apartments to take their last sleep in the country, or -away from the beautiful Temple. All were up very early the following -morning, for they desired to reach the city before noon, so as not to -have to stop before getting there for the midday rest. There was more -life and gayety in the party on this morning than had been seen among -them for weeks. All seemed happy and glad that the long journey was so -near an end, and there was much joyous conversation and singing as they -rode out before the sun had yet risen. - -Straight to the beautiful avenue, which had been their guide for so -many, many miles, and the trees of which had given them such shady -comfort, they rode. Even the animals seemed to realize that their long -journey was at an end, for they started off at a good lively gait and -maintained it throughout the morning. Onrai this morning seemed -depressed; his head was bent and he seemed dejected. He had forbidden -those who had joined the party, just before starting on this journey, -never to speak of or mention in any way the things which he had told -them on the morning of their departure. He had said that it was his duty -as King and head of the people to impart to them the sad news; that the -details of this great calamity were better known to him than to any -other of his people, and he could the better tell the story for this -reason. Therefore, his men had said nothing during the long journey, and -those of the Onians whom they had met had learned nothing of the -horrible event. Onrai now realized that the time had almost come for him -to stand up before the mighty throng which would gather at his command, -and tell them of the fearful death of five thousand of the fathers, -sons, husbands and brothers of On. - -He had seen in his mind’s eye, the look of utter despair and great pain, -and had heard the cries of the sufferers, and all this saddened him. He -felt that it would be next to an impossibility for him to explain so -they could understand, and the doubt which would accompany his -explanation would but add to the pain of those who had lost loved ones. - -But the elephants and zebras were bearing them fast toward the city, as -if mocking the King and being desirous of hurrying him to that time and -place so dreaded. - -The sun had nearly reached its zenith, when the first one of the -beautiful city villas was seen through the green trees in the distance, -and not long after they were once more, after many weeks’ riding, -between rows of the pink villas. All was quiet, for this was resting -hour; but as they got nearer the heart of the city, numerous ones of the -Onians would show themselves, and upon seeing that it was the King and -his party, they would make a respectful obeisance and watch them until -lost in the distance. - -At last the Temple was reached, and our friends were once more in their -delightful apartments. Every comfort had been found in the villas en -route, but none that they were ever in had such large and magnificent -apartments as this grand Temple. The attendants took them in hand at -once, and after a bath and light lunch, all of the tired wanderers -slept. - -In the evening all gathered in the dining hall as usual, and it was hard -to suppose that they had been away for so long. Mr. Graham and Mr. Bruce -started to take their evening promenade on the terrace, and were -surprised to see a number of soldiers, so they looked, walking in a -measured beat about the grounds. - -“As I thought,” said Mr. Bruce, “we are prisoners.” - - - - - CHAPTER XLVIII. - NO HOPE OF ESCAPE. - - -At the usual morning gathering of the adventurers, on the following -morning, Mr. Bruce said: - -“It seems that we are prisoners, but why I cannot understand. It may be, -though, that the Temple alone is to be guarded, and that when we desire -to leave it for a walk or a ride, the guards may not follow us. Let us -make the experiment, Mr. Graham, if we are accompanied by the guards we -shall know that extra effort is needed.” - -“I wonder,” said Mr. Graham, “if this custom of guarding a prospective -bride, which this seems to be, applies to their courtiers as well. -Anyway we can ascertain this, by ordering our zebras and taking a ride,” -and stepping to the curtain which separated the apartment from the one -which he occupied, Mr. Graham called one of his attendants, and told him -they wanted their zebras at once. In a short time the zebras were -awaiting them, and Mr. Bruce and he went to the entrance, and were not -surprised to see ten mounted men standing near, seemingly waiting for -them to start. Apparently unconcerned, our friends mounted and rode -leisurely down the main avenue. And the ten men followed. - -“As I supposed,” said Mr. Graham, “our escape is going to be a serious -matter after all.” - -“Yes,” answered Mr. Bruce, “we will undoubtedly be guarded by these men -wherever we go, and it is hardly reasonable to believe that they will -allow us to go to the cave, and make our escape without trying to stop -us.” - -“There is Sedai,” said Mr. Graham, “he may be able to offer some -suggestion.” - -They stopped their zebras and motioning to Sedai, he came up and asked -what he could do for them. - -“We are virtually prisoners, Sedai,” said Mr. Graham, “and we need your -help. The King has announced his intention of marrying Enola on the Day -of Resis, and to avoid this, we shall have to leave the city; but a -guard has been placed about the Temple and a guard is now following us, -and it may be hard for us to get away.” - -“I have heard of this intended marriage,” said Sedai, “but I thought -that Miss Enola must have given her consent.” - -“Far from it,” said Mr. Graham, “she is most desirous of getting away -immediately. Exert your thinking powers, Sedai, and try to devise some -means by which we can leave the country. If you think of anything, come -up to the Temple and give us the result.” - -“I will do so,” said Sedai, as he walked away. - -“Mr. Bruce,” said Mr. Graham, “our friends in the rear do not seem to be -appointed as guards to ward off danger, but more as a guard of honor. -This is probably what they are for, simply to announce to the people -that we have marriageable children,” and Mr. Graham smiled. - -“I think myself that they have no idea of danger befalling us, but it -looks to me as if they had some suspicion of our intended escape. You -know we mentioned the matter to the King a few evenings since,” said Mr. -Bruce. - -“That’s so; I wonder if that can have anything to do with it. It may be -that he intends to keep us prisoners, at least, until he has Enola -secure,” said Mr. Graham. - -“It is hard to tell,” said Mr. Bruce. - -They turned their zebras and headed for the Temple, and upon arriving -there told their companions of how they had been followed. - -Sedai came up in the afternoon, and, after talking with the guard for -awhile, reported what he had learned. The guard was changed every four -hours, and the old guard marched to the house used by them as -headquarters. Here they reported, and a relief was sent to the Temple. -From the time the old guard left until the relief arrived, fifteen -minutes elapsed, and during this fifteen minutes escape must be made. -This was their only chance. It was not allowing much time for accidents, -but they might be some distance before their escape was discovered, and -a guard sent after them. This might not take the right direction at -first, and in this way some time might be gained. - -It was decided to have Sedai carry the provisions to the cave, since he -would not be watched; consequently, he left them to make preparations. -No time was to be lost, and Sedai went directly to the provision -storehouse and asked for four days’ provisions for himself, as he -intended going to the large lake on a fishing excursion. The provisions -were given him, but, to his surprise, when he came out of the storehouse -and mounted his zebra, five mounted men, who were near and who were seen -awaiting him, started just after he did and followed him. Straight on he -went in the direction of the secret door, and upon arriving at the gate -of the wall, his followers rode up and stopped him, saying, that as none -of them had weapons they could not think of entering that wild part or -of letting him do so. He made no objection, and leaving his bundle of -provisions in a shady place near the gate, rode back to the city and -went directly to the Temple to notify his friends. - -“It begins to look very serious,” said Mr. Graham, “but we must go, -provisions or no provisions. It may be that some of the dried food which -we left along the way as we crossed the cave, may be in good condition -still, and if so, this would sustain us for quite awhile.” - -“I have an idea,” said Enola, “which is not pleasant to contemplate, but -which may mean the saving of life. The opening into the mountain is -large enough to admit the zebras, and if we can get them through it, our -journey will be much easier and quicker; and if the worst comes, we can -sacrifice them.” - -“A splendid idea,” said Harry, “but we must be ready to start by -to-morrow night. But five days remain for us before the Day of Resis, -and we must not put off our first attempt until the last moment. It may -be that we will make some miscalculation the first time and have to try -again, so let us be ready by to-morrow night.” - -During that day and the next they made as many preparations as they -could without being observed. Each secreted some dried meats and a -bottle of the exquisite wine and honey. Sedai had visited the guard -frequently, and had learned when the changes were made. The stables, -where the zebras were kept, was about three hundred yards to the rear of -the Temple. They were guarded by one man, the attendants of our friends -grooming and taking care of them during the day. This man would have to -be overcome, or called from the stable on some pretense. - -The day intended for their escape drew slowly to an end. The evening -meal had been eaten, as usual, with the King, but Enola had declined to -accompany him to the terrace. They had gathered in Mrs. Graham’s room, -and were waiting anxiously for Sedai to announce that the time had come -and all was in readiness. Sedai at last came, but the moment he entered -they saw that some slip had been made in the arrangements, or that -something had gone wrong. - -“What is it, Sedai?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“This,” said Sedai. “The guard, as usual, had left for their -headquarters, and I had sent the stableman on an errand which would take -some time to carry out. I started to the Temple to notify you, when, to -my surprise, twenty men came up to the stable, and when I asked their -leader why they were there, he told me that the Day of Resis was but -three days off, and that all zebras and elephants were sent into the -country to carry into the city those working in the fields, quarries and -mines, one day’s journey hence; and saying this, they took the zebras -and elephants and went away with them.” - -The friends looked from one to the other speechless. The zebras being -away they could no longer calculate on their help, but something must be -done. They could not think of walking to the cave, for their escape -would soon be discovered, and the inhabitants, having found out their -intentions, would guard against any further attempt. - -“When will the zebras be returned,” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“He said that the men who were to use them were one day’s journey from -here,” answered Sedai. “If they come to this city immediately, they will -be here the evening of the day after to-morrow.” - -“Let us see,” said Mr. Bruce, “that will be two days before the Day Of -Resis. Cheer up friends, we shall yet escape,” and telling Sedai to keep -his eyes open and to report to them the moment the zebras were returned, -they dismissed him. - -The next two days were spent by Mr. Bruce in the Secret Chamber, for he -determined to learn from the tablets more of the history of this strange -people and country. Harry and Enola scarcely left each other, for Enola -now realized that she loved Harry, and now that there was a possibility -of their being separated from each other forever, they determined to see -as much of each other as possible in the few remaining hours before the -Day Of Resis. - -Mr. and Mrs. Graham and Nellie walked about the beautiful Temple and -tried to calm their anxiety. - -On the second afternoon Sedai came to them and said that the zebras had -been returned, but that the young men who had come with them had been -given quarters in a villa adjoining the stable, and some of them were -constantly lounging about and would undoubtedly see them, and give the -alarm if they tried to escape. It seemed as if they must remain until -the dreaded day. Sedai was told to try and find some means to get rid of -the men about the stable, and to endeavor to have everything ready for -that night. Night came but Sedai reported that the men had ridden a long -distance that day, and were lying on the lawn of the park and could not -be persuaded to move, so comfortable were they in the cool evening -breeze. - -“When is the next relief?” questioned Mr. Bruce. - -“At twelve o’clock,” said Sedai, “and they may go to their apartments -before then, thus enabling us to get away.” - -“We will wait,” said Mr. Bruce, who had constituted himself the leader -of the party. - -Slowly the evening wore into the night and twelve o’clock came. The -attendants had all been dismissed. Sedai came in at last but his face -showed disappointment. - -“The men are still lying in the garden,” said he, “some asleep, while -others are awake and talking.” - -“How many of them are there?” asked Harry. - -“Thirty,” said Sedai, “and that many more in the large villa near the -stable, so that it would be foolish for us to try to overcome them.” - -“No, we must not resort to violence,” said Mr. Bruce, “for that would -only hurt our cause. To-morrow these men will be thoroughly rested, and -we can reasonably expect that they will go about the city visiting their -friends. We must not lose courage but hope for better results -to-morrow.” - -On the afternoon of the next day our friends, mounted the zebras and -with a guard of fifty following them, rode through the principal streets -of the city. The city was crowded owing to all work in the fields, mines -and quarries being suspended for five days. The people never seemed -happier, for singing and laughing was heard on every side. Just as our -friends reached the large square, the King mounted the pedestal from -which he had greeted them upon their arrival in the city. From a tablet -of wood in his hand he read the law proclaiming the Day of Resis to be -the only holiday, and, being now at hand, the direct participants in its -ceremonies must prepare for them. He did not mention the secrets of the -day, or did he give them idea as to what the ceremonies would be. - -On the bare wrists of the right arm of the older men and women could be -seen a peculiarly-shaped diamond of a reddish cast. This was about half -an inch in width and held to the wrist by a chain of gold. Mr. Bruce -turned to one of the guards, and asked: - -“Why do certain ones wear this peculiar stone and chain of gold about -their wrists?” - -“It is the mark of Resis,” answered the man. And upon Mr. Bruce asking -what this meant, the man made no further answer. - -The faces of those wearing these bracelets were radiant. They seemed the -happiest of the whole vast multitude, and the younger people appeared to -look on them with envy. Truly, the happiness of the day must be supreme -to those who participated in its ceremonies. - -The King, after reading the law twice, descended from the pedestal, -mounted his zebra and joined Enola and her friends. Carefully the zebras -picked their way through the throng of people crowding the streets. -Girls were dancing, men were giving exhibitions of skill in athletics; -others were singing quaint, harmonious songs, and all were happy and -joyous. - -They soon reached the Temple and retired to the dining hall. After the -meal the King excused himself, saying that he would have to go among his -people, as on the Eve of Resis all were in the city and were anxious to -have him appear at their games and pastimes. - -Mr. Graham, Mr. Bruce and Harry walked toward the stables, and to their -dismay saw their zebras again being taken away. - -“Where are they taking the zebras?” asked Harry of Sedai, who stood -near. - -“To the great square,” answered Sedai. “These zebras are trained to do -certain tricks, and are to give an exhibition to-night before the -people.” - -Harry almost broke down in despair. All hope of their escape on that -night had fled, and all were thoroughly disturbed. Enola’s despair could -be seen in her white face, but she said nothing. A resolve had taken -shape in her mind, that if all else failed, before she would become the -wife of the King of On she would end her life, for the thought now of -marrying this man had become abhorrent to her, and the longer she -brooded over it, the more hateful did it become to her, and hence this -determination. - -Slowly the night grew on, and all listened with bated breath for Sedai, -for they still had a faint hope that the zebras might be returned in -time for them to get away at the midnight relief; but midnight came and -passed, and our friends knew that their last hope was gone. They -separated for the night without a word, even Mr. Bruce, who was usually -so hopeful, now not having a word to say. - -The morrow was the Day of Resis, and after its mysterious ceremonies had -been performed, the King of this strange people was to demand Enola for -his wife. - - - - - CHAPTER XLIX. - THE DAY OF RESIS. - - -“The Day of Resis” had come, and long before the sun had shed its golden -beams on the Temple of On, the people were astir. The tramp of many -zebras and the rumbling of chariots could be faintly heard by the -adventurers as they lay tossing on their couches, the night having -brought them but little rest. They listened with bated breath to the -sounds as they floated through the wide arches of the Temple, and -wondered what the day would bring forth. That it would be fateful, was -certain, for if they did not effect their escape, Enola would become the -unwilling bride of the King of On; and what would be the subsequent -events? Would they longer be held prisoners, or, would they be allowed -to go and come as they saw fit? - -But if they failed to get away before the eventful ceremony should take -place, would there be any further inducement to leave this beautiful -country? Would not Enola be the wife of Onrai, and would not the bonds -be binding, having been welded by the laws of this country? Would she -not still be the wife of Onrai, even if she should go back to -civilization, and would it not be better for her to remain here with the -man whom she had been forced to marry? It was a difficult question to -answer, and puzzled and troubled, the small party of adventurers rose, -and after the morning bath, the last, they hoped, in the Temple, they -repaired to the dining hall. - -“The night has been a disappointing one in every respect,” said Mr. -Graham, as he took a seat by the side of Enola, “for I had hoped that -after the suspense and failure of the early evening, we would at least -forget for awhile in our sleep. But I see in the haggard faces about me -traces of unrest, and I know that we have all spent the night in -worrying and in wondering as to what the day would bring forth.” - -“The night has been a fearful one to me,” said Enola; “but it has seemed -all too short, for I could remember only that with its darkness went all -hope of mine.” - -“Come, Enola,” said Mr. Bruce, “do not give up entirely. Remember that -it is on the eve of this day that you are to marry the King, and there -are many hours left us yet in which to escape.” - -“No,” said Enola, “I feel that all hope is gone. We will be the central -figures of attraction to-day and all eyes will be upon us, thus making -it an impossibility to escape.” - -“I differ with you,” said Mr. Bruce, “for we have learned that this is -the greatest of all days with these people, and the ceremonies of the -day may call attention from us, thus giving us a chance to get away. -Listen, even now, the avenues seem crowded with the chariots and zebras, -and the sandaled feet of the multitude can be heard shuffling over the -hard pavement. The day for me has the greatest interest, for I long to -fathom its mysteries, but not at the expense of your happiness, Enola, -and I will watch every chance, as will all of us, to get you away from -the hateful ceremony.” - -“I had forgotten, in our trouble,” said Mr. Graham, “that there were -secrets to be learned to-day. What can they be?” - -“They must be of an exceedingly happy nature,” said Harry, “for I have -seen the faces of those who have spoken of the day, light up as if with -pleasurable anticipation.” - -“Yes,” said Mr. Bruce, “Onrai has said that the day was the happiest one -in the lives of the people, and that must mean a great deal, for these -people are always happy, or, have been so until the news reached them of -the great battle and eruption. Hark,” and as Mr. Bruce ceased speaking, -a song rose on the morning air so exquisitely beautiful and grand, that -our friends almost held their breath, for fear of losing one note of its -delightful harmony. It rose and fell one moment loud and powerful, -ringing through the entrance and wide hall of the Temple, and the next -dying away almost to a whisper. - -“Ah,” said Enola, as the voices ceased, “it is beautiful. Oh, why could -not Onrai have left me in peace, so that we might enjoy even yet awhile -the delights of this grand country and people.” - -“It is indeed too bad,” said Mr. Bruce. “But has Sedai been here this -morning?” - -“No,” said Mr. Graham, “but it is time that he was. Perhaps he is afraid -of losing a chance for escape by coming to us,” but the curtain moves at -this moment and Sedai enters. - -“We were just speaking of you, Sedai,” said Mr. Bruce. “What are the -chances this morning?” - -“Better, I think,” replied Sedai. “I was sitting near the stables last -night waiting for the watch to sleep, when Ephmer came to me and said: - -“‘Listen, Sedai, your friends of the far-away country would escape, for -the fair one whom Onrai the King, would marry, can see no happiness in -becoming his wife. To-morrow is the Day of Resis, and on that day is the -first King of On to marry. But you would escape. I have seen the look of -fear and suspense on the faces of your friends since they have again -arrived in the city, and I have seen you here day and night watching -closely the movements of the men who have been placed to watch your -friends. Now listen. I have longed to leave my native land and go to -that far-away country, of which I have heard you speak, and I will help -you escape. I only ask that you take me with you, and also my friend -Shal, of the underground world. I cannot promise to effect your escape, -but I will do all in my power to help you. Will you accept my help?’ - -“I looked at the Onian for a moment, but did not answer, for fear that -if I should admit that we were trying to escape, he would report the -matter to the King. - -“Don’t mistrust me,” he continued, “and I decided to accept his offer. -Have I done right?” - -“You have,” said Mr. Bruce, “and if this man can help us, he shall see -that great world beyond the cliffs to which he has so longed to go.” - -“’Tis well,” said Sedai, “Ephmer will be near you to-day during the -ceremonies and will explain all to you. I will immediately notify you if -an opportunity affords for our escape,” and with this Sedai withdrew. - -Onrai was heard outside a moment later, and very shortly he came into -the apartment. His face wore a happy smile, as he walked to where Enola -was sitting, and taking her hand, said: - -“Greeting, Enola. This is the greatest day of my life and the happiest.” - -“The day seems strange to me,” said Enola. - -“Why strange, Enola,” asked Onrai, his face troubled for the moment. - -“Because I cannot realize that in this strange land, so far from our -own, and where the customs are so very different, I have found the one -whom I am to marry, and that on this day I am to become his wife. I -cannot accustom myself to the idea, that is all,” and Enola tried to -smile, knowing that she must still keep up the miserable farce in order -to avert suspicion. - -“The strangeness will wear off with the day’s ceremonies,” said Onrai, -“and now the ceremonies are about to commence, and places on the terrace -are awaiting you.” - -“Then we are about to learn the day’s mysteries,” said Mr. Bruce. - -“They are mysteries to you only; to my people, the day’s ceremonies are -well-known,” said the King. - -“Then why are they never mentioned?” questioned Mr. Bruce. - -“Because they are too sacred,” answered Onrai, solemnly, as he left the -apartment. - -“Ah, they are mysteries still,” said Mr. Bruce, after the King had left. -“Not even at this late hour will he explain them to us, but leaves us to -learn them ourselves, and that we are willing to do. Let us go to the -terrace and there learn what it is which makes the day one of mystery.” - -They all now left the dining hall and stepped into the large court. Here -attendants were awaiting to conduct them to their seats. Ephmer, who was -one of these, stepped up as they approached, and asked: - -“Has Sedai spoken?” - -“Yes,” said Mr. Bruce, “and we have consented. You will not fail us?” - -“I shall do all in my power,” and saying this, Ephmer led the way to the -terrace where they found seats awaiting them. - -The scene which now met the gaze of the adventurers was strange, yet -grand. The populace thronged the court of the Temple, the garden, the -avenues leading to it, and even the tops of the villas were crowded with -the happy-looking people. Before many of the villas could be seen a -square pile of wood about ten feet high. These had been placed during -the night, and our friends could but wonder what part these played in -the ceremonies of the day. Turning to Ephmer, Mr. Bruce asked: - -“Why are these piles of wood placed before some villas and not before -others?” - -“In these villas with the biers before them, live the principal -participants in to-day’s ceremonies,” answered Ephmer. - -“What did you call these? Biers?” asked Mr. Bruce, with a puzzled look -on his face. - -“Yes,” answered Ephmer, “for on these are burned the bodies of those who -have this day met their Day of Resis.” - -“Burned? Day of Resis? Why, what do you mean, man?” asked Mr. Bruce, and -they all looked at the man with troubled faces. - -“Only this,” said Ephmer, “that all Onians who have reached the age of -sixty-five, since this day last year, will to-day be put to death by the -hand of the King.” - -Our friends looked at the Onian, as he said this, with fearful -wonderment depicted in their faces. Could it be that the man told the -truth? Could this race of enlightened people do this thing? - -“But why are these put to death?” asked Mr. Bruce, as soon as he could -find his voice. - -“Because they have reached that time when old age creeps on; and having -reached this age, too, they have earned the reward which is rightfully -theirs, by having lived a sinless life,” answered Ephmer. - -“But why should you kill a man because he has seen his best days?” asked -Mr. Bruce, now interested in spite of himself. - -“Because we would leave none but the strong and vigorous to bring -children into our world, and, also, because our world would become -over-populated if the old were not killed. The same law governs our -domestic animals.” - -And this, then, was the secret, or one of the secrets of the great -height, strength and healthfulness of this people, and it also explained -the absence of all aged people in this strange land. Yes, such a law -could have but this effect, but at what a cost was the beautiful stature -and healthfulness acquired? - -“But do not those who are to be killed, object?” asked Mr. Bruce. - -“Never,” answered Ephmer, “it is the happiest day of their lives. Look -at them. The ceremonies are about to commence.” - -“I cannot stand this,” said Mrs. Graham, and she and Nellie rising, -entered the Temple. Enola also arose intending to go to her apartment, -but at that moment the King came on to the terrace wearing a long, -crimson robe, and seeing Enola about to retire, said to her: “It is -important that you witness the scenes of the day, because hereafter, you -will have to perform the same duties which I am this day performing.” - -“I cannot look on this wholesale murder,” answered Enola, with a -shudder. - -“It is the law,” replied Onrai, as he moved away. And Enola again sank -into her seat. It was fearful, but what could she or the others do? -Nothing. - -Suddenly the blare of a trumpet sounded over the city, and the vast -throng burst forth in a weird chant which rose and fell in great waves -of sound, and almost stopped the beating of the heart with its -impressive solemnity. Up the long avenue came a procession of men and -women, and across the wrist of each was the gold chain and peculiar -diamond, which symbolized the bloody ending of the day. A white bag of -goat skin was suspended by a silken cord which encircled the wrist just -below the gold band. All were in spotless white with golden girdles and -fillets of gold about their brows. - -The King, in a crimson robe, accompanied by seven priests, took his -place in the court and faced the line of the doomed. At the sound of -another trumpet the singing ceased. An onyx pedestal was brought from -the Temple and placed before the King. On the pedestal was a shallow -basin of gold. - -[Illustration: “Again the flashing dagger was raised in the air.”—_Page -393._] - -At a given signal the lines of the doomed moved forward, keeping the -right foot foremost, and again the chant of the multitude rose higher -and higher, growing wilder and wilder, until the front rank of the -victims was ranged before the King. He drew from his girdle a glittering -dagger, that flashed in the sunlight when he held it aloft, as the -doomed men and women thrust out their naked wrists over the golden -basin. One swift stroke severed the main artery and the goat-skin bag -was instantly drawn up and tied above the wound, scarcely a drop of -blood falling into the shallow golden vessel on the pedestal. - -Again the flashing dagger was raised in the air as two members of each -victim’s family stepped from the throng and assisted the doomed into the -chariot which stood waiting. On the faces of the vast throng no horror -was depicted, but rather the intent look of serious and solemn interest. -Even upon the faces of the victims a beatified look of hopeful -expectancy, was the only evidence that they were not to mingle again -with their fellow-men, in the duties and pleasures of the Land of On. - -For a time Enola was enabled to keep her face turned away from the -actual sight of the massacre, but under the influence of that wonderful -music, she at last stole one brief glance at the King as the gleaming -knife crossed the wrist of a victim, and from that time until the long -procession had passed the pedestal of death, she was held as if by the -glittering eyes of a serpent. - -As the last man received his death-thrust, the King dropped the knife -into the basin, and holding aloft both hands, intoned the words of the -ceremony which were supposed to justify the deeds of the day, and speed -the departing souls into the sublimity of the hereafter. At last Mr. -Bruce exclaimed hoarsely: - -“It is over!” and he looked up just in time to see Enola fall fainting -into Harry’s arms. She was immediately borne to her apartments and was -soon revived. As the men left the terrace, there was not a sign to show -that the day had been one of dreadful tragedies. No drop of blood, no -confusion. Simply the orderly dispersing of the multitude engaged in -low-toned conversation. - -All now met in Mr. Bruce’s rooms and breathlessly awaited Sedai’s -arrival. The news which he would bring from the stables would decide how -much or how little of hope they might have, for effecting an escape -before Onrai should come. - -Suddenly the curtain stirred and Sedai’s face appeared. He beckoned to -them to follow, and noiselessly they crossed the starlit terrace and -entered the garden. Here they found Ephmer and Shal awaiting them with -zebras. Enola was about to mount her zebra when she heard a peculiar -cry, and turning she saw the great white body of Gip looming up in the -half light and coming toward her. - -“Oh, Gip,” she cried, “this is my only regret in leaving On. I cannot -take you with me,” and patting the great noble beast, which had saved -her life on two different occasions and the lives of her friends, she -turned and mounted her zebra and rode away with tears streaming from her -eyes, afraid to look back, fearful of the pitiful look on Gip’s face. - -Cautiously they picked their way through the park toward the road to the -mountains. Along this road, which was used only for bringing the fodder -for the stables, Sedai led them, explaining that it joined the main road -leading to the cave a short distance from the city. As soon as they -reached the main road they urged on their zebras with all speed, for, -turning to look back at the city, they could see torches glittering -about rapidly and could hear a confused murmur of sounds which indicated -that their escape had been detected. Here and there a steady flame -shooting straight into the air, denoted the burning funeral pyres of the -day’s victims. Sedai motioned them to stop for a moment, and listening -intently, he said: - -“We are pursued.” - -On they flew again over the hard road, through bits of forest, past the -shores of small lakes and over green fields. Far ahead they could see -the dark forest on the side of the mountain. Through the gate of the -mighty wall they sped, and Sedai dismounted to hastily close and -barricade it from the inside. Their pursuers would have to climb the -wall, or seek one of the other gates and every moment was precious now. -They crossed the bridge and plunged into the woods that intervened -between them and the cave. The roar of a lion was heard to the right, -but they did not hesitate. - -The eastern horizon was growing brighter and brighter, and by the time -they had passed the forest, the moon had risen high above the mountains. -The rapid gallop of zebras could be heard and looking back, they saw a -large body of mounted men struggling at the barricaded gate. Finding the -gate impassable, they formed a pyramid and in this way the men reached -the top of the wall, and then used ropes to let themselves down into the -Hunting Reserve. - -Harry first reached the secret door, but strove in vain to find the -hidden spring. The pursuers were gaining upon them, and Enola, urging -her zebra forward, sprang to the ground and, grasping the lever, pressed -hard on it, but the stone door of the cave failed to open. Her heart -sank within her. She remembered the last revolution it had made, and the -difficulty with which she had rescued Sedai from its stony embrace. -Could it be that the mechanism was then injured? The mighty spring -broken, perhaps? She reeled for a second, as the dreadful possibility -suggested itself to her. Then seizing Harry’s rifle she dashed its butt -against the lever and the heavy stone door began to revolve. - -Sedai, seizing a heavy branch, struck the zebra upon which Mrs. Graham -was riding, and the frightened animal sprang through the opening, -followed by the one ridden by Nellie. One after another they were driven -through, and as the leaders of the pursuing party dashed into the open -glade, Sedai drove the last unmounted zebra through the opening. -Springing to the ground, the foremost of the pursuers sought to grasp -Sedai, but with a swing of his club about his head, the assailant was -laid low, and Sedai disappeared. Through the crack of the door, as it -swung shut, came a heart-rending cry of “Enola, Enola,” from the King. - -Once more, with pale faces and beating hearts, the explorers stood -within the great subterranean cavern, which had so nearly been their -tomb, but which now was a place of refuge. The hidden City of On had -been discovered, its history and its people were known to them, the -object of their journey had been accomplished. - - -After the party had rested, they took their way across the cave, and -with the zebras this was found easy to do. These trained animals easily -leaped across the break in the bridge, but when it came to the small -entrance at the opposite side of the cave, it was feared that they would -have to be left here to die, as the hole was too small for them to pass -through. Our friends were greatly grieved to think that they would have -to leave these noble beasts to die in such a cruel way, in the cave, but -there seemed no other alternative, and they dismounted and passed -through the hole, but they had not calculated on the training of these -animals, and they had hardly stepped into the open air, when one of the -zebras came crawling through on his haunches, and shortly after the -others followed him. These had been trained to do this, and our friends -now remembered having seen them perform this trick on the night -preceding the Day of Resis. - -It took them but a short time to reach the village of Umsaga, where they -found the carriers still waiting for them, and in a few weeks they were -again in Zanzibar, and had no difficulty in getting passage to England, -from where they sailed for home. - -A few weeks after their arrival in New York, a double wedding was -announced, and on the evening of the happy day, carriage after carriage -rolled to the door of the Graham mansion, depositing richly clad women -and courtly men. Under an arch of flowers, a little later, stood four -people, arrayed in strange robes of silk, with bands of gold binding -their brows and with girdles of gold about their waists. - -In the costume of the Land of On, the double wedding was in progress, -and in the faces of the women could be read a story of trust and -confidence and love supreme, and in those of the men, the satisfaction -of proud manhood fitly crowned. - - - THE END. - - - MRS. MARY J. HOLMES’ NOVELS. - - Over a MILLION Sold. - -As a writer of domestic stories, which are extremely interesting, Mrs. -Mary Holmes is unrivalled. Her characters are true to life, quaint, and -admirable. - - Tempest and Sunshine. - English Orphans. - Homestead on the Hillside. - ’Lena Rivers. - Meadow Brook. - Dora Deane. - Cousin Maude. - Marian Grey. - Edith Lyle. - Daisy Thornton. - Chateau D’Or. - Queenie Hetherton. - Darkness and Daylight. - Hugh Worthington. - Cameron Pride. - Rose Mather. - Ethelyn’s Mistake. - Millbank. - Edna Browning. - West Lawn. - Mildred. - Forrest House. - Madeline. - Christmas Stories. - Bessie’s Fortune. - Gretchen. - Marguerite. - Dr. Hathern’s Daughters. (_New._) - - Price $1.50 per Vol. - - - AUGUSTA J. EVANS’ - - MAGNIFICENT NOVELS. - - Beulah, $1.75 - St. Elmo, $2.00 - Inez, $1.75 - Macaria, $1.75 - Vashti, $2.00 - Infelice, $2.00 - At the Mercy of Tiberius (_New_), $2.00. - -“The author’s style is beautiful, chaste, and elegant. Her ideas are -clothed in the most fascinating imagery, and her power of delineating -character is truly remarkable.” - - - MARION HARLAND’S - - SPLENDID NOVELS. - - Alone. - Hidden Path. - Moss Side. - Nemesis. - Miriam. - Sunny Bank. - Ruby’s Husband. - At Last. - My Little Love. - Phemie’s Temptation. - The Empty Heart. - From My Youth Up. - Helen Gardner. - Husbands and Homes. - Jessamine. - True as Steel. - - Price $1.50 per Vol. - -“Marion Harland understands the art of constructing a plot which will -gain the attention of the reader at the beginning, and keep up the -interest to the last page.” - - - MAY AGNES FLEMING’S - - POPULAR NOVELS. - - Silent and True. - A Wonderful Woman. - A Terrible Secret. - Norine’s Revenge. - A Mad Marriage. - One Night’s Mystery. - Kate Danton. - Guy Earlscourt’s Wife. - Heir of Charlton. - Carried by Storm. - Lost for a Woman. - A Wife’s Tragedy. - A Changed Heart. - Pride and Passion. - Sharing Her Crime. - A Wronged Wife. - Maude Percy’s Secret. - The Actress’ Daughter. - The Queen of the Isle. - The Midnight Queen. (_New._) - - Price $1.50 per Vol. - -“Mrs. Fleming’s stories are growing more and more popular every day. -These life-like conversations, flashes of wit, constantly varying scenes -and deeply interesting plots, combine to place their author in the very -first rank of Modern Novelists.” - - - JULIE P. SMITH’S NOVELS - - Widow Goldsmith’s Daughter $1 50 - Chris and Otho 1 50 - Ten Old Maids 1 50 - Lucy 1 50 - His Young Wife 1 50 - The Widower 1 50 - The Married Belle 1 50 - Courting and Farming 50 - Kiss and be Friends 50 - Blossom Bud 1 50 - - - JOHN ESTEN COOKE’S WORKS. - - Surry of Eagle’s Nest $1 50 - Fairfax 1 50 - Hilt to Hilt 1 50 - Beatrice Hallam 1 50 - Leather and Silk 1 50 - Miss Bennybel 1 50 - Out of the Foam 1 50 - Hammer and Rapier 1 50 - Mohun 1 50 - Captain Ralph 1 50 - Col. Ross of Piedmont 1 50 - Robert E. Lee 1 50 - Stonewall Jackson 1 50 - Her Majesty the Queen 1 50 - - - CELIA E. GARDNER’S NOVELS. - - Stolen Waters. (In verse) $1 50 - Broken Dreams. Do. 1 50 - Compensation. Do. 1 50 - A Twisted Skein. Do. 1 50 - Tested 1 50 - Rich Medway 1 50 - A Woman’s Wiles 1 50 - Terrace Roses 1 50 - Seraph—or Mortal? (New) 1 50 - - - A. S. ROE’S NOVELS. - - True to the Last $1 50 - A Long Look Ahead 1 50 - The Star and the Cloud 1 50 - I’ve Been Thinking. 1 50 - How could He Help It 1 50 - Like and Unlike 1 50 - To Love and Be Loved 1 50 - Time and Tide 1 50 - Woman Our Angel 1 50 - Looking Around 1 50 - The Cloud on the Heart 1 50 - Resolution 1 50 - - - CAPTAIN MAYNE REID’S WORKS. - - The Scalp Hunters $1 50 - The Rifle Rangers 1 50 - The War Trail 1 50 - The Wood Rangers 1 50 - The Wild Huntress 1 50 - The Maroon 1 50 - The Headless Horseman 1 50 - The Rangers and Regulators 1 50 - The White Chief 1 50 - The Tiger Hunter 1 50 - The Hunter’s Feast 1 50 - Wild Life 1 50 - Osceola, the Seminole 1 50 - The Quadroon 1 50 - The White Gauntlet 1 50 - Lost Leonore 1 50 - - - POPULAR HAND-BOOKS. - - The Habits of Good Society—The nice points of taste and good - manners $1 00 - The Art of Conversation—For those who wish to be agreeable - talkers 1 00 - The Arts of Writing, Reading and Speaking—For Self-Improvement 1 00 - Carelton’s Hand-Book of Popular Quotations 1 50 - 1000 Legal Don’ts—By Ingersoll Lockwood 75 - 600 Medical Don’ts—By Ferd. C. Valentine, M.D. 75 - On the Chafing Dish—By Harriet P. Bailey 50 - Pole on Whist 1 00 - Draw Poker without a Master 50 - - - POPULAR NOVELS, COMIC BOOKS, ETC. - - Les Miserables—Translated from the French. The only complete - edition $1 50 - Stephen Lawrence—By Annie Edwardes 1 50 - Susan Fielding Do. Do. 1 50 - A Woman of Fashion Do. Do. 1 50 - Archie Lovell Do. Do. 1 50 - Love (L’Amour)—English Translation from Michelet’s famous French - work 1 50 - Woman (La Femme)—The Sequel to “L’Amour.” Do. Do. 1 50 - Verdant Green—A racy English college story. With 200 comic - illustrations 1 50 - Doctor Antonio—By Ruffini 1 50 - Beatrice Cenci—From the Italian 1 50 - Josh Billings His Complete Writings—With Biography, Steel - Portrait, and 100 Ill. 2 00 - Artemas Ward. Complete Comic Writings—With Biography, Portrait, - and 50 Ill. 1 50 - Children’s Fairy Geography—With hundreds of beautiful - Illustrations 1 00 - - - AUGUSTA J. EVANS’ - - MAGNIFICENT NOVELS. - - BEULAH, $1.75 - ST. ELMO, 2.00 - INEZ, 1.75 - MACARIA, 1.75 - VASHTI, 2.00 - INFELICE, 2.00 - AT THE MERCY OF TIBERIUS, 2.00 - - A Prominent Critic says of these Novels: - -“The author’s style is beautiful, chaste, and elegant. Her ideals are -clothed in the most fascinating imagery, and her power of delineating -character is truly remarkable. One of the marked and striking -characteristics of each and all her works is the purity of sentiment -which pervades every line, every page, and every chapter.” - - - Mrs. Mary J. HOLMES’ Works. - - TEMPEST AND SUNSHINE. - ENGLISH ORPHANS. - HOMESTEAD ON HILLSIDE. - ’LENA RIVERS. - MEADOW BROOK. - DORA DEANE. - COUSIN MAUDE. - MARIAN GREY. - EDITH LYLE. - DAISY THORNTON. - CHATEAU D’OR. - QUEENIE HETHERTON. - BESSIE’S FORTUNE. - MARGUERITE. - DARKNESS AND DAYLIGHT. - HUGH WORTHINGTON. - CAMERON PRIDE. - ROSE MATHER. - ETHELYN’S MISTAKE. - MILLBANK. - EDNA BROWNING. - WEST LAWN. - MILDRED. - FOREST HOUSE. - MADELINE. - CHRISTMAS STORIES. - GRETCHEN. - DR. HATHERN’S DAUGHTERS. - MRS. HALLAM’S COMPANION. (_New_.) - -OPINIONS OF THE PRESS. - -“Mrs. Holmes’ stories are universally read. Her admirers are numberless. -She is in many respects without a rival in the world of fiction. Her -characters are always life-like, and she makes them talk and act like -human beings, subject to the same emotions, swayed by the same passions, -and actuated by the same motives which are common among men and women of -every-day existence. Mrs. Holmes is very happy in portraying domestic -life. Old and young peruse her stories with great delight, for she -writes in a style that all can comprehend.”—_New York Weekly._ - -THE NORTH AMERICAN REVIEW, vol. 81, page 557, says of Mrs. Mary J. -Holmes’ novel “English Orphans”: “With this novel of Mrs. Holmes’ we -have been charmed, and so have a pretty numerous circle of -discriminating readers to whom we have lent it. The characterization is -exquisite, especially so far as concerns rural and village life, of -which there are some pictures that deserve to be hung up in perpetual -memory of types of humanity fast becoming extinct. The dialogues are -generally brief, pointed, and appropriate. The plot seems simple, so -easily and naturally is it developed and consummated. Moreover, the -story thus gracefully constructed and written, inculcates without -obtruding, but only pure Christian morality in general, but, with -especial point and power, the dependence of true success on character, -and of true respectability on merit.” - -“Mrs. Holmes’ stories are all of a domestic character, and their -interest, therefore, is not so intense as if they were more highly -seasoned with sensationalism, but it is of a healthy and abiding -character. The interest in her tales begins at once, and is maintained -to the close. Her sentiments are so sound, her sympathies so warm and -ready, and her knowledge of manners, character, and the varied incidents -of ordinary life is so thorough, that she would find it difficult to -write any other than an excellent tale if she were to try it.”—_Boston -Banner._ - -☞ The volumes are all handsomely printed and bound in cloth, sold -everywhere, and sent by mail, _postage free_, on receipt of price [$1.50 -each]. - -[Illustration] - - G. W. DILLINGHAM CO., Publishers, - 33 WEST 23d STREET, NEW YORK. - ------------------------------------------------------------------------- - - - - - TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES - - - 1. Silently corrected obvious typographical errors and variations in - spelling. - 2. Retained archaic, non-standard, and uncertain spellings as printed. - 3. Enclosed italics font in _underscores_. - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE DAY OF RESIS *** - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that: - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |